Home

AMOS 8.X Server Owner`s Manual

1. Page 7 4 Chapter Seven Figure 7 1 AMPCLiTE Enable Unsafe Disconnect To enable this feature from the AMPCTerm window Select Configuration Safe tab Virtual Terminal 1 Confiquirel 2 x Startup idle International Printer Smart Mouse Then check the Enable Unsafe Options Display Colors 1 Ermutator care Disconnection Warning checkbox Safe Disconnection 4 AN Ki Eriatis Unssre Discomiection Waming For the Safe String Enter vtm admin Safe string vtm admin Row i For the Unsafe Disconnect Warning message SE HR fill in The VTM terminal cannot be terminated Unsafe Disconnect Warning Enter the message to be displayed when an unsafe EE Then check the Require password Fill in a Password admin for example The VTM terminal cannot be terminated Select OK This will save the new settings in Virtual terminall zsc Unsafe Confirmation P C Standard Yes No Dialog Require password For further information select the Help Password pam from the terminal emulator window OK Cancel Figure 7 2 AMPCTerm Enable Unsafe Disconnect ALTERNATE TERMINAL EMULATORS The AMOS Servers are not limited to just one terminal emulator for the console The VAR can install other terminal emulators in a separate directory named for the terminal emulator AMOS will index the
2. eese enne nennen 6 25 BASKET TEE 6 26 SR ADMINISTRATION die geese sin aise tdt TE Ue p Le tpe a Ae 6 27 The System Control NEE 6 27 Administrative Tools Overvieuw eene nennen nennen nennen nennen ennt enne nne 6 29 Clear Application and System Logs eisirean a nen E Eea EE EEE SEEE E EEEE ea 6 29 Other Administrative Tools ieia eed ett ete t i ee te et eee ege EE 6 31 Adding a RAID Volume amp Selecting the RAID as Bootable for the AM 8000 6 32 Disk Defragmient r eee oe teen ie eee ede n Oe e FUR e ee Et uon ete ca 6 33 How toset XPE IP S 2 uet Hf tte E tete ei aget get ee te ete edel b derit ieu Eget 6 34 Disabling Folder Shares edet ERR SEI e ed 6 35 Configuration for a Complete Network Frewall eee eren rennen 6 36 Network Firewall Changes to Enable Remote Access rennen nenne 6 37 Remote Administration eot eee edt Hes E t Eee e eget eee tpe reet etude eee 6 39 Detining a Local Workgroup 2 Reg ba RR teet eei 6 40 PC Serial Port Installation and Renumbering Procedure sseseeeeeeeeeeeeseseeesesereseesressesreesesrrssresresse 6 40 GHOST SOFIWARBRE terree tee etae ee RESP iet eee RE ORE cen HS Rede diel 6 42 Ghost Backup Procedure uiu mE teet ee e HH SERE U Eee cH ee Re AAA 6 44 Optional Image Integrity Check 6 45 Ghost EXploFer EE 6 46 Ghost Restore Procedlre ense Dee idee Hebert ele 6 46 System Software Load from Ghost CD or Disk Image 6 47 New drives A
3. 00 Boot monitor file name AMOS32 MON Boot initialization file name AMOS32 INI Serial port 0 speed 19200 Display console boot messages No emory Size Refresh Auto 4K Use UP DOWN or TAB keys to select an item Use LEFT and RIGHT keys to change item Press ESCAP ji when done The above shows the default CMOS settings used when initializing the CMOS As indicated on the screen you use the T WJ and TAB keys to select a parameter To change a parameter use the and keys to cycle through its possible settings The only exceptions are file names which you type Primary Boot Device Type This parameter selects the type of device which the controller will boot from In all Server configurations PCI must be selected for AMOS 8 x to boot If you select Flash the Controller will boot up in single user diagnostic mode for technician test use only AMOS 8 x is not active when booted in this state Primary Boot Device Unit This parameter must always be 0 Alternate Boot Device Type This parameter must always be NONE Alternate Boot Device Unit This parameter must always be 0 AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page F 2 Appendix F Boot Monitor File Name This parameter lets you change the name of the monitor file to be loaded during boot from flash only The standard file name is AMOS32 MON This monitor file must exist and reside in account 1
4. Page 7 2 Chapter Seven C NAM8000NEAMOS folder C NAM8000NEAMOSNEAMOS MON C NAM8000NEAMOSNEAMOS INI C NAM8000NEAMOSNEAMOS AMD C NAM8000NError Logs folder C NAM8000NWINXPN folder Cc WINDOWS DOT NET 2 0 installed with VC 6 0 8 0 libraries The Windows XPE operating system folders files and programs must be present for the Server to boot o C Windows and all its subdirectories and files o C Program Files folder and all sub directories and programs o C Documents and Settings folder and all sub folders files and programs Please don t erase any programs or files in these folders and sub folders The XPE operating system needs these to operate The XPE kernel is small enough not to concern any person using the AMOS 8 x Servers The basic size including AMOS and two AMD disk files is not much larger than 1 6GB in total size The minimum size disk partition is 4 15 GB allowing room for log files system updates and backups SWITCHING BETWEEN AMOS AND XPE To switch between the VTM1 job and XPE system press on the console keyboard This will display the lt AM8000 System Diagnostics window under the control of AlphaShell From the lt AM8000 Diagnostics gt window select Tools to gain access to the Control Panel Task manager Notepad Editor or Norton Ghost The Control Panel has been discussed in detail in Chapter 6 The Notepad editor can be used to chang
5. gt Anmober 1 CHSVIDIA ner MOP Haspasrka Contnnlier eere perc Figure 3 12 Network Tab for Eagle 800 system displayed in the hardware configuration Only one network adapter needs to be mapped for AMOS use Only the actively mapped network adapter should have a physical cable connecting it to an Ethernet switch D Do not disable any Ethernet port in the XPE Device Manager All network adapters must be AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 3 12 Chapter Three SCSI Devices Tab On an AMOS Server all installed SCSI and ATAPI compatible devices present on the host should be identified in the upper portion of the SCSI Devices screen as shown in Figure 3 13 The detected devices can be mapped to an AMOS SCSI device numbers 0 through 6 by dragging the selected device to the AMOS SCSI device number desired Tape drives are normally mapped as AMOS device 6 and the CD DVD BluRay device is mapped as Device 5 This leaves the other 5 IDs open for AMOS formatted disk drives which can be attached to the system for data transfer Normally moving the data from the AMOS formatted drive to an AMD disk file is preferred The AMOS formatted drives are not known to the XPE OS and cannot take advantage of XPE disk caching software AM8000 Configuration Bd General Amos Disks Virtual Terminals Serial Ports Printers Network Scsi Devices SCSI and ATAPI devices detected on PC Check to inhibit SCSI and ATAPI
6. AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 Hints Restrictions amp Shortcuts Page 7 5 C AM8000 Install CFG file to find which terminal emulator to use If another terminal emulator needs special Fonts these files should be installed into the C Windows Fonts folder The terminal emulator AM8000 directory organization should be as follows C NAM8000NAMPCLite contains Ampclite exe and all supporting files C NAM8000NAMPCTerm contains AMPCTerm exe and all supporting files C NAM8000NPcLink contains the optional PcLink Exe and all supporting files The C AM8000 Install Cfg file is shown below We have modified the standard one showing how to add the 3 terminal emulator package PcLink is a custom package by one of our VARs Settings DefaultEmulator AmpcLite TerminalEmulators Emul AmpcLite AmpcLite AmpcLite exe p Emu2 AmpcTerm AmpcTerm AmpcTerm exe p t Emu3 PcLink NPcLinkMPcLink exe vtm t Emu4 ALAN c Program files UASystems AlphaLant 9 0 Alan exe local Sp vtml aln RESTARTING AMOS AFTER EXIT During the initial boot of the Server there is no desktop as in XP Professional Instead lt AlphaShell gt controls the Server If the operator double clicks on the AlphaShell program box and presses the on the console keyboard the lt Windows Task Manger gt will appear Select the AlphaShell task with the mouse and left click which will highlight the AlphaShell task in the Task Mana
7. Cet ordinateur ne contient aucune pi ce configurable par l utilisateur qui n cessite l ouverture du boitier L alimentation de cet ordinateur peut preduire des nivaeux de tensions dangereux le boitier ne devrait donc tre ouvert que par un technician autoria SOFTWARE SECURITY DEVICE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Alpha Micro Software Security Device SSD is a customized integrated circuit that personalizes the computer providing identity verification for it Certain Alpha Micro and non Alpha Micro software may require that your computer contain an SSD in order to run software that has been customized to run only on your computer Please enter the identification of your SSD above The SSD identification number should be on your computer ID label under SSD Serial No Another way of finding the number is to look at the SSD itself The SSD is located in an integrated circuit location on the AM 113 XX board its identification number is printed on the SSD itself Software vendors may ask you for the SSD number if they are customizing software to run only on your computer ALPHA MICROSYSTEMS INC 17534 Von Karman Irvine CA 92614 800 289 2574 Table of Contents CHAPTER1 INTRODUCING AMOS 8 X SERVERS ceci eee eese essen senate seta sensns enano 1 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW eite E dot dO E RENS s 1 1 HARDWARE DE TAIE S 7 tree toi EHE e e ERE ee OE eben ud 1 3 AM 8000 Series II Multi Processor System Board 1 3 AM 8000 Multi Proc
8. If they are not you must redo the port assignment task above again If all is correct then Select with the mouse and Drag COMS in the left box and Drop onto COM assignment in the right box AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 6 42 Chapter Six c Repeat these steps for PORTS A 5 amp 6 or as many as may be needed d Select OK e Select gt File Exit and Quit 5 Select your TEST INI file in the AM8000 folder a Addthe PCCOM ports b Addthe TRMDEF JOBALC SETJOB statements c Finish and Save your TEST INI file 6 Create a Short Cut in the AM8000 folder a Copy and paste E810Sio Boot into the AM8000 Folder Right click and Rename the copy to E6Sio Boot or new name you choose Right click and Select Properties In the Shortcut Target line Place cursor over the L E10SIO INI and Type E6SIO INI e Select OK 7 Double click on the boot shortcut and verify that COMI through 6 are scanned and are assigned to an AMOS port 8 Testall new COM ports with serial devices and verify operation then you are done Bees GHOST SOFTWARE To enter the Ghost utility software from the lt Diagnostic gt window Select gt Tools gt Ghost and left click The lt Norton Ghost Basic gt menu will appear as shown in Figure 6 13 HAE AM8000 System 1 0 925c System Diagnostics 77 Fle Tools Configure Window Help S e Control Panel code 00 sn Create Task Manager for 17F62 J
9. LOG 25 1 Entering your user name instead of an account number is allowable The user is logged into the root account defined when the user name was set up For example LOG CARRIE SMITH This logs into Carrie Smith s root account If the account has a password assigned the user is asked for the password before the account transfer takes place The account number and password list for each device is separate so duplicate account numbers on different disks can have different passwords Once the user is logged onto the system LOG is used to switch to different accounts The user name is not needed again just the account number To completely specify which account is desired enter both the device and account number For example LOG Dsk2 36 14 User Name Alex ENTER User Password xxxxxx ENTER The password above is never echoed on the screen type the password up to 6 characters long and press return You only have to enter the device name if the same account exists on more than one device If the account does not exist a message is displayed on the screen indicating an invalid account number For more details about the LOG command see the System Commands Reference Manual For information about user names see the System Operator s Guide AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 AMOS Software Applications Page 4 5 THE TERMINAL KEYBOARD The first step in communicating with AMOS is to be able to type your instructions on
10. PARALLEL PRINTER PORT AMOS 8 x Servers have one parallel port The parallel port supports the industry standard Centronics interface The signal pin outs for the parallel ports are as follows cables longer than six feet PIN SIGNAL NAME Data strobe Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data 5 Data 6 Data 7 Data 8 Acknowledge Busy Paper error Select Auto line feed not used Error Printer reset Select in Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground A To insure the reliability and performance of your parallel ports avoid using parallel printer GO AJ Oh P AHA ra Table A 7 Centronics Interface Cabling Signal Pin out ETHERNET 10 100 AND 1GB RJ 45 CONNECTORS The Ethernet RJ 45 ports both 10 100 and 1 GB function exactly like other Ethernet ports on other Servers The following section explains some of the technical aspects of the Ethernet cable pin outs required when using one of these RJ 45 interface connectors All Ethernet ports must use parallel twisted paired Level 5 patch cords to connect to Ethernet hubs AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 Connector Configurations Page A 9 10 100BaseT Topology and Cabling The AM 8000 and Eagle 800 have one 10BaseT 100BaseT Ethernet port In addition the AM 8000 has a Gigabit port Ethernet can be connected via inexpensive twisted pair Level 5 compliant cabling with each computer having its own RJ 45 termination To use this technology a cent
11. To type a control character hold down the key and press the other key For example to type a Control C hold down the key and type the letter C In this book we indicate control characters this way CTRL Appendix B lists some of the control characters AMOS recognizes Table 4 1 Special Function Keys on the Terminal Keyboard Correcting Typing Mistakes To correct any mistakes you may make while typing a command line as long as you have not yet pressed the key You can o Press RUBOUT to erase single characters AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 4 6 Chapter Four o Type to move the cursor to the beginning of the line o Type to tell AMOS to ignore the line See the table above for explanations of and control characters If you press the key before correcting the mistake and the command entered was not a valid AMOS command AMOS informs the user it did not understand the command For example PRIMT PRIMT You meant to say PRINT After enclosing the unknown command in the AMOS prompt will display You can now try again If the AMOS line editor is enabled for the terminal you can recall a previous line to the screen by typing CTRL R In the sample conversation above press EIB WB at the AMOS prompt to recall the line PRIMT to the screen Use the Cl key to move back to the M without erasing characters and then type an N to overwrite the M Press the key to enter the command ag
12. for BlueRay DVR UPD DVR for UPDates DVR STR DVR RPC SYS N RPCLOD LIT ISAMP SYS AMSORT SYS uff TCP IPCINI N 200 200K ICP FTPD LIT ICP FTPD RTI TCP TELNED LIT TCP TELNED RTI TCP TAMED LIT E EE Lr PI RI EH PI LE E EE 16 ET H EX ICP TAMED RTI RTI LIT DVR TLP DVR TCP LPR LIT TCP LPR RTI E WUDHU VU U TO OM MOUNT DSK MOUNT SUB LOG SYS S ETJOB LOGJOB LOGTRM 50K LOGJOB JIN Virtual Terminals SETJOB VTM2 VTM2 500K JOB JIN SETJOB VTM3 VTM3 500K JOB JIN SETJOB VTM4 VTM4 500K JOB JIN SETJOB VTM5 VTM5 500K JOB JIN SETJOB VTM6 VIM6 500K JOB JIN AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page G 8 SETJOB SETJOB VTM7 VTM7 500K JOB JIN VTMS8 VTM8 500K JOB JIN pe com port jobs SETJOB SETJOB JBPC1 COM1 500K JOB JIN JBPC2 COM2 500K JOB JIN SERIAL PORTS A31810 SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB JOB001 S10001 500K JOB JOB002 S10002 500K JOB JOB003 SIO003 500K JOB JOB004 SIO004 500K JOB SERIAL PORTS AM359 SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB JOB200 SIO005 500K JOB JOB201 SIO006 500K JOB JOB202 SIO007 500K JOB JOB203 SIO008 500K JOB JOB204 SIO009 500K JOB JOB205 SIO010 500K JOB JOB206 SIO011 500K JOB JOB207 S10012 500K JOB SERIAL PORTS AM359 SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB
13. from the AMOS prompt nor schedulable All users must exit AMOS as this process will reboot the Server twice The process takes about 15 minutes for each 1 GB of compressed data Before loading your application software and data a complete AM 8000 Server s System Volume will compress to about 950MB Except for RAID subsystems On most Eagle 800s the system backup of the first drive takes about 600MB of space We strongly recommend using one or more DVD R media for this process At this time Norton Ghost 2003 will not backup to DVD RW or DVD RAM media In addition writing to a DVD R is twice as fast as writing toa DVD RW media Norton Ghost has many features and options These backups also provide the quickest way to load new disks including fully loading large partitions In addition individual compressed AMD drives can be restored for later random access incorrectly Ghost could DESTORY your data on the Bootable System Volume or other partitions You must understand how Ghost defines disk drives and what IMAGE files are before you start writing to drives The first level of Ghost documentation is available from the lt Help gt menu item on the Norton Ghost 2003 screen which the following procedure opens C Program Files Symantec Norton Ghost 2003 Ghost_Guide PDF is a local copy of the Norton Ghost User s Guide A Please read the Norton documentation if you wish to deviate from this procedure Used l Press to select lt AM8000
14. 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 9 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page G 5 Page G 6 TRMDEF TRMDEF TRMDEF SIO088 PCSIO 130 SIO089 PCSIO 131 SIO090 PCSIO 132 TRMDEF SIO091 PCSIO 133 TRMDEF SIO092 PCSIO 134 SERIAL PORTS AM359 TRMDEF SIO093 PCSIO 135 TRMDEF SIO094 PCSIO 136 TRMDEF SIO095 PCSIO 137 TRMDEF SIO096 PCSIO 140 TRMDEF SIO097 PCSIO 141 1 TRMDEF SIO098 PCSIO 142 TRMDEF SIO099 PCSIO 143 TRMDEF SIO100 PCSIO 144 SERIAL PORTS AM359 SIO101 PCSIO 145 SIO102 PCSIO 146 SIO103 PCSIO 147 SIO104 PCSIO z150 SIO105 PCSIO z151 SIO106 PCSIOz152 TRMDEF SIO107 PCSIO 153 TRMDEF SIO108 PCSIO 154 SERIAL PORTS AM359 1I10109 PCSIO 155 SIO110 PCSIO 156 SIO111 PCSIO 157 SIO112 PCSIO 160 SIO113 PCSIO 161 SIO114 PCSIO 162 TRMDEF SIO115 PCSIO 163 TRMDEF SIO116 PCSIO 164 SERIAL PORTS AM359 SIO117 PCSIO 165 SIO11
15. BluRay drive tray needs to be kept clean of dirt and dust Keep the tray closed when not changing media Clean the tray with a soft dry cloth at least 4 times a year Clean the face of the drive with a damp cloth to remove dirt from the door and eject button AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 8 2 Chapter Eight CARE OF STREAMING TAPE CARTRIDGES A cartridge tape can store data from an entire disk so it is worth taking care of properly Here are a few tips to follow o Store cartridges with the write protect switch in the SAFE position o Store cartridges on their edges not laying flat Storing cartridges flat can cause the tape to slip down on the hub and damage the tape edge o Keep magnets away from your tapes Even weak magnets such as those in paper clip holders can erase data on a cartridge tape o Don t expose tapes to very high or low humidity more than 80 or less than 20 o Cartridge tapes should be acclimated to computer room temperature and humidity conditions before use If the tape has been stored away from the computer it should be returned to the computer environment at least eight hours before use If it has been in a different environment for less than eight hours it should be kept in the computer location for at least as many hours as it was away from it V4 STREAMING TAPE DRIVE CLEANING It is important to clean the read write head of your tape drive periodically We recommend that you clean the
16. If you are familiar i iE ih Duplay Change the Cen with XP Professional this will be very E de Rechte E Garcia cure Custer He de DF Goren hres Bde hang and easy to understand All the settings are BIB Acrarietrative Ech Gare Conbolers Add remove Page Ch Faris ine eara Configas yar Inte already pre set for the System d nam MR Lond eegene Administrator by Alpha Microsystems G Prirturs acd Pace Hou Customine pour reo Goss and Cameras NC mhor Core Comec im other c Kl Schied Tags iP Carbone Configane enengss Da Shared Dixurments EL and Panes Zog ineiailed prin ai S tty heirt Places Aegonal ard Lan Cstoegre antiga iB Secycin Br Siesc nersand Cn Add remove pd c clin i i mi 1 Figure 6 1 System Control Panel AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 6 28 Chapter Six Normally you do not need to change any of these settings The functions or programs you should be concerned with are as follows Control Panel applications o Add or Remove Programs as of Series II systems both Eagle 800 and AM8000 this feature now functions Use this to properly Add or Remove program packages on the XPE side o Add Hardware functions but is rarely used Most preconfigured systems have all the hardware devices necessary already installed o Date and Time and time zone are settable o The console Display resolution The default video screen resolution is set to 768x 1024 Other display set
17. JOBALC VTM1 VTM2 JOB1 SCZDSP SCZPC SYS required DEVTBL DSK DEVTBL SUB DEVTBL TRM RES MEM DEVTBL STRO Tandberg streamer BITMAP DSK BITMAP SUB ERSATZ ERSATZ INI B 20 reserve 20 more blank ersatz slots MSGINI 50K SYSTEM SYSMSG USA SYSTEM CMDLIN SYS SYSTEM DVR TRM DVR SYSTEM DVR MEM DVR SYSTEM DVR RES DVR R R SYSTEM DVR ACD DVR SYSTEM DVR STR DVR SYSTEM DVR SUB DVR SYSTEM DVR UPD DVR for UPDates SYSTEM DVR DVD DVR for MAKDVD amp DVD SYSTEM DVR DBD DVR for BlueRay SYSTE SET HEX SET NOCACHE DSKO SET NOCACHE SUBO MOUNT DSK SETJOB VTM2 VTM2 500K JOB JIN SETJOB JOB1 SIO001 500K JOB JIN H SET PROMPT SAFE BOOT MEMORY 0 AM8000 INI System Start UP Date 2 11 08 mpw pally LOAD SYSMSG USA ensures error messages displayed as text AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page G 2 Appendix G LOAD AMO000 0VR 1 4 LOAD TRMDEF LIT 1 4 SLEEP 4 allow time for am11350 to boot TRMDEF VTM1 PCVTM 1 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 Console boot terminal VER TRMDEF VTM2 PCVTM 2 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 TRMDEF VTM3 PCVTM 3 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 TRMDEF VTM4 PCVTM 4 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 TRMDEF VTM5 PCVTM 5 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 TRMDEF VTM6 PCVTM 6 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 TRMDEF VTM7 PCVTM 7 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 TRMDEF VTM8 PCVTM 10 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 Q
18. You can now use SATA hard drives for system drives and data backups How to create a new AMD disk file Select the AMOS Disks tab Find an empty disk subsystem line Disk Subsystem 3 in this example and place the mouse cursor over AMOS Disk and left click With caps lock on type BIG and with the mouse Select Create button AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 AM8000 Configuration Program Page 3 17 AM8 amp 000 Configuration ew xi General Amos Disks Virtual Terminals Seal Ports Printers Network Scsi Devices Amos Disk PE Data File Amos System Disk psk JCMAMB000 4M8000 4MD Browse Create Disk Subsystem 1 suB Cx amp M8ODOXAmBksubamd Browse Create Disk Subsystem 2 ob E amp MS00DNOLD AMD Browse Create Disk Subsystem 3 Jee O Browse Eesen Disk Subsystem A z 1 Browse Create Disk Subsystem 5 i i l j Browse Create Disk Subsystem 5 z E ULL HH Browse Create Disk Subsystem 7 im Browse Create Disk Subsystem 8 zi Ur O Browse Create Disk Subsystem 9 urb Cx amp M800ONDec2004 amd Browse Create Figure 3 19 Creating an AMD Disk File In Step 1 specify a location for the AMD file and file name The window will have an input box so type in the location of the new disk file The E drive normally is reserved for the customer disk files and this will be the case for our example We will create the
19. You should see the internal drive and RAID system To sort the boot order use the arrow keys and the key to place the RAID first in the list the internal drive second and Bootable Add in cards last Set the boot order like this a lt Boot Select Menu gt 00 AIC 7902B 0 Raid 00 AIC 7902A 0 Seagate ST318453LW Bootable Add in cards Press to select Exit Saving Changes Press to display Setup Confirmation YES Press this should restart the Server with the RAID disk as the Boot Volume making it the C SystemVolume For AM8000 Series II systems Press key to enter BIOS setup during POST Next press Kl 3 times to Select Boot Menu you should see a Boot Settings Configuration b Boot Device Priortiy c Hard Disk Drives d Removable Drives CD DVD Drives Press LJ to select Hard Disk Drives and press ENTER The 1 Drive is highlighted press ENTER to select it A popup menu will show all the drives connected to the system You should see the internal drive and RAID system To change the boot order use the down arrow to select the RAID drive and press ENTER The boot order should look like this 1 1 Drive 00 AIC 7902B 0 Raid 2 2 Drive 00 AIC 7902A 0 ST336753LW Press then press the Right Arrow 4 times fo select Exit Press to display Save Confirmation OK Press this should restart the Server with the RAID disk as the Boot Volume making it the C SystemVolume Verify that the system works correctly a
20. drive When you are satisfied with your changes switch tasks from VTM1 to the lt AM8000 Configure program and invert the identities of the DSK and SUB devices Select gt OK and File gt Restart and the system should shutdown and reboot from the original DSK device Remember that the alternate boot file or the AMS000 AMD disk file does not have to be in the C AM8000 folder It may reside on E AM8000 or another disk drive or RAID subsystem installed on the Server An alternate way to do the same thing is invert the DSK and Sub devices and save the new configuration with the Select gt OK ALT Tab back to VTM1 and LOG OPR execute a MONTST AM8000 This will shutdown the AM8000 program write to the system registry and restart AMOS 8 x without having to power down If the internal hard drive completely fails and you do not have another hard drive or RAID subsystem to boot from then the AMOS 8 x Bootable Recovery CD is your only choice to restore the system to a bootable state First replace the bad drive with the same size or larger drive Refer to the hardware service manual for the correct procedures to replace the defective drive Then follow the Ghost restore procedure to load the AMOS 8 x release back onto the replacement hard drive After the Ghost restore finishes the system should boot up into the standard configuration that left Alpha Microsystems originally If the System Administrator created an on site Ghost backup of the C
21. selection in the File menu will power down the system and restart The system must go through the system POST phase and the SCSI scan phase which takes a while To shut down and power off the Server and stay off Select Shutdown from the File menu Both Reboot and Shutdown will flush the disk caches AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 Page 3 14 System Restart As a faster alternative to a complete reboot you can restart the Server in order for the new settings to be read and activated from the new System Registry by selecting the lt AlphaShell gt task in the lower left corner of the console screen and double click on it The lt AlphaShell gt message window will display AM8000 Operating System is running Press on the console keyboard This will display the Windows Task Manger Select AlphaShell in the Windows Task Manger screen to highlight it in blue Double click on the End Task button to restart AMOS 8 x Minimize the Windows Task Manger by Select in the upper right of the application window Other AM8000 Information and Tools If you select the Help item from the AM8000 Diagnostics window you will see the current version of the AM8000 software and information on the software libraries in use Chapter Three Windows Tih Fier Fie Ce wes Windows Help Applications Processes Performance Mebworking Users Processes 2t CPUa iD jrma Change 82M
22. 1 Primary NTFS Disk Load New Size 39197 the size for S3Am8000 is 70007 for S3Eagle800 the size is 152626 an input box is highlighting the New Size or use the Old size number which the drive was partitioned for which is displayed on the right In Destination drive details to delete new size and type in your number if the number displayed is wrong Type the number written on the left side of the CD label Examples below C 5004 isthe S1 amp S2 Eagle 800 Volume size C 19602 is the S1 Eagle 800 Volume size for early systems C 19092 is the value of some Eagle 800 Internal RAID systems C 4251 isthe S1 amp S2 AM 8000 internal drive volume size C 7577 is the S3 Eagle800 internal drive Boot volume size C 7569 is the S3 AM 8000 internal drive Boot volume size Press ENTER If the drives were resized during the manufacturing phase the new number will be written on the CD label If the number being entered is larger than the original C drive size the next partition the D drive will get written over and you will loose the D drive data Be very careful and accurate For S1 amp S2 systems the drive letter was E 11 Press the key to select OK press ENTER 12 The message box will display and ask lt Proceed with disk restore Destination drive will be permanently overwritten gt 13 Now to start the lt Norton Ghost restore gt No is highlighted so you can cancel this operation if you wish Press the to YES then pre
23. 14374 Figure 3 15 End AlphaShell Task to Restart About AMB000 E E xl AMBDDD Computer System Release Version 1 0 8366 alpha micro Copyright 2002 2005 Alpha Microsystems Inc Acknowdedgements PAPE Euycther Library Copyright 2031 PCAUSA Ci SCSpee Library Copyright d 15958 2001 Micro Magic GE Figure 3 16 About AM8000 The other diagnostic information windows are accessed through the pull down box under Window of the System Diagnostics screen These are information windows and are not used very often Most of the important information is in the first System Diagnostics window To select the other windows move the mouse cursor over window name desired and left click AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 AM8000 Configuration Program Page 3 15 W AMBOO0 System 10 92502 File Tools Configure window Hek Listening on port cocci Creating DIR proces Tile n ccept called Far Socket request fron Listening on part aa 2 fmm Diagnostics Creating UTHi proces Sak Diagnostics Unfccept called For 3 AMITS 5n Packet Trace Seckel request Fran Nemarork Diagnostic Listening on pork ep 4 H ES Crpat inn UTH protes EE E n ccept called far ga in Socket request Fram 127 8 0 1 seroptod For wirtual termi iH A rtual termi on virtual p hui rtual termi nm virtual pe f sess Figure 3 17 Diagnostic Windows The System Control Panel To access the XPE system Control Panel
24. 45 pin out that has the same signal pairing as the AM 359 ports that Alpha Micro has historically used The difference in this adapter was made in 2006 to connected most PC COM ports to terminals and printers and allow the correct handshake This cabling system uses twisted pair parallel patch cords between the Server end and the peripheral device The following table shows the signal to pin orientation applicable to each standard DB 9 serial I O connector Server End FDB9 RJ 45 pin Direction Pin Color Pair Signal Pin P2 P3 P3 3 pins tied Table A 1 PC COM port MDB 9 Modular adapter connector Signals DWB 10317 30 Do not drive devices on PC COM ports longer than 100 feet Some COM ports do not drive the cable with full 12 volts Some COM ports only output 9V which can cause reliability problems AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 Connector Configurations Page A 5 AM 113 XX or AM 359 RJ 45 Serial Port Connector Signals This table shows the standard AMOS RJ 45 serial port pin out The signals are grouped into pairs which will also allow longer and more reliable communication to the Server The AM 359 50 Female DB9 adapter pin out is on the right hand side of this table Server End RJ45 FDB 9 modular adapter RJ45 Signal Pin Direction Pin Color Pin Pair Table A 2 RJ 45 Serial Connector Signals AM 359 50 Cable adapter RS 232 DB 25 Terminal or Printer Adapters This section documents the signal
25. 6 Do not define the DEVTBL or BITMAP statements in the INI Allocate SMEM for the Bitmaps so that they will XMOUNT correctly Start at 20 MB and add more if any other AMD files will be used The amount of SMEM required is proportional to the bitmap size of the AMD file being mounted Save the INI file Log DVR and COPY UPD DVR PCDSK DVR if it does not already exists Log OPR and MONTST the new INI and boot the system normally From AMOS execute XMOUNT Dev for example XMOUNT UPD The system will respond with how many logicals the AMD disk file contains Execute MOUNT DEV for example MOUNT UPD The system will respond by mounting the UPD device with as many logical drives as the AMD disk file contains 10 To un mount the UPD disks in our example type XMOUNT UPD U poo cO Um This technique can even be used interactively by changing the Disk filename to another name on a different logical and exit the Configure screen Then execute XMOUNT UPD followed by the MOUNT UPD command This will mount the new AMD disk file AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 6 26 Chapter Six How this works is a lot like DVD RAM and the DVD LIT program When XMOUNT is executed the UPD device gets DEVTBL and BITMAP entries in the system When MOUNT is executed it will load the bitmap and displays the new disk labels The drives are then used just like the standard method AMD disk files on removable USB hard disks can then be mounted or un mo
26. 650 AM 651 AM 652 SLR tape drives all have a Wide LVD SCSI interface o The AM 448 RAID subsystem uses a wide LVD interface SCSI 160 and is normally attached to the first high speed SCSI bus A special cable adapter can be ordered to make the first high speed SCSI bus accessible externally The first SCSI bus on the AM 8000 is reserved for Ultra 320 Disk drives Normally the AM 65x tape drive is placed on the second SCSI channel If you install a slow speed Single Ended interface drive on this channel the whole bus slows down to the slowest device Do not mix slow single ended interface devices and fast LVD devices on the SCSI bus For the Eagle 800 Server the narrow bus devices are connected internally such as the 4 Streaming Tape drive External connection to the PCI SCSI card requires a VHDCI interface cable An External SCSI RAID system may be connected Both busses are available on the rear panel but do not need a SCSI terminator until an expansion cable is used Then a terminator must be placed on the external subsystem back panel AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page E 2 Appendix E WIDE SCSI CONFIGURATION RULES Each Wide SCSI bus allows up to 15 SCSI IDs so the limiting factors are the number of device bays in the chassis and cabling considerations Because of the high performance of each Wide SCSI bus it is critical to follow the cabling specification strictly or performance and reliability will suffer T
27. 8 x Server 3 The AM 8000 Series I Server can house up to two PCI 8 port serial I O cards into the two spare PCI bus slots on the main board or you may install externally two 8 port USB Serial I O boxes The maximum PC serial ports allowed are 18 in any AMOS 8 x Server These serial ports provide 9 pin male connectors to mate with your serial devices 4 The AM8000 Series II Server cannot use the older 32 bit PCI 8 port cards There is only one 32 bit slot that is reserved for the AM113 50 Multifunction Controller However USB serial I O boxes can be used on the two USB ports on the rear panel 5 The Eagle 800 Series I has two spare PCI bus slots on the main board so you can install two 8 port PCI serial boards or one SCSI controller and one 8 port PCI serial board You can also install two 8 port USB expansion boxes but the maximum allowable PC serial port count is 18 The Series II Eagle 800 has 5 total PCI slots one for the AM 113 45 and 4 expansion slots AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 Introducing AMOS 8 x Servers Page 1 9 Parallel Printer Port All AMOS 8 x Servers have one industry standard parallel printer port In most installations network printing is used so there is less need for local LPT ports Refer to Appendix A for cabling info Network Hardware All models of the AMOS 8 x Servers contain an Ethernet port allowing AMOS access to a network The AM 8000 Series I main board has two Ethernet ports The Gigabit E
28. AM 3501 chassis will hold a maximum of 7 boards In the EAMOS INI SIOI ports 0 through 67 octal may be uncommented for use The AM 905 31 chassis can support the whole range SIO1 ports 0 through 167 octal All these ports will then get re assigned to AMOS 8 x when the normal AM8000 INI file is executed AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page F 4 Appendix F CPUPIC Procedure The only time the system administrator or servicing technician needs to change this EAMOS INI is when the AM 113 xx board is replaced in the system or the main CPU board is changed The two boards are branded together with the CPUPIC or Magic Code number Modify the EAMOS INI 1 2 In lt Explorer gt locate and Select gt EAMOS INI double click on it This will launch the Notepad editor In the lt Notepad gt editor a Edit this file and Comment out the line AMSIO VTMS Pseudo null by inserting a 3 in column 1 b Now the next line down REMOVE the so the AMSIO VTM8 PCVTM 10 AM62C line uncommented c Below is how the EAMOS INI file should look when this procedure is complete Virtual Terminals AMSIO LIT VTM8 PSEUDO NULL 100 100 100 shipping mode AMSIO LIT VIM8 PCVTIM 10 AM62c 200 200 200 CPUPIC mode d Select gt File gt Save e Select gt File gt Exit Verify that the VTMS assignment in the lt AM8000 configuration menu is defined This is shown in Figure 3 6 of Chap
29. AM8000 Diagnostic screen Select File gt Shutdown 4 Or use the xAdmin utility ShutDn from any terminal This utility will power off the Server Read the on line help files on the system 5 If the system will not power down after a few minutes using the above procedures you should first try pressing and holding the AC power button on the front panel for about ten seconds until it powers off If the server still will not power off turn the rocker switch on the rear panel to the OFF position 6 Data corruption may occur if any data has not been flushed to disk when the server is powered off using the hardware switches 7 Once the system is off turn the rocker switch on the rear panel off if the inside of the chassis will be serviced GETTING ASSISTANCE If you have followed all of the instructions in this chapter but the Server is not working you probably want help Call your VAR or the Alpha Micro Technical Assistance Center at 800 487 7877 AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Chapter 3 AM8s000 Configuration Program This chapter contains two types of information basic concepts about the way the AMOS 8 x Server is set up and operates and general procedures for the configuration of the AM8000 environment We will cover the following o Booting the AMOS 8 x Server o Configuration Program o Creating your own System Disk For the next chapters below is an additional text description for programs and actions n
30. DWB 10317 25 modular adapter makes these ports look just like an AM 359 serial port or AM 113 xx ports The system may also be equipped with the PCI 8 port PC COM port interface and Octopus cable supplied with male DB9 connectors The USB 8 port serial interface also can be used with the AMOS 8 x Servers The USB box has a 4 conductor USB cable The flat end connector is plugged into the Server rear panel USB port The square connector is plugged into the USB box The USB cable supplies 5V power and high speed data All the PC COM options can use DWB 10317 25 modular adapters for each DB9 port to make the external cabling compatible with AM 359 style connector pin outs What Is RS 232 All AMOS Servers support RS 232 RS 232 is the name of a standard developed by the Electronic Industry Association EIA to encourage standardized interfacing of devices to computer systems The letters RS stand for Recommended Standard The RS 232 interface standard specifies electrical signal characteristics and names and defines the functions of the signal and control lines that make up the interface Basically implementing this standard involves assigning standardized signal definitions for the various pins of the RS 232 connector at either end of the terminal or printer cables For example the wire attached to Pin 2 carries the signal interpreted on the computer end as Input Data from the Terminal and on the terminal end as Transmit Data To Computer You
31. Defragmenter 6 34 Disk drive device names 4 2 Disks Tab 3 4 DSKANA command 6 14 CHECK option 6 15 options 6 15 DVD software 6 26 AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 5 E Eagle 450 TX terminal server 1 8 Eagle 800 Bios 1 13 Eagle 800 CPU board 1 4 1 5 Eagle 800 Server 1 3 EAMOS 1 13 EAMOS INI F 4 Electrical noise 2 8 Embedded AMOS F 3 Environmental specifications 2 6 Ethernet A 8 cabling A 9 Expanding the AMOS 8 x Server 2 10 External terminator E 3 F Fast Wide SCSI See Wide SCSI FCC ruling A 2 File names AMOS 10 2 names WINDOWS 10 2 Firewall 7 9 configure 6 36 FMDOS 10 1 10 4 command format 10 2 options 10 4 wildcards 10 2 FMTS2 Command 6 16 Folders sharing 6 35 Formatting diskette 6 22 hard disk 6 16 Front panel 2 3 deskside chassis 2 3 FULNET INI 6 13 Function key C 1 summary C 2 terminal emulators C 2 using C 1 G Ghost software 6 42 restore 6 47 Graphic 3 1 Graphics printing 6 6 Graphics conventions 1 14 Grounding 2 7 Page 6 H Hard disk drive formatting 6 16 6 22 Hardware details 1 3 Hidden Features 1 13 I INI files samples G 1 INSTAS 4 1 Installation Overview 2 3 Installing AMOS 8 x software 2 10 Installing system software 2 10 ISAM 1 11 J Jobs adding 6 9 JOBALC statement 6 9 JOBS command 6 9 SETJOB statement 6 10 6 11 WAI
32. Protocols by selecting Permit All An alternate is to only add IP Protocols 0 1 6 and 17 To test the VNC connection use the procedure titled Remote Administration AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 System Administration Page 6 39 WEE internet Frotocal CREDA Advanced TCP IP HEN EE Geren senate Gott sat Biel weis Bptions ou can get F amiga peep retirar E Fini FROU Senn EO Ea UE TCPAP Teng j ert dee Poos Fiet BEE Li Ebe TCEAE Filtering Ml raara Cin Packet Scheduler wi Ee pel Pade arg Subnet Trank 1 berg Al E E internet Protecal TOP p E Parmi Cnky Dest ned ghee mcs j T Ohm Deck i r Damcsimticn I Lina fra folowing DHS m vilis inii ond n b j Egdered ONG garyat Figure 6 12 Firewall Enable for VNC to Function Remote Administration AMOS 8 x Servers may be remotely managed with the UltraVNC program UltraVNC software allows a Virtual Network Connection to the XPE side of the Server This allows the VAR or system administrator to configure or make minor system changes without being at the Console Terminal To allow this access an Ethernet network must be used The network router must allow TCP port 5900 to pass through The IP of the XPE side of the Server is what the remote administrator connects to The remote system must install the UltraVNC viewer and provide the Server s password to gain access to the AMOS Server Ultra VNC uses the XPE side s IP addres
33. Sege ee OR CR e m E e e e n 3 14 Figure 3 17 Diagnostic Windows eee pet e teri esee ep ete EENS NEE 3 15 Figure 3 18 System Control Panel due ee eee dtm ses i sut eee dee te do etae aee ee 3 15 Figure 3 19 Creating an AMD Disk blei 3 17 Figure 3 20 AMOS Disks Detinied det e Re Atte e ee e ee 3 18 Figure 3 21 Location of BIGT AMD 5 eet etn Ee cett ete eee EEN eege 3 19 Figure 4 1 AM 8000 PIC Program essent eene nennen nennen nentes tenete tnnt tnter 4 1 AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 Table of Contents Page ix This one window has the greatest power and largest options to control the AMOS 8 x Servers settings If you are familiar with XP Professional this will be very easy to understand All the settings are already pre set for the System Administrator by Alpha Microsystems eene ene 6 27 Figure 6 1 System Control Panel iet ENEE dE 6 27 Figure 6 2 Computer Management Event Viewer Clear Application Logs esses 6 29 Figure 6 3 Computer Management Event Viewer Select No save of the Application logs 6 30 Figure 6 4 Computer Management Event Viewer Select System logs to be cleared 6 30 Figure 6 5 Computer Management Event Viewer Select No save of the system logs 6 31 Figure 6 6 Administrative Tools iet er E ette leto ete oe aont eei bee ple bee ha etg 6 31 Figure 6 7 Computer Mana
34. Server Each disk drive and other storage devices have their own device names terminals and printers are defined somewhat differently These device names are defined in the AM8000 INI system initialization file Alpha Micro device names conform to a specific format to make it easy for you and the Server to refer to the same piece of equipment All device names contain three letters and a number and end with a colon For example DSK where is a decimal number up to 3 digits DSK is usually the name for a hard disk device and STRO is the name of a streaming tape drive Having names for each device let s you specify which device is to be used for a specific command This permits you to see a list of files from just one disk drive or copy data from one disk logical to another drive Normally the Servers are setup as two logical drives C amp E for the first physical hard drive formatted as NTFS under XPE Each drive should contain an AM8000 folder where multiple AMD disk files should be located The AM 8000 system only boots from the AMD pseudo drives The standard boot drive that is shipped is C AM8000 AM8000 AMD which is 6 logical drive of 32MB each contains logical devices named DSK0 DSK1 DSK2 DSK3 DSK4 amp DSK5 The different pseudo disk drives may be generated with different number of logicals AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 AMOS Software Applications Page 4 3 The example here will be the DSK device with 12 logica
35. Server should be part of the local work group so it may be located easily To change to your installation s workgroup execute the following procedure In Control Panel Select System and left double click The System Properties menu will display Select Computer Name Select Change button to Display the Computer Name Changes menu a In the Member of box the Workgroup input box will display APD Type over this entry with your local workgroup name Select OK button XPE will then join the local workgroup you entered Close the System Properties by Select gt OK Close the Control Panel Select gt X ZS kt sn pn Browse the My Network Places from the Explorer application locate and double click on Microsoft Windows Network Under this selection find the new workgroup name you entered Double click on that new name Under this selection you should see the 51 AM80008n075 or S1Eagle800Sn035 system name along with other systems or workstations in the local workgroup Your system will have a different SNOOO PC Serial Port Installation and Renumbering Procedure This procedure is required only when you add in a new PCI or USB serial interface to the system When installing the Ports_Class the driver takes up the next COM port assignment usually port 3 even though the Ports_Class doesn t use COM3 This procedure is for a four port card If you are installing an 8 port card just re
36. System Diagnostics a Press T to open Tools 2 Tools gt menu Press J to Ghost Press to start Ghost 3 Press to reselect lt AM8000 System Diagnostics a Select File Exit b Select Quit to close down AM8000 Make sure users are logged off AMOS must be shut down to perform the Ghost Backup c Norton Ghost 2003 The Help item is in the upper right corner of this screen 4 Norton Ghost gt application window Ghost Basic item is selected a Press to Select Backup Press 5 Backup Wizard application screen Next is highlighted Press 6 Backup a disk or partition gt Source we will do just the C partition in this example Disk 1 gt is Selected with System Volume C gt amp Data Volume D gt You could select both platters which will backup the whole disk drive but not in this example a With the mouse only Select System Volume C for this example AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 System Administration Page 6 45 b On the Destination gt menu side Select either File or Recordable CD or DVD a File Press The dot should also move down b Recordable CD or DVD Press Does a lt Next gt c lt Create a new backup image gt If you like change the description in the Image description box type in what is being backed up the version and patch level The date is already displayed Press to Back and again to lt Next gt is highlighted P
37. The AM8000 Series I II and III are a dual processor system aimed at larger business applications The Series I II III Eagle 800 and 800LC are single processor systems targeted at smaller more cost sensitive installations These Servers are many times faster than previous generation AMOS computers yet compatible with legacy application software The AMOS 8 x Servers are constructed in modular fashion Your organization can start with just the features and capacity needed then expand the system as processing demands increase The system can be field upgraded to provide more disk storage memory and tape backup capacity to add more local cable connected terminals and printers to exchange data over a local area network with personal computers and other data processing systems and to communicate through modems with remote data centers The AMOS 8 x Server enclosures fit neatly next to a desk and can interface to RAID subsystems USB disk devices and USB serial devices These Servers support DVD RAM and CD RW peripheral devices as well as SCSI tape and SCSI or IDE disk drives For high performance the AM 8000 includes a SCSI 320 disk drive and the Eagle 800 series I amp II includes an ATA 133 disk drive as standard equipment Figure 1 1 Series AM 8000 Deskside Chassis Figure 1 2 Series Eagle 800 Deskside Chassis AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 1 2 Chapter One All system types can be optionally configured in a rack moun
38. XPE INTO AMOS PMIDOS cece eeceesseceseeseeeseeeeeeeeaecnaecaeenaeeneeeees 10 4 COPYING FILES TO ANOTHER PC COMPUTER AAA 10 5 COPYING FILES TO OTHER ALPHA MICRO COMPUTERS AAA 10 5 APPENDIX A CONNECTOR CONFIGURATIONS eeeeeeeeee eese ente tn aestas tnn asta sn etn snan A 1 SERIAL VO CONNECTORS 2 2 til HI ehe ete et EHE a e gere E RR ee A 1 What IS RS 232 ege Seed Rte EP e ee Re p et tee N R ea A A 1 reiege EE A 2 CABLE CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES 2 tinte teet ott NEEN EHNEN dE AEN A 2 Cable Letngthi 54 oue Ee GRE HH e Ge eet tre ee dere ee ERE Eta A 2 Cable Types EE A 2 SERIAL ADAPTERS reet he ead sla ab pae ENEE ee RU ege exce neo ecce rd A 3 PC COM Port RS 232 DB 9 Connector Sugnals eese eene nennen A 3 AM 113 XX or AM 359 RJ 45 Serial Port Connector Signals eee A 4 RS 232 DB 25 Terminal or Printer Adapters esee eee A 5 Serial Modem Modular Adapter eese eere aia A 6 Workstation Modular Adapters A 7 PARALLEL PRINTER PORT et ene ete He eae A 8 ETHERNET 10 100 AND 1GB RJ 45 CONNECTORS eterne rennen A 8 10 100BaseT Topoelogy and Cablmg 2 iier enti et cte ortae nete Le A 9 Gigabit Topology and Cablimg etc e ua e aee NEE A 9 AM 8000 UPS ST AW US POR cuire tee ron ee e Repente pa epe EEN de A 10 INDUSTRY STANDARD DEV JCES ettet tese tes eth te Rete eee hee gena A 10 APPENDIX B THE CONTROL CHARACTERS eere
39. adding new 6 3 organization 6 3 password 4 4 6 2 Adaptec SCSI Bios 1 13 Add on Equipment 1 10 Administration remote 6 39 Administrative Tasks 6 1 AlphaBASIC 1 11 5 1 5 4 AlphaBASIC PLUS 1 11 5 1 5 4 AlphaFAX 5 3 AlphaMAIL 5 3 AlphaMicroDisk 3 15 AlphaNET 1 11 5 2 AlphaTCP 1 11 5 2 AlphaVUE 5 2 6 4 B 1 Alternate Boot 4 2 Alternate boot device F 2 AM 113 CMOS 1 13 AM 113 xx Multi Function I O Board 1 6 AM 441 Wide SCSI Repeater E 2 AM 8000 CPU board 1 3 1 4 AM 8000 Configuration Program 3 1 AM 8000 Multi Processor Server 1 3 AMD disk files 3 16 6 25 AMOS 5 1 5 4 booting 7 5 exiting 3 3 7 2 file names 10 2 product installation code 4 1 transferring data to WINDOWS 10 1 AMOS BIOS 1 13 AMOS Overview 4 1 AMPC command booting with specific INI file 7 6 Application programs 5 2 Assembly Language 5 4 B B sClip software 6 22 AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Index Backing up data 6 16 scheduling 6 17 Backup 6 24 AMOS data 6 24 CDFS 6 19 compatibility 6 25 copy 6 17 FAT32 data 6 19 Ghost image data 6 19 Ghost software 6 42 MAKDVD 6 18 media types 6 20 MUSAV 6 18 NTFS data 6 18 UDF CD Data 6 19 XPE data types 6 18 XPE system 6 24 Boot monitor file 4 2 F 2 Booting AMOS 7 5 Booting the Server 3 1 4 2 Booting up with AMOS 8 x 2 9 C Cables A 1 construction guidelines A
40. ae eee ies wae ee i ane ne eee 6 8 Changing User Memotry eei te ep cte teet i tette e EL snes Pr b et SE 6 10 MODIFYING PRE CONFIGURED NETWORK CONFIGURATION FILES 6 11 AMOS DISK MAINTENANCE ee ne neret dod tee EENS 6 13 Analyzing the DISK eet sete eb bent ee ee OE tA ine EEE AEE EI EE 6 13 The RBDALL Coimmiand oce Rr ERE ve ORE de ae 6 13 The DSKANA Command iie ee RU Le ede p OR E eene IL teens 6 14 DSKANA e EE 6 15 The CHECK Option and Automatic Backups eese eene enr nre 6 15 AMOS Formatted SCSI Drives ONLY AAA 6 15 BACKING UP THE SERVER DATA CERIS He HH e HR ee Leto pene epo Eua 6 16 Backup UBEICMRQC EE 6 17 AMOS Only Data Backups 1 ire enit ee eire doe ic pee eee a ee ge oe iue unen ea 6 17 XPEData Lypes 2 5 e t CUR ERR e E EU REP EE RR en eras 6 18 Ghost Image Dap sei RE RU e ette p ER tete ere e C eee eee a 6 19 Backup Media Lypes et ttr d ole e c EE 6 19 Formatting and Initializing DVD RAM Media 6 21 TYPES OF BACKUPS NEEDED Ine et tte te tiic ee dee e xe eot ek EENEG 6 23 XPE System Backup Rp RU e e Len REUS HERE Le eae 6 24 AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page iv Table Of Contents AMOS Kata Back p se eie ete e P e dee eH eere ls e Oen 6 24 Backup Corisidetrations ee tee EE E RC i at 6 24 Are the Older AMOS DVD RAM Backups Compatible seen 6 25 Unmountable and Mountable AMD Files
41. all installation instructions Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product 3 NOTE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide a reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with this instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at their own expense AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 Appendix G AMOS 8 x INI s The following files are sample INI files for AMOS 8 x booting for your reference The lines or commands in BOLD are AMOS 8 x specific statements AMSAFEBOOT INI AMSAFE BOOT INI file for AM 8000 System SI LOAD SYSMSG USA LOAD TRMDEF LIT 1 4 LOAD AMO000 0VR 1 4 SLEEP 4 allow aml113 xx to finish boot REQUIRED TRMDEF VTM1 PCVTM 1 AM62c 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 console terminal VER QUEUE 10000 allow plenty of queue blocks TRMDEF VTM2 PCVTM 2 AM62c 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 TRMDEF SIO001 PCSIO 001 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 TRMDEF required JOBS 5
42. and find the AM8000 folder you will see the newly created Big1 AMD disk file as shown in Figure 3 21 CE As File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ar Qe O 1 see rode js 9 X WD EZ Address lo E AM8000 sl Ee Folders x pe amp Desktop 4 096 001KB 3 24 2005 1 17 PM AMD File E amp My Documents Ej amp My Computer E A Zus Floppy A D Se SystemVol1 C E 3 CD Drive D E X DataVoli E co EE IE BACKUPS RECYCLER Se SysVol2 F Se DataVol2 G G Control Panel EH Figure 3 21 Location of BIGI AMD Modifying the TEST INI amp Initialize the new Pseudo disk file From AMOS the next step is to modify a TEST INI file to add the new BIG disk device Select the Boot AM8000 shortcut in the lt AM8000 gt folder and boot up AMOS LOG SYS VUE TEST INI ENTER 1 Add DEVTBL BIG 2 Add BITMAP BIG 3 Add SYSTEM DVR BIG DVR 4 Add MOUNT BIG After the last system command Finish and save the TEST INI Now LOG DVR COPY BIG DVR PCDSK DVR tocreate the disk driver All AMD disk files use a copy of the PCDSK DVR Once a copy of the disk drive is in DVR LOG OPR MONTST AM8000 TEST INI AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 3 20 Chapter Three Please refer to AM8000 INI in the appendix for the resulting INI file from this discussion The MONTST will boot the new configuration When the system finishes the boot LOG OPR In OPR find INTNE
43. backed up to a particular DVD RAM media more that 25 times you may get a SCSI error code 1 If this happens the physical media has a data error Remember that the media has a limited life but you may be able to reclaim the media by performing a Full Format from the XPE side on the failing media This takes at least 45 minutes Use the Explorer application and right click on the DVD drive and select the format utility and use UDF 2 0 format Once your finished with this process switch back to AMOS and execute the MAKDVD and do your backup Then verify that the media wrote completely XPE Data Types The XPE data types are numerous but we will discuss only those listed below There are many XPE Windows programs that can access these data types AMOS currently cannot access these data formats directly o NTFS data format o FAT32 data format o UDF CD formats o CDFS NTFS Data Most hard disks RAID subsystems and USB disk drives can be formatted in NTFS The XPE system can read and write to these drive types with this data format Backup data files can be written to the disk of choice AMOS cannot read or write to NTFS drives directly only through AMD disk files Since the AMD disk files reside on an NTFS disk the AMD file can be copied to any data type accessible by XPE The AMD disk file is an image backup of the AMOS data and programs The image disk files can be copied to any logical drive on the XPE side AMOS can copy files between the AM
44. be done when only one job is accessing the disks it is wise to run them when other users are logged off the Server at night or on weekends With the Task Manager or the SLEEPR command within a command file you can run tape backups in the middle of the night when they won t interfere with other users See the Task Manager User s Manual for details on how to do this AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 System Administration Page 6 17 Backup Data Types There are three types of DATA BACKUPS with different data structures o AMOS Data o XPE Data o Ghost Image Data These data types are not interchangeable Each backup data type must be used with the program environment in which it was created Following is an explanation of these types and the programs that created them in more detail AMOS Only Data Backups There are three different programs that can create a data backup and two programs that can restore the data from the backup o COPY to backup and restore o MTUSAV to backup use MTURES to restore o MAKDVD to backup DVD to mount and COPY to restore COPY When AMOS is booted the COPY program will move data to other disk drives which can be AMOS formatted drives or AMD pseudo disk drives on hard drives or DVD RAM media The data format between these data storage media is the same and therefore compatible Moving the data to other drives gives you a backup but not necessarily on another media type Copy can restore data
45. detection w PC device 0 SCSI Disk 0 0 0 SEAGATE ST318453LW xf PC device 1 SCSI Disk 0 1 0 SEAGATE ST318453LW PC SCSI adapter 1 adpu320 lt gt PC device 3 SCSI Tape 1 3 0 TANDBERG SLR5 4 8GB PC SCS adapter 2 atapi lt gt PC device 0 ATAPI CD Rom 2 0 0 HL DT ST DVDRAM GSA 4040B PC SCSI adapter 3 atapi Devices accessible to Amos as SCSI devices 9 Amos device 0 9X Amos device 1 9 Amos device 2 9 Amos device 3 9 Amos device 4 Amos device 5 ATAPI CD Rom 2 0 0 HL DT ST DVDRAM GSA 4040B Amos device 6 SCSI Tape 1 3 0 TANDBERG SLR5 4 8GB Figure 3 13 SCSI Devices If you are using AMOS formatted disk drives it is recommended that you to enable AMOS disk caching for these devices AMOS 8 x has provided a program to turn off AMD drives from being AMOS cached This is activated by SET NOCACHE dev for the AMD disk device in the System Initialization Command File With this scheme you get the maximum performance from both disk device types Older RAID systems and disks are plug and play with AMOS 8 x through this method The AMD disk file always has faster access than the AMOS formatted drive because all access to the AMOS formatted drive is done through a SCSI library which adds an additional software layer Once data is moved from the older drive format to an AMD disk the SCSI drive can be unmapped and removed from the system configuration Even t
46. diagnostic display window as well as certain system errors Normal messages appear in Black Magenta color is for the AM 113 50 status code messages Blue messages are for the Jobs that the monitor controls Orange messages are for ports being initialized The Red messages are errors These will signify a problem with the Server configuration These messages describe missing information or processes that have terminated There are multiple status diagnostic windows for additional information The Network window is just for the Network interface and displays the different Ethernet interfaces and which adapter is mapped for AMOS use The SCSI window displays the current configured SCSI and ATAPI devices mapped for AMOS use Real Time Clock AMOS 8 x Servers have a Real Time Clock with battery back up The TIME and DATE may be set from OPR as on any other Alpha Micro system See the AMOS Command Reference manual for the format The clock chip is physically on the main CPU board AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 1 10 Chapter One Rear I O Panel Refer to the figures in Chapter 2 for the different connectors and their functions Add On Equipment Since the AMOS 8 x Server is a multi user business system you will need to add terminals PCs or Thin Clients via network connections or hard wired serial connections to support these devices You will probably want to also add one or more printers to provide printed copies of reports or d
47. drive every 100 hours of use We also suggest that you clean the drive after using a new tape for the first time and that you do a complete tape wind rewind after cleaning Clean the face of the drive with a damp cloth to remove dirt from the door and eject button When you need to clean your tape drive use only a cleaning cartridge designed for your particular drive type One is available from Alpha Micro part number PRA 00229 00 Follow the instructions on the cleaning cartridge MAIN ENCLOSURE STANDARD PEDESTAL STYLE The AM 8000 and Eagle 800 main enclosures are sturdy painted sheet metal and plastic Clean them as you would any other painted surface using a gentle detergent on a damp soft cloth Remember however that if any liquid makes its way inside the enclosure severe damage to the computer could result So a light dusting is the safest cleaning procedure and probably all the main enclosure will require AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 Preventive Maintenance Page 8 3 Washable Air Filter Maintenance The Server main enclosure contains a removable air filter mounted inside the lower half of the front bezel This filter should be washed or cleaned at least twice a year Not washing the air filter will result in higher system temperatures and possible stability problems We recommend checking the air filter at least once a month initially The frequency of checking will change depending on system usage and on environmen
48. drive that has space available Then the same procedure of modifying the AMOS configuration and INI files is used Reboot AMOS with the backup disk defined Then mount the device and access the backup as a different disk device The Ghost Image backup is the only backup type that will backup and restore complete disk volumes from both environments in one pass This is a compressed data backup of the disk volume When writing to a File the backup must be stored on a different logical hard drive than the logical selected for backup Alpha Microsystems ships the Server with a File Image Backup stored on the E DataVolume as a backup of the XPE AMOS C SystemVolume The system administrator can create data volume backups with Ghost onto disk drives or CD DVD media XPE programs and files can be extracted from the Ghost Image but only files that are not open and in use by the XPE operating system Backup Media Types The following different backup media types are available on the new AMOS Servers Streamer tape DAT tape CD R RW DVD R RW OOo00 AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 6 20 Chapter Six DVD RAM RAID Level 1 RAID Level 5 USB Disk Network File Server BluRay Media new for Series III systems 000000 Streamer tapes are the most commonly used backup media The tape backup is used for incremental and full disk backups of the AMOS Server data There are multiple backup densities for the tapes The new
49. ee esses enses enean statu sensus sensns tn snuo B 1 APPENDIX C CONSOLE FUNCTION KEYS UNDER AMOS e eeeeeeeee eren eene tentant C 1 AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page vi Table Of Contents USING FUNCTION KEYS etre Hber tede e RE ete n tes ee re EE RO Heres C 1 AMOS FUNCTION KEY TRANSLATION nennen eren nren nr etnne tenementis C 2 USING PUNC TION KEYS Eeer C 2 APPENDIX D AMOS SN COMMAND SUMMARY ee eee cessent enata stats sosta stessa sns tu sinet D 1 APPENDIX E SCSI CONFIGURATION DETAILS ee eeeee eese ee seen ene tnstn sten sna tn senses tnus E 1 ee DEIER E TYPES TEE E 1 WIDE SCSI CONFIGURATION RULES eese nennen eterne E i aE nente E 2 THE WIDE SCSUREPEA TER eege rrt renti Eee e EE ee e ee E 2 NARROW DEVICES ON THE WIDE BUS seen nennen rennen nennen tenen E 2 INTERNAL SCSL TERMINATOR ettet e t teme Get Ie eH certet ehe aee e iet tia E 2 EXTERNAL SCSI TERMINATOR nee tec eee ee det ee Ree ie E aa E 3 ATIACHING EXTERNALD DERNIERES eee Ee E 3 SCSEDISPATCHER SOFTWARE eege eege E 4 AM 8000 RACK MOUNT CHASSIS CONSIDERATIONS eese nennen E 4 APPENDIXF AM 113 XX INFO amp CPU PIC PROCEDURE eee e eene tenete tensor atn aenat F 1 AM 113 XX CMOS SETUP PROCEDURE 1 retener nennen eren nene nennen tenen enne F 1 Primary Boot Device Type eter ett iier see CH ene E e said eee E e Er eo avete F 1 Boot Monitor File Nari
50. enable these specific signals by attaching cable wires to certain connector pins If a terminal or printer manufacturer says their device is RS 232 or RS 232C compatible it will probably be easy for you to connect it to your Alpha Micro Servers AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page A 2 Appendix A Before constructing the cable to connect a printer or terminal to the Alpha Micro Server consult the manufacturer s manual accompanying the device It should describe how to wire the connector on the device end Few devices use all of the defined signals In most cases you need to connect about four pins Although printer cables are sometimes a little more complicated on the printer end terminal cables are often the same on both computer and terminal ends Alpha Micro uses RJ 45 connectors for RS 232 device connection The maximum length of RS 232 cables is 150 feet between devices when using Twisted Paired Level 3 CMP cabling Important Note The Federal Communications Commission FCC has established rules regarding allowable emission levels of Class A computing devices ref Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules The Alpha Micro systems to which this manual applies have been determined to be in compliance with the FCC rules However you should be aware that if other devices such as terminals and printers are attached to these systems even if the devices are attached in accordance with the instructions contained in this manual the result
51. if this is not possible a line conditioner capable of suppressing transients or spikes to eliminate power surges and noise will be required Make sure the power rating for the power outlet is large enough to power the Server and any future subsystems to be installed In North America a standard 15 Amp 115 Volt grounded connector type outlet is required for the CPU chassis In some other countries the requirement is a 230 Volt AC power source The maximum power requirements for the Servers are o 115 Volt AC at 5 Amps o 230 Volt AC at 2 5 Amps Additional outlets are required for each I O chassis and or peripheral connected to the Server Alpha Micro Servers come with a standard six foot power cord If this is not long enough be sure any extension cords used are rated for the full 15 Amps otherwise the full voltage will not reach the Server This can AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 2 8 Chapter Two affect the efficient operation of the Server A point to remember is that the closer the voltage gets to either end of the AC power range the less efficient the Server will be To avoid electrical interference sources of electrical noise such as air conditioners copiers electric typewriters or cleaning equipment should not be connected to the same power circuit as the Server All outlets providing power to the Server should have a common grounding point restricted to only those connections coming from the computer instal
52. is the baud rate of the terminal AMO2C is the name of the terminal driver AM62C can be changed to different terminal drivers Review the TDV s in the DVR account for others that may be used o 200 200 200 are buffer sizes expressed in number of characters Different situations may require other buffer sizes but for now just use 200 200 200 AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 6 10 Chapter Six o EDITOR IS enables the line editor with the ability to store 15 command lines for this terminal See the AMOS User s Guide for more information on the line editor For a more extensive explanation of what each of these items represents see the System Operator s Guide to the System Initialization Command File 5 Use the SETJOB statement to link the terminal defined in the TRMDEF statement with the job defined in the JOBALC statement SETJOB statements include parameters to o Define how much memory to allocate to a specific job o Define the specific disk and account the specific job will log into o Unlock the terminal s keyboard with the VER command SETJOB statements must be entered after the last system statements in the INI file Here is a sample SETJOB JOB4 TRM2 500K LOG DEMO VER See the System Operator s Guide to the System Initialization Command File for information on SETJOB 6 Only add a WAIT command for jobs that spawn additional tasks or daemons The pertinent job types are the Print Spooler jobs Task Manage
53. main unit has moving parts and delicate read write heads Rough handling could damage the drive and prevent the Server from operating properly If your Server included a monitor unpack it now and set it aside The monitor will serve as the operator console Also set aside the mouse and keyboard that came with the system Reporting Shipping Damage from the packing list please call your VAR immediately Shipping damage must be reported to the shipping company immediately Do not power up the system if the Server is severely damaged 7 If there is any damage to the shipping container or the main enclosure or there are missing items AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 2 2 Chapter Two Instructions for Reshipping the Server If shipping damage has occurred or the self test indicates a problem with the Server your VAR may recommend that you ship it back If for some reason you cannot contact your VAR please call the Alpha Micro Sales Department They will give you the name and address of an Alpha Micro VAR near you who can help See Service Information in Chapter 1 When reshipping or otherwise transporting the Server you must use the original packaging to ensure safe shipment information your name address phone number the date you shipped the system back and the Please include a note to the person who will receive the system containing the following reason for return Please insure the shipment to cover any dam
54. models You should not restore an Eagle 800 software CD to an AM 8000 and vice versa The Chipset software drivers are different for the various Series I II amp III AMOS 8 x system models The peripheral equipment installed will also make software differences between the systems The setup and administration tasks are still the same for all models Some of the features of the standard system software are listed below Your VAR can provide software packages specifically suited to your needs such as accounting software programming languages e mail and fax packages and so on Those packages are not included in this list See your VAR for information on service and support for such packages o The AMOS 8 x operating system performs many functions one of which is to manage the Server s resources so multiple users can run on the Server at the same time Both AMOS and XPE also include all support software for the hardware devices mentioned above o XPE software for the control of the main board including the main CPU amp chipset drivers unique to each model o Norton Ghost 2003 for backup and restore of system volumes o EAMOS Embedded AMOS controls Alpha Micro style serial ports and the SSD device o Adobe Acrobat 5 0 or 6 0 Reader to display online documentation AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 Introducing AMOS 8 x Servers Page 1 11 o UltraVNC software for remote administration of the Server o AlphaTCP allows your Al
55. name like S3Eagle800sn100VolC gho LV to select the most current dated file and Press if not skip this step and select the CD Rom drive Go to step 8 c Or press to lt Q CD Rom press ENTER Ghost CD DVD Image is highlighted in the main window Press ENTER Go to step 9 7 Fora Partition Restore If you had selected this option the next menu will be lt Select source partition from image file gt and will display Part 1 Primary Idz07 Description NTFS Label SystemVoll Size 5004 for Series 2 for Series 3 Eagle800 size is 7577 For S3 Am8000 size is 7569 a Press to select Ok and press to continue b Or Press 3to select the correct physical drive c Or Press to quit 8 Foreither a Disk Restore or Partition Restore The next screen will display Select local destination drive by clicking on the drive number ane AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 6 48 Chapter Six If you have more than one drive they both will be displayed so be careful which drive you are selecting a Drive 1 is highlighted either press to select or b Press to select the correct drive number c Toselect OK press ENTER 9 Fora Disk Restore skip to the step 11 for a Partition Restore the menu will say Select destination partition from Basic Drive 1 gt Either you will have 1 or 2 partitions Select the Primary one and press ENTER Skip forward to step 13 10 For Disk Restore In the Destination Drive Details menu
56. port 0 of the AM 113 xx board The terminal must be set at 19200 baud CC The AM 113 board detected a CMOS checksum error CE CMOS parameter Checksum Error This code will flash on the optional status display for several seconds while the board reinitializes the CMOS parameters AM 113 XX CONTROLLER DIAGNOSTIC CODES 00 AM 113 controller normal and running 01 Start EAMOS Mon 02 Blinks between 2 and 0 watch dog reset is functioning 03 Watch Dog reset deactivated 04 EAMOS Ran out of Queue blocks 08 EAMOS Front panel power failure status 09 EAMOS Memory parity error OF EAMOS Controller is clearing memory during boot 10 AMSIO LIT Interface driver not found 11 AMSIO LIT Terminal driver not found 12 EAMOS INI file was not found 10 SIOx IDV Type code not supported 15 SIOx IDV Bad packet 16 SIOx IDV Bad TCB packet 17 SIOx IDV No TCB index 1A Novram sys says SSD passed security SSD now available 22 EAMOS DIRREE CHKUPD SMEM block added 33 Unimplemented EA 34 Unimplemented Integer 40 Security failure 41 Security failure 42 Security failure 43 Security failure 44 Security failure 45 Security failure 46 Security failure 62 Power Failure 66 Mount DSKO 67 Loading Novram Sys 68 Novram Sys initialized AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 Status Display Codes Page 9 3 88 Unimplemented SVCA call 89 Floating p
57. pre existing monitor calls to access the information All current AlphaBASIC versions are fully supported with their existing RUN or RP files There is NO advantage to re compiling An AMOS 8 x system will generate the same code as on an older AMOS system The run files can be moved to any system As AMOS 8 x assembler libraries have been updated during the AM 8000 development not all re assembled programs will have the same hashes However they should still work the same even on older AMOS systems SSD access via AlphaBASIC still works as before Configuration and Maintenance It will be hard to tell the difference All normal system configuration files are exactly the same structure as on previous AMOS systems With new hardware as always there are new disk and interface drivers A lot of older hardware related programs have been removed from the AMOS 8 x release Their behavior under AMOS 8 0 is unknown and unsupported AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 Introducing AMOS 8 x Servers Page 1 13 The booting defaults are AM8000 MON and AM8000 INI so you can keep your old INI files All additional AM 8000 specific configuration and maintenance is done from the System Diagnostic screen on the system console What Is Hidden Actually there are a number of hidden areas that should only be accessed by VARs and system administrators or qualified service technician o The lt AM8000 System Diagnostic screen accessed by
58. program o If the AM 3501 or AM 905 30 SIO subsystem is installed its power switch must be turned ON o If the CMOS setup is configured to boot a RAID subsystem as the primary boot device the RAID must be turned on The RAID must finish the internal self test and memory test before the AMOS Server will boot o Donot map your NTFS formatted SCSI Drive ID 0 on the AM 8000 or the NTFS formatted IDE disk drive 0 on an Eagle 800 to an AMOS disk device This will corrupt the data on the drive and make the system not bootable o Always keep the system folders as NOT SHARED which will keep viruses off the system The only port that is shareable is the printer port o Level7 uses virtual console terminal 1 and cannot be used over a modem o Booting from tape is not supported Booting a WRMGEN monitor is not supported These are erased from the system with the ERAS8K DO file in the OPR account o Alternate booting is handled with multiple AMD disk files in any AM8000 folder on any disk drive To access these files place the DSK device name in the device column on the AMOS disk tab option of the Configuration program Save these settings See Chapter 3 AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 O Hints Restrictions amp Shortcuts Page 7 7 DCACHE should not be used with AMD disk files but should be used with AMOS Formatted SCSI disks Using DCACHE with AMOS formatted devices improves disk performance Using DCACHE with AMD disk files which a
59. reconfigure the system or build new pseudo disk files When building new AMD AlphaMicroDisk files the system uses 100 of the CPU time Do not have the system booted under AMOS 8 x when generating the AMD disk files As mentioned in previous chapters be sure to make at least one copy of the System Disk onto another AMD file or copy the AM8000 AMD file to another hard disk drive This action will provide an alternate boot disk for the Server As shipped from Alpha Micro the AM8KSUB AMD disk file resides in the C AM8000 folder for this purpose This AMD file is a one logical 32MB disk with just the AMOS 8 x Release The AM8kSub drive normally has the AMOS 8 0 PIC code and DVD PIC installed for the system SSD AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 6 2 Chapter Six If for some reason the Server cannot boot from the current AMD file you can re define the DSK device This is done in the AMOS Disk tab of the lt AM8000 Configure program Change the top first column entry from DSK to SUB Then change the next definition from SUB to DSK Select OK and then Select File Restart from the AM8000 program This will save the configuration from RAM to the hard drive The Server will restart with the Alternate boot disk file as the DSK device and the Original DSK device as the SUB drive You can then do disk maintenance on the SUBO drive and check out the INI file and system files for errors Correct any problems on the SUBO
60. select the Tools item from the lt AM8000 System Diagnostics window This is shown in Figure 3 18 SE AE Systema Li 325 Sytem Diagnesties This one window has the greatest power and largest options to control the AMOS 6 x Servers If you are saja ie I 1TP42 Jublevel d 73 S pace iz Ja ilij md familiar with XP Professional this will be very easy eripe disk acces to understand fnr socket requests from el Lee VIMl proces3s VepeLicehemelire amp ma 444 Figure 3 18 System Control Panel The System Control Panel is also accessed by selecting System from the main Control Panel Please refer to Chapter 6 for a more detailed discussion of these programs The other tools are used infrequently and should only be performed by the system administrator The Control Panel Task Manager Editor and Ghost tools will be covered in Chapter 6 AMD DISKS AND OTHER HARD DRIVES AMD Pseudo AMOS Disk AMOS 8 x only boots from an AMD AlphaMicroDisk file located in any AM8000 folder on any disk volume XPE controls the NTFS formatted hard drives where the AM8000 folder is placed The AM8000 folders can contain multiple AMD files Each AMD file contains the equivalent of one physical hard drive Inside the AMD disk can be traditional disk formatted for 32MB logical or an Extended disk formatted for larger than 32MB per logical The AMD file contains the label block bitmap directory structure and files just li
61. select the Down Arrow under the Emulator column to bring up the emulators available The Virtual terminals only run on the Console of the AMOS 8 x Server Please note the system must boot from the VTM1 port Terminal emulators provided with AMOS 8 x are AMPCLITE a version of AlphaLAN Lite or AMPCTerm a version of the ZTERM terminal emulator On line help is available for both terminal emulators by selecting Help in the emulator task bar AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 3 6 Chapter Three VTMS8 is reserved for use with EAMOS The VTM8 port must be active in the EAMOS INI file during the CPU PIC Mode process Then the Magic Code can be entered and accepted The CPU PIC will not be accepted if the AMSIO line for VTMS in the EAMOS INI is commented out Once the code is entered you may re edit the EAMOS INI and put it back into Shipping Mode with the Pseudo terminal line as active and the VTMS line inactive with it commented out See Appendix F for details on the CPU PIC process The terminal emulators installed on the system are setup in the INSTAL CFG file in the AM8000 folder This file is then accessed to select the Emulator for the VTMx channel as shown in Figure 3 6 T Note Each virtual terminal consumes one AMOS user license if defined in the AM8000 INI The definition here only reserves which emulator will be used for each VTM session AM8000 Configuration EH xj General Amos Disks Virtual Terminals Seri
62. serial port COM10 Unassigned Ka Amos serial port COM11 Unassigned Amos serial port COM12 Unassigned 9 Amos serial port COM13 Unassigned x Amos serial port COM14 Unassigned gt lt Amos serial port COM15 Unassigned 3 Amos serial port COM16 Unassigned D Amos serial port COM17 Unassigned x Amos serial port COM18 Unassigned Cancel se Figure 3 7 Serial Ports for a standard AM 8000 system Each serial port counts against the AMOS user license if defined in the AM8000 INI The mapping in this window is only to reserve the ports for AMOS use The Device Manger window will display the hardware devices in this system See figure 3 8 Expand out the Ports COM amp LPT entry by left clicking on the box to the left of the menu item If all the ports are properly installed the numbering will be Sequential 1 to 18 If not the ports must be reassigned a sequential port number First exit the lt AM8000 Configuration program The reassignments are done by selecting the port and right click Select Properties Select Port Setting tab Select Advanced button See chapter 6 for a detailed procedure The COM port number input box will be displayed in the Advanced Setting for the Com Port Left click on the Down arrow and find the lowest number missing usually 3 and select it Now Select OK button Then Select OK again AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 3 8 Chapter Three
63. so it can be accessed from the XPE side Once formatted right click on the DNDVD RAMI media and create an AM8000 folder This media format allow the system administrator to copy files directly to a Folder on the DVD RAM media For example from the Explorer application Select the 4M8000 folder and right click Select Copy Move the mouse to the D drive the DVD RAM media and Right click and Select Paste The whole folder will copy to the DVD RAM media Be patient this can take up to 2 hours if the Folder has 4GB of data Packet Writing Software on XPE The B sClip or InCD packet writing software functions under XPE The CD media must be formatted with the B Clip or InCD format utility first For a CD RW media this takes 30 40 minutes Then the B Clip software goes through a file system check taking another 20 30 minutes Then the media is ready to use Folders can be allocated on the media and files can be copied to the media just like a floppy disk DVD RAM media may already be formatted in UDF The packet writing software can use brand new pre formatted DVD RAM media DVD RW media The system is only 1 3 as fast due to the overhead of the B sClip software Please only execute this software when only a couple of users are on the system This software should not be used during the day with many users on the system Alpha Microsystems does not warranty this software and it is only provided AS IS for administrator use Pleas
64. subsystem The SCSI 160 RAID supports Level 1 mirror or Level 3 or Level 5 with hot swappable drives The Eagle 800 has an optional IDE RAID Level 1 subsystem This unit provides an on line mirrored drive of the operating system and customer data Other Hard Drives Older AMOS formatted SCSI disks can be accessed for compatibility and to do data transfers but are slower since XPE doesn t know about the AMOS file system These disk devices are accessed through a SCSI library The AM8000 monitor disk calls are linked together through the SCSI library with the AM8000 EXE program to provide access If you are using AMOS formatted disk drives we do advise you to enable AMOS disk caching for these devices AMOS 8 x has provided a program to turn off AMD drives from being AMOS cached This is activated by SET NOCACHE dev for the AMD disk device in the System Initialization Command File With this scheme you get the maximum performance from both disk device types Older RAID systems and disks are plug and play with AMOS 8 x through this method AMD FILE CREATION Since AMD files are used extensively in AMOS 8 x Servers let s discuss how to create a new AMD file The first step is to select the Configure option from the System Diagnostics window As of AM8000 exe version 1 0 936H3 and later the limitation of 110GB for an AMD file was removed For Series 3 systems AM8000 exe version 1 1 939C3 and later now allow Terra Byte AMD files can be generated
65. sz X and Select Computer Management tool in the right panel as shown in Figure 6 6 Ad n Ag Somesrster Taos Gon m Once the Computer Management application is S M My Computer loaded find Storage and Select Disk E A ru page o een iie 2 Management application 8 dd CHA Deag x E de Dataienes Ez To take advantage of the speed of XPE disk caching ef esch the drives must be formatted in NTFS file system and mE made active to the XPE Operating System As shown recht in figure 6 7 on an AM 8000 Server we have the or standard SCSI 320 internal drive partitioned as 2 Sy somen ond Canera logical volumes The first partition 4 15GB in size is BR Schone Tanka reserved for the XPE software and the AM8000 folder Shared Docurserts The E DataVolume drive is 12 94GB in size and is e Aj pe Hetreork Places nt used to store the Customer generated AMD disk files Figure 6 6 Administrative Tools On early Eagle 800 s a standard 40GB hard drive was partitioned in half This results in a 19 6GB C drive and a 19 6GB E drive Later Eagle 800 s the drive is partition in a SGB SystemVolume and 34GB AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 6 32 Chapter Six DataVolume The primary partition C drive is where XPE programs and documentation is stored The C drive partition includes the AM8000 folder and all the subdirectories The alternate boot disk file and the original AM8000 AMD file are sto
66. to pin definition of a standard DB25 modular adapter to allow connection with terminals and printers supported by Alpha Micro We have grouped the signals into pairs which will also allow longer and more reliable communication to the Server The AM 60 AM 62 62A 65 65A 70 72 and AM 75 terminals are all RS 232 devices and use the same cabling pin outs The patch cords used should be internally twisted pair cable with RJ 45 connectors on both ends The pin assignments are straight through pin for pin with no swapped ends RJ45 M DB 25 modular adapter Terminal Pin Direction Pin Color Signal A A A ANN NV N 5 4 3 6 2 il 8 1 A A A ANN NV N Table A 3 Serial Terminal Connector Signals AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page A 6 Appendix A The terminal DTR signal pin 20 is connected to the Server CTS signal RJ45 pin 2 and serves as READY NOT BUSY handshake line to prevent overrunning the terminal with data This protocol is also effective for many printers used by Alpha Micro not work with certain printers if they do not provide a compatible DTR on pin 20 In such cases consult the manufacturer of the device to find if they moved the NOT READY or Busy signal to Pin 11 or possibly 19 RI Caution While this cable configuration enhances the use of the Alpha Micro terminals it may Serial Modem Modular Adapter To attach a serial modem to our defined cabling system use a parallel twisted paired p
67. to the original location from a backup disk If you mount a DVD RAM media created with MAKDVD using the DVD program the data on this media type can easily be restored back to the your working disk drive MTUSAV When AMOS is booted you can move disk data to another media type like a Tape cartridge using the MTUSAV program This will backup to Streamer and DAT tapes The MTURES program will restore the data tapes to a disk drive The tape format is AMOS MTUSAV format and is only readable by MTUSAV MTUDIR and MTURES no other program can read this data structure With MTURES restoring data to different AMOS systems is a standard way of interchange that is quick and easy The MTURES and MTUSAV programs cannot restore or backup data in the XPE environment directly MAKDVD Within AMOS the MAKDVD program can create logical disk backups to a DVD RAM media in the exact AMOS disk data structure it came from The DVD program can mount the media as a new disk drive type called DVDx drives The DVD drives are images of the disks they were created from If created on a DVD RAM media an individual file could be updated with a COPY command To restore data from the DVD drive COPY is used to move the backup data to the original location or to a different disk at the discretion of the operator Media written in this format cannot be read from the XPE environment AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 6 18 Chapter Six If the administrator has
68. used on the Console to review the on line PDF documentation files To access the PDF files use the Control Panel interface to browse to a directory and find the PDF file you desire to read Double click on the PDF filename and the Acrobat reader will launch and display the document Not all documents are on all models of the AMOS 8 x Servers Only the devices installed on the particular model of the Server have the corresponding documentation Other documentation is shipped with each Server These will be the manuals for the installed devices from the peripheral manufacturer Some documentation files are in TXT DOC or HTML formats AMOS documentation related to the server can be found in C AM8000 DOC folder Documents that may be included are o Acrobat Pdf on the reader itself o Norton Ghost Guide We highly recommend that you read the Norton Ghost Guide on the workings of this useful Backup and Restore utility o AMPCLITE documentation can be accessed through Help Contents from the emulator window AMPCTerm documentation is accessed through Help contents from the emulator window DVD RAM XP N En pdf B Clips documentation for the packet writing software in HTML or the InCD software Ultra VNC or TightVNC for remote administration of the Server in HTML For the Eagle 800 the main board manual PDF format PCI serial port adapters manual USB serial port manual BluRay Doc files in C Am8000 Doc folder Oo oo oo Oo O AMOS 8
69. using TAB on the system console o XPE operating system Accessed through System Diagnostic screen o The AM 8000 Series II motherboard BIOS accessed by pressing during the POST o The AM 8000 motherboard BIOS accessed by pressing during the POST o The Eagle 800 Series I amp II motherboard BIOS accessed by pressing during the POST o The AM 113 xx CMOS accessed by pressing on serial port 0 during the controller reset o Embedded AMOS which starts in a virtual terminal session on the system console o The Adaptec SCSI Bios Setup accessed by typing Aj on system console during SCSI device scan o The LSI SCSI Bios Setup on the Eagle 800 accessed by typing C on the system console keyboard during SCSI device scan ABOUT THIS MANUAL The purpose of this document is to provide you with information on how to operate AMOS 8 x systems After you ve followed the instructions in this book the 8 x Servers will be set up and running You will have a good idea of where to go next for information on the software to use on these Servers A lot of time went into writing this manual due to the fact that AMOS 8 x is slightly different than traditional AMOS computers Many of the chapters may look like previous manuals but in reality every section has been rewritten with AMOS 8 x in mind o This chapter contains a software and hardware overview of these systems It also discusses the configurations av
70. way to perform backups is Streamer tape with MTUSAV program This is the fastest way to backup data The next fastest is using MAKDVD program to write to DVD RAM media This media is re useable to a point The write to DVD can be selective on a logical basis Say you wish to only backup 6 out of 10 logical drives As long as the data will fit onto a 4 7GB DVD RAM media you can back up this data The AMOS system does not have to be rebooted Once the MAKDVD program finishes the write Execute the DVD program and it will mount the 6 DVD platters with the backed up data Operator Note Please label all the disk logicals on the Server before backup The label blocks will be written to DVD RAM and displayed when the media is mounted with the DVD LIT program This will help in identifying where the data came from Then restoring a file is simple Copy the files needed to the original disk location by identifying the correct data platter from the DVD logical drive File look up and restore from DVD RAM is faster than tape AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 Chapter 5 AMOS Software Applications The Alpha Micro Server is extremely versatile and can do many different things The next step is to learn something about the software that can run on the Server This chapter deals with some of the questions you may be asking o What software is available for Alpha Micro Servers o What Alpha Micro documents should I read next o What about On Line Docu
71. whatever program is in progress and return to AMOS command level After pressing CTRL C to interrupt a program you cannot resume execution of that program you must start it over from the beginning Some programs such as AlphaVUE do not recognize a Control C as an exit command instead you must use the exit command for that program if you want to return to AMOS command level Other programs do recognize a Control C however if an exit command exists for a program it is usually better to use that command than to press CTRLJ Many programs perform various closing functions when you use their normal exit commands and would not have a chance to perform those procedures for an orderly exit if you bypass them by using a Control C Control U At AMOS command level you may move to the leftmost character of the command line you are typing by pressing CTRL U J Control S A program or command often displays more data on your terminal than fits on one screen To stop the screen display press CTRUEJCS 1 You can now read the data on the screen at your leisure Not only does the display freeze but AMOS actually stops sending data to your terminal until you press TEL IC 8 see below at that point AMOS resumes sending information where it left off While a Control S is in effect AMOS stores but does not act upon anything you type except for TEL WO 1 There is however a limit to how much can be stored The exact number of chara
72. x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 5 4 Chapter Five ADDITIONAL DOCUMENTATION Now that the Server is up and running you are ready to start exploring the Alpha Micro world Your guide to the new territory is the Alpha Micro software documentation This section gives the user an idea of which documentation to consult for directions depending on the path you want to take The AM 8000 and Eagle 800 Servers are members of the AMOS family of Alpha Micro computers and the software documentation that applies to other AMOS based computers applies to these new Servers But some of the older documentation is out of date with respect to certain process and commands executed on the new AMOS 8 x Servers You may purchase any book mentioned in this manual separately in addition a multi volume software documentation library is available containing all the AMOS software books listed below You can order any of these books by calling your VAR To find which documents are available use an Internet browser and look up www AlphaMicro com and select Support gt Documentation An index into all Alpha Micro documents available will be displayed Documents can be downloaded and viewed by the Adobe Acrobat PDF Viewer Here s an idea of what to look at next Want To Start At The Beginning If you have never used AMOS before we recommend you read the AMOS User s Guide This book is a practical introduction to the Alpha Micro computer containing instru
73. 0 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 14 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 LOGTRM PSEUDO NULL 50 50 50 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 LPT1 PCLPT 1 TELTYP 100 100 100 EUDO NULL 80 80 80 T EUDO NULL 80 80 80 NETLOG PSEUDO NULL 80 80 80 D 80 80 80 Required JOBALC VTM1 VTM2 VTM3 VTM4 JOBALC VTM6 VIM7 VTM5 JOBALC JBPC1 JBPC2 SPOOL1 JOBALC JOB001 JOB002 JOBO am359 trm ports 03 JOB004 Appendix G JOB005 JOB006 JOB007 JOB008 JOBALC JOB200 JOB201 JOB202 JOB203 JOB204 JOB205 JOB206 JOB207 JOBALC JOB208 JOB209 JOB210 JOB211 JOB212 JOB213 JOB214 JOB215 JOBALC JOBALC JOBALC JOBALC JOBALC JOB216 JOB217 JOB218 JOB219 JOB220 JOB221 JOB222 JOB223 JOB224 JOB225 JOB226 JOB227 JOB228 JOB229 JOB230 JOB231 JOB232 JOB233 JOB234 JOB235 JOB236 JOB237 JOB238 JOB239 JOB240 JOB241 JOB242 JOB243 JOB244 JOB245 JOB246 JOB247 JOB248 JOB249 JOB250 JOB251 JOB252 JOB253 JOB254 JOB255 AMO
74. 0 has four DDR2 800mhz memory slots up to 16Gb of ram Most of this memory is used by the XPE software and allocated for a Disk Caching buffer Currently the maximum memory allocated to AMOS is 750MB This is an XPE restriction Since DCACHE is not needed for AMOS this is not a problem See the specification sheet included with your computer for more detailed information on memory capacity and the AM 5000 or Eagle SOO Computer Service Manual for instructions on installing it Disk Configurations The Series I amp II AM 8000 servers contain two Ultra 320 SCSI busses One bus has been configured for high speed hard disk operation utilizing LVD low voltage differential technology to provide the highest possible data transfer speed between the processor and the high speed LVD compatible hard disk s This A bus is only used by high speed LVD disk drives and does not normally exit the system chassis If more than one drive is installed and both have bootable XPE partitions the BIOS setup can select any AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 Introducing AMOS 8 x Servers Page 1 7 bootable drive to boot up the Server Additionally the second SCSI channel disk drives or RAID subsystem can also be made bootable The AM 8000 Series II standard system drive is a 36GB Ultra 320 SCSI drive partitioned with the C SysVolume of 4 1GB and E DataVolume 30Gb The AM 8000 Server standard system drive is a 17 5GB Ultra 320 device This drive is p
75. 000 program gt then Select gt SCSI devices tab Map the new SCSI Disk drive at an unused AMOS SCSI ID This is done by a select drag and drop technique from the upper panel to the lower panel as described in Chapter 3 Select gt OK and then File gt Exit to write the system registry Dr Za Ns ER AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 6 16 Chapter Six 7 Reboot the AM8000 system and log to the OPR account Use the FMTS2 command from the OPR account to format the drive in AMOS format 9 Select either Traditional or Extended format Exit FMTS2 Please refer to the System Commands Reference Manual for instructions on FMTS2 10 Log DVR and execute FIXLOG and use SCZPC DVR as the input driver Input the mapped SCSI ID and the number of logicals Select a new driver name 11 Save the new driver to the disk in the DVR account 12 Log SYS and edit the TEST INI file 13 For the new device add DEVTBL BITMAP SYSTEM and MOUNT statement to the INI 14 If the SCSI drive will be a permanent device Add SYSTEM DCACHE SYS N M U xxxK to allocate a read ahead cache buffer Write caching is not allowed or supported under AMOS 8 x systems 15 Add a SET NOCACHE statement for all accessed AMD disk devices This will improve performance of the Server 16 Log OPR and COPY or MTURES data to the new disk drive 9o Be extremely careful when using the FMTS2 command Formatting a hard drive will delete all data and system fi
76. 1 1144 accepted for virtual terminal 6 AM113 terminal 8 1 has been initialized AM113 terminal 8 2 has been initialized AM113 terminal 8 3 has been initialized AM113 terminal 6 4 has been initialized Setting job level for TCPEMU job number 12 JCB at 96696 from 1 to 2 Setting job level for TELNED job number 22 JCB at 2CDF6C from 1 to 2 Figure 3 3 System Diagnostics The General Tab The first option check box Figure 3 4 will leave the Diagnostic window displayed or will minimize the diagnostic window after the AM 8000 system boots up Shutdown will ask for confirmation before proceeding with system shutdown if the next box is checked The use Metropolis terminal output for LBasic check box is checked only if your system uses Metropolis and Lightning Basic software In the next check box fill in the amount of RAM you wish to allocate to AMOS in 1 MB increments Table 3 1 below lists the recommended AMOS memory sizes for the various types of Servers System Type Recommended Maximum Standard Total AMOS Memory Size Server Memory Eagle 800LC 128 MB 256 MB Eagle 800 256 MB 512 MB S3 Eagle800 512 MB 1 GB AM 8000 1 or 2 512 MB 1 GB S3 Am8000 750 MB 2 GB Absolute maximum AMOS memory size for any system is 750 MB a restriction of the XPE operating system Table 3 1 Recommended AMOS Memory Sizes AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 3 4 Chapter Three M8000 Configuration ENS zl Gene
77. 13 xx Board with SSD must be installed for AMOS to boot Minimum of 256MB of main system memory installed One CD RW or DVD RAM drive installed The minimum memory allocated for AMOS should be 64MB or greater MINIMUM BOOT CONFIGURATION In the AM8000 Folder on the C drive the following files must exist to boot the Servers Even though there are more files in the standard configuration and more directories please don t experiment erasing any files in the preconfigured systems delivered from Alpha Microsystems Only erase files which you place in these directories Please do not place any user files in the EAMOS folder 3020000000000 06060606000000040 8000NAM8000 EXE 8000 AM8000 1 M8000 AM8000 MON NI 8000NAM8KSUB 8000 Install 8000 AM8000 AMD A CE M8000 MONTST EXE 8000 PCASP50 SY D M8000 CONFIG AM8000 8000NBOOT AM8000 8000NDefault aln 8000 PCANDIS5 SYS S LL 8000 RAWETHE si EXE R M8000 PCANUSER 8000NUmKw30 D11 8000NUmscsi40 8000NUmkw50 1 O M8000 Umscsi50 D1 DI 8000NW32N55 D 8000NW32N55 I 8000NW32N50 D1 LL NI M8000NAMPCLITE der with all terminal emul ator fil 8000 AMPCTerm fol fol der with all terminal emul ator fil AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO es es
78. 2 length 2 8 A 2 printer cable A 2 type A 2 CD drive cleaning 8 1 CD DVD alternate boot 4 2 CD ROM E 3 Cleaning air filter 8 3 system enclosure 8 2 CMOS menu options F 1 setup procedure F 1 CMOS serial port 0 speed F 2 Command buffer B 2 Commands AMOS 8 x Di DEVTBL 4 3 DSKANA 6 14 FMTS2 6 16 JOBS 6 9 LOG 4 4 6 3 MEMORY 6 11 PPN 4 4 REDALL 6 13 SET DSKERR 6 13 SETJOB 6 10 6 11 SYSACT 6 3 Index SYSTAT 4 3 6 3 6 11 WAIT 6 10 Communications options A 8 Compliance Information Statement F 6 Computer maintaining 5 4 Configuration boot monitor file F 2 system initialization file 6 4 F 2 System initialization file 6 9 Configure AMOS Disks 3 4 General Tab 3 3 Network 3 10 Other Info 3 14 Printers 3 9 Reboot 3 13 saving 3 13 Serial Ports 3 6 Virtual Terminals 3 5 Control panel 2 3 CPUPIC Entry F 4 CPUPIC Procedure F 4 D Data cables 2 8 Data transferring 10 1 Deskside chassis 1 1 front panel 2 3 power light 2 3 reset button 2 3 Device definition 6 6 drivers 5 2 names 4 2 system disk 4 2 Device Manger Serial Ports 3 7 DEVTBL command 4 3 Diagnostic programs DSKANA 6 14 REDALL 6 13 Diagnostic status 1 9 Disk accounts 4 3 6 2 6 3 AMD Pseudo 3 15 analysis 6 13 bitmap 6 15 blocks 6 14 diagnostic programs 6 13 6 14 6 15 Disk
79. 4 on the flash disk Boot Initialization File Name This parameter lets you change the name of the system initialization INI file to be used during boot from flash only The default filename is AMOS32 INI The INI file must exist and reside in account 1 4 of the flash disk Serial Port 0 Speed By default CMOS requires a port 0 terminal set to 19200 baud You can change this to 9600 or 38400 The speed set here should match the port O definition in the system initialization file If the terminal s baud rate does not match this setting you won t be able to re enter the CMOS menu since CMOS will not recognize it when you press ESC We highly recommend that you do not change this setting from 19200 Display Console Boot Messages When set to Yes this option displays status messages on the port 0 terminal during booting These messages are equivalent to each of the front panel status codes normally displayed during booting and are normally only needed if you cannot see the status display This may interfere with the device connected to this port For all AMOS 8 x Servers this setting should be NO Memory Size Refresh This is always Auto 4K SAVING THE CMOS SETTINGS When you are finished making changes press ESC A message will appear at the bottom of the screen asking if you wish to save any changes made Enter Y to save the changes in the CMOS RAM or N to abandon any changes made After entering your response
80. 8 PCSIO 166 SIO119 PCSIO 167 10120 PCSIO 170 SIO121 PCSIO 171 SIO122 PCSIO 172 10123 PCSIO 173 SIO124 PCSIO 174 Fr TRMDEF TRMDEF TRMDEF TRMDEF TRMDEF TRMDEF Ko TRMDEF TRMDEF TRMDEF TRMDEF TRMDEF TRMDEF Fr TRMDEF TRMDEF TRMDEF TRMDEF TRMDEF TRMDEF TRMDEF TRMDEF TRMDEE TRMDEF TRMDEF TRMDEF TRMDEE TRMDEE TRMDEE TRMDEF TRMDEF JOBS 250 COM1 PCCOM 1 19200 COM2 PCCOM 2 19200 NETS CPE ER PS U PS UMMY PSI UDO NULL Gl 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 11 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 9200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 12 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 13 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 20
81. A 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM62A 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 0 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 1 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 2 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 3 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 AMOS 8 x INI s TRMDEF SIO031 PCSIO 037 TRMDEF SIO032 PCSIO 040 TRMDEF SIO033 PCSIO 041 TRMDEF SIO034 PCSIO 042 TRMDEF SIO035 PCSIO 043 TRMDEF SIO036 PCSIO 044 SERIAL PORTS AM359 TRMDEF SIO037 PCSIO 045 TRMDEF SIO038 PCSIO 046 TRMDEF SI0039 PCSIO 047 TRMDEF SIO040 PCSIO 050 TRMDEF SIO041 PCSIO 051 TRMDEF SIO042 PCSIO 052 TRMDEF
82. AMOS 8 x Server Owner s alpha micro mania For Eagle 800 amp AM 8000 Servers DSM 00226 00 Rev B00 BOO Jan 2008 To re order this document request part number DSM 00226 00 FCC Notice This equipment is assembled from components that have been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Canadian Department of Communications Compliance Statement This equipment does not exceed Class A limits per radio noise emissions for digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications Operation in a residential area may cause unacceptable interference to radio and TV reception requiring the owner or operator to take whatever steps are necessary to correct the interference Avis de Conformit aux Normes du Minist re des Communications du Canada Cet quipment ne deapsse pas les limits de Classe A d mission de brui
83. B JOB246 SIO051 500K JOB JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN SETJOB JOB247 S10052 500K JOB JIN Appendix G AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 AMOS 8 x INI s SERIAL PORTS AM359 SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB JOB248 SIO053 500K JOB JOB249 S10054 500K JOB JOB250 S10055 500K JOB JOB251 S10056 500K JOB JOB252 S1I0057 500K JOB JOB253 SIO058 500K JOB JOB254 SIO059 500K JOB JOB255 SIO060 500K JOB SERIAL PORTS AM359 SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB JOB256 SIO061 500K JOB JOB257 S10062 500K JOB JOB258 SIO063 500K JOB JOB259 SIO064 500K JOB JOB260 SIO065 500K JOB JOB261 SIO066 500K JOB JOB262 S10067 500K JOB JOB263 SIO068 500K JOB SERIAL PORTS AM359 SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB JOB264 SIO069 500K JOB JOB265 SIO070 500K JOB JOB266 SIO071 500K JOB JOB267 S10072 500K JOB JOB268 SIO073 500K JOB JOB269 S10074 500K JOB JOB270 S10075 500K JOB JOB271 S10076 500K JOB SERIAL PORTS AM359 SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB JO
84. B272 S10077 500K JOB JOB273 SIO078 500K JOB JOB274 S10079 500K JOB JOB275 SIO080 500K JOB JOB276 SIO081 500K JOB JOB277 S10082 500K JOB JOB278 SIO083 500K JOB JOB279 SIO084 500K JOB SERIAL PORTS AM359 SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB JOB280 SIO085 500K JOB JOB281 S10086 500K JOB JOB282 S10087 500K JOB JOB283 SIO088 500K JOB JOB284 SIO089 500K JOB JOB285 SIO090 500K JOB JOB286 S10091 500K JOB JOB287 S10092 500K JOB SERIAL PORTS AM359 SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB JOB288 S1I0093 500K JOB JOB289 S1I0094 500K JOB JOB290 S10095 500K JOB JOB291 S1I0096 500K JOB JOB292 S10097 500K JOB JOB293 S10098 500K JOB JOB294 S10099 500K JOB JOB295 S10100 500K JOB SERIAL PORTS AM359 SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB JOB296 SIO101 500K JOB JOB297 S10102 500K JOB JOB298 SIO103 500K JOB JOB299 SIO104 500K JOB JOB300 SIO105 500K JOB JOB301 S10106 500K JOB JOB302 S10107 500K JOB JOB303 S10108 500K JOB SERIAL PORTS AM359 JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN J
85. COME Amos serial port COMS Assigned to PC serial port COMS PC serial pot COMS Amos serial port COMS Assigned to PC serial pot COMS PC serial pot COM10 Amos serial port COM10 Assigned to PC serial port COM10 PC serial port COM11 Amos seral port COM11 Assigned to PC serial port COM11 PC serial pot COM12 Amos serial port COM 12 Assigned to PC serial port COM12 PC serial port COM13 Amos senal port COM13 Assigned to PC serial port COM13 PC serial port COM14 Amos serial port COM14 Assigned to PC senal port COM14 PC serial port COM15 Amos serial port COM15 Assigned to PC senal port COM15 PC serial port COM16 Amos serial port COM16 Assigned to PC serial port COM16 PC serial port COM17 Amos serial port COM17 Assigned to PC serial port COM17 PC se al port COM18 Amos serial port COM18 Assigned to PC serial port COM18 eme em Figure 3 9 Serial Ports assignment Printers Tab Clicking on the Printers tab sixteen printers can be defined to the AMOS system as shown All printers must be installed as Windows printers prior to setting them up for use under AMOS The LPT1 LPT2 etc parameters here have no relationship to the physical LPT ports on the host These parameters provide logical references for AMOS 8 x This assignment is in the AM 8000 INI file as LPT1 LPT2 etc driver This is ONLY supported for the LPTx ports when you check the Raw Mode Parameter D Graphics printing from AMOS requires a special setup to bypass the Wind
86. D OR DVD RAM DRIVE HERE Her ehe d e reete ite ied caeco 8 1 CARE OF STREAMING TAPE CARTRIDGES esent enne entente trennen 8 2 AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 Table of Contents Page v 14 STREAMING TAPE DRIVE CLEANING eere nnne nennen ener neret 8 2 MAIN ENCLOSURE STANDARD PEDESTAL SIE 8 2 Washable Air Filter Maintenance enr te teen ese nto do cocaverccenscbeddesussocedsgesentcdecgetees 8 3 AM 8000 RACK MOUNT SERVER eerte rennen eren nennen tentent nne ennr enne 8 3 CHAPTER 9 STATUS DISPLAY EH ees 9 1 AM8000 AND RELATED PROGRAM STATUS CODES eere nennen 9 1 AM 113 XX BOOT ROM CODES dern e eed eee dete BUR ege ede i er aere ge nde 9 2 AM 113 XX CONTROLLER DIAGNOSTIC CODES esee rennen 9 2 AM8000 DIAGNOSTIC COMMANIDS AAA 9 3 CHAPTER 10 TODOS AND FMDOS ssiscdscssssatesosesdecputsacessesseasoestievtnssesteoasdsdeanotascosstesenceceieensiass 10 1 HOW TO COPY FILES BETWEEN OPERATING SYSTEMS AA 10 1 Contig ous File Transfer iore be d need o terae eee 10 1 Preparing to CODY iis nct i tede Ee e ee ier Lue Ee ege e e reet EG eet iere e uode 10 1 Command Formats 2 1 d iUe tei ett iege Pt etes ie edet be eb ce tgp vets 10 2 AMOS AND XPE FILENAMES 5 5 iE get EE eae edes 10 2 WIEDGARD S 25 3 ter maet eise eee Eege eet nice edes eset ie eee eR ede e 10 2 SENDING FILES TO XPE FROM AMOS TODOS ener nente 10 3 RECEIVING FILES FROM
87. D formats and writes the data in one pass This process will extend the life of the media longer than using FMTDVD and COPY Another advantage is AMOS does not have to be shut down to access the backup media The DVD RAM backup is mountable under AMOS with the DVD program Once the DVD media is mounted individual files may be copied to or from the DVD RAM media just like any hard disk drive just slower on the write to RAM media Using the DVD is faster to restore individual files or p pn s than a streamer tape To change the media execute DVD U Enter first to un mount the current DVD media then install the next AMOS formatted media into the DVD drive Allow about 30 40 seconds for the drive to recognize the media and then type DVD ENTER The new media will be mounted and can have different logicals The disk labels of the original hard drive platters will be displayed The DVD command will add DEVTBL entries and load the BITMAP for each of the new logicals during the mount See the system command reference sheets for more details on these programs AMOS and FMTDVD FMTDVD will format the DVD RAM media into as many logical devices of the same size that you require After the format is complete mount the media with the DVD program Copy files from any disk logical to any of the newly defined DVD logicals The disk labels are not written with the copy The LABEL program must be used to label each logical This must be done manually or t
88. D subsystem and serial I O expansion chassis also have their power cords installed and main power switches in the on position If the power light and the fans are not on you have a problem Call your VAR for troubleshooting help BOOTING UP WITH AMOS 8 X Normally all AMOS 8 x Servers have the system software installed by Alpha Microsystems before the Server leaves the factory Since this is the case all you need to do is turn on the Server The first thing displayed on the Console is the power on self test POST diagnostic Once this process is completed the system software on the hard disk or RAID subsystem will start to load In a few seconds the ALPHA MICRO logo will display with blue progress dots Then the AlphaShell program 5 second count down box will be displayed The AM8000 System Diagnostic window will appear and will execute the AM8000 MON and AM8000 INI as the default settings Then a terminal emulator will execute and display the system initialization command file These commands appear in rapid succession on the AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 2 10 Chapter Two operator console VTM1 port as they are executed VTM stands for Virtual Terminal port using either the AMPCLite or AMPCTerm terminal emulator If nothing appears on the Operator Console after a couple of minutes contact your Alpha Micro VAR You may need to follow the instructions below to install the operating system onto the System Disk More than likel
89. DART ESP Glue Version 2 2 from the ESP consortium Starr Accounting Version 4 1 Ultra Safe Version 3 5 150 What Third Party programs do not work on AMOS 8 x o DataVUE does not work This package does not work on Roadrunner systems either o TALKTO does not work AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Chapter 6 System Administration System Administrator is the title we give the person whose job it is to make sure the Server runs efficiently and who has access to the files and programs that comprise the system software This chapter explains some of the tasks that the System Administrator should accomplish The first half of this chapter addresses the AMOS only tasks and the latter half of the chapter covers the XPE Administrative functions AMOS provides many program tools to support system administration functions This chapter covers many of these procedures including O O O Alternate Booting the AMOS Server Allocating disk accounts Modifying the system initialization file to o Add Printers amp Spoolers o Add Jobs and Terminals o Change memory allocations Defining logical devices Disk diagnostic procedures Backing up the Server XPE Administrative programs and Backup Procedures ADMINISTRATIVE TASKS Alternate Booting the AMOS Server Alternate Booting the Server is an Administrator task This is a new procedural concept that needs to be understood for all AMOS 8 x Servers This task is only performed to
90. DITIONAL AMOS USERS 5 eee 4 1 DISK DRIVER FOR AMS8000 MON eeii ee etes tenete eene totas eene annee EEE se these dense stets nennt nn 4 2 THE SYSTEM DISK AND ALTERNATE BOOT 4 2 DEVICE NAMES gebiet seeders horto reti eto bte ie dto de Eee oe ret Peer eit 4 2 DISK ACCOUNTS iet etre edet e eget ue d E Eee Ueda OE ed 4 3 LOGGINGION M 4 4 THE TERMINAL KEYBOARD 3t rete erit de rer Ee ete Hi pee E de 4 5 Correcting Typing Mistakes eee deett eter erect disc ie Ka atreta eee ENER TURO 4 5 STREAMING TAPE ius RE di e E Ee 4 6 Loading and Unloading Tape Cartridges esee nennen nre 4 7 Tape Capacity i adeste nitet eem E E e eR ne EUER ay stave ERI ete pee Evene cues delle 4 7 OTHER MOUNTABEE MBDBDDLA E btt ee eet e Lee eee et etas b Lege SEA 4 8 CHAPTER 5 AMOS SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS e eese esee ee eene ene tn ae en stato aeta stas snae 5 1 AMOS AND DELETING OLD UNSUPPORTED PROGRAMS eene 5 1 AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 Table of Contents Page iii INTRODUCTION TO AMOS SOFTWARE eene ennemi en nennen tenete nnne enne 5 1 Programming Languages i eee e o ee RO CUR t eee eoe 5 1 INGLW edu 5 2 Text Preparation ett EEGEN 5 2 Utility Programs TEE 5 2 Application Programs 1 31 one Hee eiTe e de re Ice iid ide eet oce OR pe ed onde 5 2 Office Information Products cece eir rer e Ct eee ett PER tede ie eee v IRR ere ope ERE RN
91. E AM8000 BIG1 AMD file as shown below To finish step 1 Select gt Next button In Step 2 Input the number of logicals and Select gt Next button Auris Dech General Wun Shep 2 Arcs Disk Generation Wizard Shep I Balaci the Arnos dich karam Thir ir tha nma gi the data fsbo be generated on the FC which ainiye A single had ka oe ae h machine f no estenzion i apeti sl e green an ein of and pden d ir oaae Ess the ronber of logea deve For Hes diak E Legal bona eg within a pheimcal deve Ys leo eek ores cnm Step 3 is to specify the size of each logical drive in MB Fill in the input box and Select Next AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 3 18 Chapter Three Amai Dnk Gerruration Wizard ep 3 j d Amos Disk Genetalion Wizard Step 4 Fa Este the sire for each kopos drive ik He je mege fie fokra Aog dek dais Ne E v n a Mb 0487 boten Legicnl disk size BI 8 Mb C Kb 124 Eb Ptysical disk size 3 9 Gh Twial aize of drive E 46 6 Gb C Records BIZ betes Free space en debe E 34 8 Gh Image pregress Current file sles Elaps ed time Tine remaining ep omms o ome omm one JI Ges Step 4 finishes the create process Select Finish button The system will create the 4GB disk file on E as shown on the right Be patient this process can take several minutes This will write the initial AMD disk file on the hard driv
92. E SYSTEM DISK AND ALTERNATE BOOT The AMOS 8 x system software is always on DSKO where the operating system looks for most programs during the boot process Usually the AMD file containing DSKO is on the largest hard disk or RAID subsystem where the largest pseudo disk file is located To Configure the system for Alternate Booting change the DSK device mapping to a different AMD filename Then using the Boot AM8000 shortcut in the C AM8000 folder will boot the system with the newly defined disk file This procedure replaces the older warm boot process and is more convenient and flexible A single logical 32MB AMD file has been provided for this purpose The pseudo disk filename is AM8kSub AMD in the C AM8000 folder Unlike warm boot tapes this disk has the complete AMOS 8 x operating system release with the system PIC codes installed No more searching for the correct warm boot tape for the system AMOS 8 x Servers have a CD or DVD drive installed You have the option of booting from this device but NOT into AMOS as you might be used to Booting from a CD loads the system with Norton Ghost in a PC DOS environment This program is used to load an empty hard disk drive with the AMOS 8 x and XPE software This usually is a special circumstance when it is not possible to boot from any pseudo disk drive This will be covered in detail in Chapter 6 DEVICE NAMES AMOS uses device names to identify the different pieces of equipment that make up the
93. ETH101 NIN AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 6 12 Chapter Six The format of the ETH101 NIN is as follows DRIVER PCNDV Network driver for all systems NODECHECK ON NAME AM 8000 SYSTEM 2 Use VUE to modify the ETH101 NIN to reflect your AIphaNET settings defining the Network Group and Node numbers If you are not using AIphaNET just leave the file as is 3 In AMOS LOG TCP 4 Using VUE update the following files as indicated below a NETWRK Update the Ethernet entry to reflect your network IP address This IP address must be distinct from the host XPE IP address b CONFIG Update the route IP address at the end of the file to reflect your router IP address If the AlphaNET network number was changed from 101 in the SYS ETHIOI NIN file then make the same change to the 101 in the ifconfig ec 101 arpa 100 line c MYNAME Update the entry to reflect your Internet domain name d RESOLV Update the desired default Internet domain and name Server DNS entries to your particular configuration If the HOSTS file is being used then remove the from the tryhostfile line If you are not using DNS leave the in place e FTPUSR Change the pre configured user names and passwords for FTP access f HOSTS Change the hostname information to reflect your particular installation You do not need the HOSTS File if you are using just DNS The original file is provided a
94. GURATION INFORMATION AAA H 1 RAID EXBANSION 3 5 eerta eere eme tee eeh HE OR ER et e NEES H 2 AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 Table of Contents Page vii Document History Index AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page viii Table Of Contents m List of Tables Table 3 1 Recommended AMOS Memory zeg 3 3 Table 4 1 Special Function Keys on the Terminal Keyboard eee 4 5 Table 4 2 Supported 4 Streamer Data Cartridges eese rennen 4 7 Table 9 1 Diagnostic Display Status Codes A 9 1 Table A 1 PC COM port MDB 9 Modular adapter connector Signals DWB 10317 25 A 3 Table A 2 RJ 45 Serial Connector Signals AM 359 50 Cable adapter sese A 5 Table A 3 Serial Terminal Connector Signal A 5 Table A 4 Serial modem modular adapter esee neret nennen A 6 Table A 5 Pin out for Workstation to Computer Cable IBM PC AT and Compatibles A 7 Table A 6 Pin out for Workstation to Computer Cable IBM PC XT and Compatibles A 7 Table A 7 Centronics Interface Cabling Signal Pin out A 8 Table A 8 TIA 568B 10 100BaseT RJ 45 Connector Signals eene A 9 Table A 9 AM 8000 UPS Status Port Signal Dmouts seen rennen A 10 List of Figures Figure 1 1 AM 8000 Deskside Chassis Figure 1 2 Eagle 800 Deskside Chassis 1 1 Figure 1 3 AM 8000 Rack Mount Semer 1 2 F
95. IC mode c Select gt File gt Save d Select gt File gt Exit 4 Type to select the lt AMPCLiTE gt window 5 Type LOG OPR Press 6 Type MONTST AM8000 Press 7 This will boot the system up and the SSD should be active and all ports should be available if the AMS8000 PIC code has been entered with INSTAS See Chapter 4 8 VTMS virtual terminal should be hidden if you corrected the EAMOS INI file AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page F 6 Appendix F AM 113 XX COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT Responsible Party Alpha Micro Products Address 17534 Von Karman Irvine CA 92614 Telephone 949 250 4180 FAX 949 250 5870 Type of Product PC Co processor board Model Name AM 113 XX Multi Function This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation FCC INFORMATION 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT This product when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual meets FCC requirements Modifications not expressly approved by Alpha Micro Products may void your authority to use the product 2 IMPORTANT When connecting this product to accessories and or another product use only high quality shielded cables Follow
96. IN JIN JIN AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO 10 11 12 13 Page G 9 Page G 10 SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB JOB304 SIO109 500K JOB JOB305 S1I0110 500K JOB JOB306 S10111 500K JOB JOB307 S10112 500K JOB JOB308 S1I0113 500K JOB JOB309 S1I0114 500K JOB JOB310 S10115 500K JOB JOB311 S1I0116 500K JOB SERIAL PORTS AM359 SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB JOB312 S10117 500K JOB JOB313 S10118 500K JOB JOB314 S10119 500K JOB JOB315 S1I0120 500K JOB JOB316 S1I0121 500K JOB JOB317 S10122 500K JOB JOB318 S10123 500K JOB JOB319 S1I0124 500K JOB JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN JIN SETJOB LOGJOB LOGTRM 20K LOGGER 7 Appendix G SETJOB SPOOL1 DUMMY 20K LPTINI ETJOB NETSER NETSER 100K NETSER JIN S LPT1 PIN WAIT NE TSER SETJOB NETLOG NETLOG 50K SETJOB TCPEMU TCPEMU 3M TCP GO Log OPR demo sleep 1 JOBLVL TCPEMU 2 7 sleep 1 JOBLVL TELNED 2 e response Log SYS SET PROMPT AM8000 TCP CMD ile in use for 18 PC PC COM ports Set job level to 2 for tcpmeu Set job level to 2 for telned for better terminal plus Am113 ports ensures error messages displayed as text allow time for am113 to boot MEMORY 0 Lo
97. INI Save the file when exiting Alpha VUE by pressing the key and typing F Some of the common changes you may want to make are discussed in the later sections that follow From OPR use MONTST to insure TEST INI is working as expected by typing MONTST AM8000 TEST INI ENTER After you have successfully tested TEST INI and are satisfied with the results copy it back to AMS8000 INI and execute MONTST AMS000 This will resynchronize the AMOS and XPE copies of the AM8000 INI file to test out the new configuration Then if you decide you don t want to keep the new T Be careful not to copy the TEST INI file too soon You might want to let the Server run awhile configuration you can always reboot with the former system initialization file Follow this AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 System Administration Page 6 5 procedure any time the system initialization file is modified Here is a sample simple initialization file LE a Simple AM8000 Ini file JOBS 10 JOBALC VIM1 JOB1 LPT1 QUEUE 10000 TRMDEF VTM1 PCVIM 1 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 15 TRMDEF TRM1 PCSIO 1 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 15 TRMDEF LPT1 PCLPT 1 TELTYP 100 100 100 TRMDEF DUMMY PSEUDO NULL 80 80 80 TRMDEF Required VER Unlock keyboard SCZDSP SCZPC SYS SCSI dispatcher DEVTBL DSK DEVTBL TRM RES MEM DEVTBL ST
98. IT 1 4 8 0 101 3 updated Jan2008 DVD DEV 1 4 533 707 354 274 DVD000 NEW 1 4 8 0 101 updated for AM 8000 systems FMTDVD LIT 1 4 8 0 102 MAKDVD LIT 1 4 8 0 101 DVDRAM DVR 1 6 764 071 753 423 for all units except Panasonic DVDPAN DVR 1 6 151 436 033 442 Only the Panasonic LFD 521U To install the both drivers for both models of DVD drives do the following LOG DVR COPY DVD DVR DVDRAM DVR for all units except Panasonic or COPY PAN DVR DVDPAN DVR for the Panasonic LFD 521u LOG SYS To check if the PIC code is installed type DVD PIC The system should display the PIC if installed If the system response is Invalid SSD do the following from the SYS account Log SYS COPY DVD000 OVR DVD000 New ENTER Then enter the PIC code by typing DVD AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 System Administration Page 6 27 Enter the DVD PIC provided by Alpha Micro Verify that the DVD DVR is loaded into system memory If not VUE the AM8000 INI and add in the drives to system memory SYSTEM DVR DVD DVR SYSTEM DVR PAN DVR Finish out and save the file Test the new file Log OPR ENTER MONTST AM8000 The system should boot up and reach MEMORY 0 Place a DVD RAM media in the drive and test the DVD device by typing DVD or DVD DEV PAN as appropriate To create a quick backup to the DVD RAM LOG OPR and execute MAKDVD Enter the device specification for the disk platters to be written then Ente
99. JBPC11 COM11 JBPC12 COM12 JBPC13 COM13 JBPC14 COM14 JBPC15 COM15 JBPC16 COM16 JBPC17 COM17 JBPC18 COM18 PT1 500K JOB JIN 500K JOB JIN 500K JOB JIN 500K JOB JIN 500K JOB JIN 500K JOB JIN 500K JOB JIN 500K JOB JIN 500K JOB JIN SETJOB NE ER NETS ER 100K NETSER JIN WAIT N ETS S R SETJOB V SETJOB T WAIT VTSE T NE SETJOB sleep 1 JOBLVL sleep 1 JOBLVL LOG SYS set pro MEMORY T S R I TCP TCPEMU 2 TELNED 2 mpt ip152 gt R VISER 100K VISER JIN 0G NETLOG 50K EMU TCPEMU 3M TCP GOTCP CMD LOG OPR DEMO Appendix G Set job level to 2 for tcpemu for better response Set job level to 2 for telned for better terminal response 0 Local AM8000 INI file in use AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 AppendixH IDE Internal RAID Option Details INTERNAL IDE RAID The AM 452 internal mounted IDE RAID Level 1 subsystem is the best choice for storage for the Eagle 800 Servers This unit has the primary 40 GB drive placed into the top drive tray The selector switch should be set to Single to start with Once a drive is placed into the bottom tray and locked into place move the selector switch to Default The RAID Level 1 controller then mirrors the Primary drive to the new Secondary drive For a 40 GB drive system the mirro
100. KANA DSK1 As DSKANA checks the disk it displays the disk account numbers When it finishes it displays the results of its analysis For example DSKANA DSK1 Begin analysis of DSK1 1 42 100 20 The following blocks were marked in use but not in a file 1767 1772 2562 3456 6265 The following blocks were in a file but not marked in use Rewriting BITMAP No file errors If you see the No file errors message the file structure on the disk is intact If DSKANA lists a number of file errors there is a problem with the disk s file structure Your next step is to run DSKANA again using either the L or E option discussed below to see where the errors are on the disk AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 System Administration Page 6 15 For the complete procedure to follow if DSKANA finds any file errors see Recovering From Disk Errors in the System Operator s Guide DSKANA Options Following are the most common DSKANA options Please see the DSKANA reference sheet in the System Commands Reference Manual for a complete listing of options Option Function None Displays account numbers on disk and summary only IC Check the Bitmap but does not rewrite bitmap JP Lists files and blocks in which any errors occurred L Lists all files and blocks on the disk To use one of these options place it after the DSKANA command like this DSKANA DSK1 C As mentioned above use the L or E option t
101. M65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 4 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 5 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 6 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 7 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 8 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200
102. NONETEST TXT ONE TXT This example transfers the AMOS file ONE TXT to XPE with the file name ONETEST TXT in the directory CAUSER The C USER folder must already exist TODOS can t create a new directory If ONETEST TXT already exists in CAUSER TODOS overwrites it automatically Finally if the file is not in the current AMOS account you need to use the complete syntax TODOS C NUSERNONETEST TXT DSK2 ONE TXT 23 4 If the file is on the current disk include just the account number and leave out the device name If you are more familiar with Windows syntax use it instead The last sample command would then be TODOS DSK2 ONE TXT 23 4 C USER ONETEST TXT AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 10 4 Chapter Ten RECEIVING FILES FROM XPE INTO AMOS FMDOS The FMDOS command will copy XPE files to AMOS Use either of these formats FMDOS amos filespec XPE pathname options This example transfers the AMOS file ONE TXT to XPE with the file name ONETEST TXT in the directory C USER C USER folder must already exist TODOS can t create a new directory If ONETEST TXT already exists in C USER TODOS overwrites it automatically or FMDOS XPE pathname amos filespec options The XPE pathname is the name and directory of the file being copied to AMOS The default is the device and directory the user is logged into FMDOS understands only XPE eight character file names not long file names To copy a file e with
103. OCACHE DSKO for AMD dsk files SET NOCACHE SUBO for AMD dsk files SET NOCACHE BIGO SETJOB VTM2 VTM2 500K JOB JIN SETJOB VTM3 VVTM3 500K JOB JIN SETJOB VTMA VTM4 500K JOB JIN SETJOB VTM5 VTM5 500K JOB JIN SETJOB VTM6 VTM6 500K JOB JIN SETJOB VTM7 VTM7 500K JOB JIN SETJOB VTM8 VTM8 500K JOB JIN SETJOB JOB1 SI01 500K JOB JIN SETJOB JOB2 S1I02 500K JOB JIN SETJOB JOB3 SIO3 500K JOB JIN SETJOB JOB4 SI104 500K JOB JIN SETJOB JBPC1 COMI1 500K JOB JIN SETJOB JBPC2 COM2 500K JOB JIN SETJOB LPT1 DUMMY 20k LTPTINI LPT1 PIN WAIT LPT1 SETJOB NETSER NETSER 100K NETSER JIN WAIT NETSER setjob vtser vtser 100k vtser jin wait vtser SETJOB NETLOG NETLOG 50K SETJOB TCPEMU TCPEMU 3M TCP GOTCP CMD I WAIT TCPEMU sleep 1 AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page G 4 JOBLVL TCPEMU 2 response sleep 1 JOBLVL termina LOG SYS S M EMORY TELNED 2 l response ET prompt ip172 0 Local AM359 INI SE LOAD SY SMSG USA LOAD AMO000 0VR 1 4 LOAD TRMDEF LIT 1 4 more Appendix G set the job level to 2 for tcpemu for quicker network set the job level to 2 for telned for quicker telned AM8000 INI file in use AM359 INI file for AM 8000 System ports more time to initialize TRMDEF VTM1 PCVTM 1 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 SLEEP 8
104. OS and XPE environments with TODOS and FMDOS programs FAT32 Data Hard disks DVD RAM and USB hard drives can all be formatted in this data type Any file in the XPE environment can be written to the media formatted in this data type AMD disks files stored under this format are a complete image of the AMOS disk and can be copied to media formatted in other data formats by XPE only AMOS can only access AMD files and cannot access files on the XPE environment directly UDF CD Data Format Universal Disk Format UDF 1 5 and 2 0 are CD formats which are used by other 3 party programs to copy files to CDs or DVD media These are only accessible by Windows XPE programs and not by AMOS directly AMD disk files can be saved in this data format as a backup One example is the B sClip packet writing software from BHA It has its own format utility to format CD RW DVD RW or RAM media Using the packet writing software you can create data backups of any Windows XPE files onto CDs or DVD media If AMD files are written to DVD RAM in this format and the operator follows the XMOUNT procedures you can create backups that are removable from the system without shutting down AMOS AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 System Administration Page 6 19 The AM8000 Series II amp III and Eagle800 Series II amp III systems use the InCD packet writing software to support the DVD RAM drive CDFS CDFS Compact Disk File System is accessible under XPE a
105. OS file Amos to the XPE file Windows Or TODOS Windows Amos option Options are NOD Do not copy over the existing file no delete D Overwrite the existing file Q Ask for confirmation NOQ No confirmation AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 Appendix E SCSI Configuration Details Both the AM 8000 and Eagle 800 have dual port SCSI interfaces available After a discussion of the type of SCSI devices that can be used the following sections describe configuration rules for the SCSI bus including mixing device types and termination issues Later AM8000 systems have a 64 bit controller plugged into the PCI X buss This card has both SCSI channels available on the rear panel with VHDCI connectors Never plug a SCSI device into the SCSI cable or remove one from the cables while system power is on Doing so could seriously damage the device and the CPU board The AM 8000 uses LVD and tolerant active negation on the SCSI busses making the busses sensitive in these situations SCSI DEVICE TYPES You can attach any supported SCSI device to the second wide SCSI bus on the AM 8000 Server using the appropriate adapter if necessary as described below Supported devices include o Narrow single ended SCSI Drives 8 bit o Wide SCSI single ended SCSI drive 16 bit o Ultra wide LVD SCSI disk drives fast 16 bit o W streaming tape drives AM 625 AM 626 AM 627 AM 628 AM 629 have a single ended interface o The AM
106. RO Streaming tape device BITMAP DSK Paged bitmaps for AMOS 8 X ERSATZ ERSATZ INI B 10 reserve 10 blank ersatz slots SGINI 50K SYST SYSMSG USA CMDLIN SYS SCNWLD SYS OFLOCK SY TRM DVR 1 Wel K Wel Hg dp SYST R DV SYST EM DVR 1 SYST for UPDates for DVD RAM drive d for new BluRay drive n UO nn D UJ v Ud UJ UO UG OY OY OV OV OD OY On Eq E MON a GM GM o rece ac a a i MC Ce ca H Ca K n H O pi Bl pi Bl eE SKERR ETJOB LPT1 DUMMY 20K LPTINI LPT1 PIN LPT1 Printer ETJOB JOB1 TRM1 500K VER CONFIGURING THE SYSTEM FOR PRINTERS Defining the Parallel Port AMOS 8 x Servers contain one parallel port which is not automatically defined for you If you want to use the parallel port make sure that the TRMDEF LPT1 definition is uncommented in the INI file Verify that the LPT1 Generic printer is defined in the lt AM8000 Configure Printers section Graphic Printers This is only required if graphics is sent to the printer by AMOS such as bitmap images If this type of printing is NOT required then skip down to the next section AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 6 6 Chapter Six To set up an AMOS compatible graphics printer do the following 1 The printer must be added to XPE using the Generic Text Only driver 2 Inthe Printers and Faxes gt screen after the printe
107. Repeat this process for all COM ports that are not numbered sequentially Once this is accomplished close the Device Manager window by Select X in the upper right hand corner Then close the System Properties window with an OK See Chapter 6 the section titled PC Serial Port Installation and Renumbering Procedure for the details on this process Device Manager Communications Port COM 1 Communications Port COM2 ECP Printer Port LPT 1 EdgePort V34331432 0 Serial Port 1 COM3 EdgePort V34331432 0 Serial Port 2 COM4 EdgePort V34331432 0 Serial Port 3 COMS EdgePort V34331432 0 Serial Port 4 COM6 EdgePort V34331432 0 Serial Port 5 COM7 EdgePort V34331432 0 Serial Port 6 COM8 EdgePort V34331432 0 Serial Port 7 COM9 EdgePort V34331432 0 Serial Port 8 COM10 EdgePort V34333651 0 Serial Port 1 COM11 EdgePort V34333651 0 Serial Port 2 COM12 EdgePort V34333651 0 Serial Port 3 COM13 EdgePort V34333651 0 Serial Port 4 COM14 EdgePort V3433365 1 0 Serial Port 5 COM15 EdgePort V34333651 0 Serial Port 6 COM16 EdgePort V34333651 0 Serial Port 7 COM17 f Bei EdgePort V34333651 0 Serial Port 8 COM18 g Processors d SCSI and RAID controllers o Sound video and name controllers EET xl a md Figure 3 8 Device Manager Ports assignment The XPE side must be done first before the AM8000 program scans the hardware for ports ava
108. S Please recognize the distinction between hardware LPT port vs the AMOS LPT port assignment i This LPT does not have to be the same as the Server s parallel port usually referenced as LPT1 S Each LPTXx can reference any XPE printer even a network or USB printer Because each AMOS LPTXx configuration also includes the Windows fonts the SAME XPE printer could have multiple LPTXx references For example AMOS might be configured to use a network laser printer as LPT2 for Times Roman 10pt for letter printing and as LPT3 for Ariel 8pt for condensed printing and it could be the same physical printer For each XPE printer configured for AMOS activate or add the appropriate TRMDEF in the line in the TEST INI file TRMDEF LPT3 PCLPT 3 TELTYP 100 100 100 The PCLPT 3 matches the LPT3 in the lt AM8000 Configure gt Printers section PCLPT 3 matches LPT3 etc The name given on the TRMDEF line such as LPT3 above could be replaced with LETTER a name that identifies the function the printer is being used as AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 System Administration Page 6 7 Using Serial Printers Each serial printer may be defined in either of two distinct ways 1 As an XPE printer or 2 Asan AMOS only serial printer If it is defined as an AMOS serial printer it will consume one AMOS users license To define it as a XPE serial printer make sure the PC COM port is not mapped for AMOS use This information is stored unde
109. S 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 AMOS 8 x INI s JOBALC JOB256 JOB257 JOB258 JOB259 JOB260 JOB261 JOB262 JOB263 JOBALC JOB264 JOB265 JOB266 JOB267 JOB268 JOB269 JOB270 JOB271 JOBALC JOB272 JOB273 JOB274 JOB275 JOB276 JOB277 JOB278 JOB279 JOBALC JOB280 JOB281 JOB282 JOB283 JOB284 JOB285 JOB286 JOB287 JOBALC JOB288 JOB289 JOB290 JOB291 JOB292 JOB293 JOB294 JOB295 JOBALC JOB296 JOB297 JOB298 JOB299 JOB300 JOB301 JOB302 JOB303 JOBALC JOB304 JOB305 JOB306 JOB307 JOB308 JOB309 JOB310 JOB311 JOBALC JOB312 JOB313 JOB314 JOB315 JOB316 JOB317 JOB318 JOB319 JOBALC JOB320 JOB321 JOB322 JOB323 JOB324 JOB325 JOB326 JOB327 JOBALC LOGJOB JOBALC NETSER TCPEMU NETLOG SCZDSP SCZPC SYS Required DEVTBL DSK DEVTBL SUB DEVTBL OLD DEVTBL NEW D D EVTBL TRM RES MEM STRO EVIBL TLPO BITMAP DSK BITMAP SUB BITMAP OLD BITMAP NEW ERSATZ MSGINI N SYSTE SYSTE SYSTE SYSTE SYSTE ERSATZ INI B 20 reserve 20 more blank ersatz slots 100K ETINI ETH101 NIN M M M M M SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTI SYSTI SYSTI SYSTI SYSTI STCP SYST SYST SYST SYST SYST SYST SYST SYSTI SYSTI SYSTI SYSTI SYSTI SMEM S LE p Gl DI Di E st M SYSMSG USA CMDLIN SYS DVR TRM DVR DVR MEM DVR DVR RES DVR DVR SUB DVR DVR OLD DVR DVR DVD DVR for DVD amp MAKDVD DVR DBD DVR
110. S 8 x network traffic but can be used to totally isolate the XPE from any network traffic To block network viruses on the XPE environment we now ship the AMOS Servers with the XPE Firewall enabled for all Ethernet Interfaces We also disable the Microsoft File and Printer sharing AMOS 8 x and AlphaTCP work fine without these services enabled If the system administrator needs a particular function we have described in Chapter 6 the procedures and ports that may be enabled by the system administrator Patches available from Microsoft As patches are made available from Microsoft we incorporate them into future builds However only a few even apply to the components we have installed Because the XPE features are locked down at build time for each Server the Server may have to be upgraded at the factory to install most patches Alpha Micro s Own In House Experience We configured our in house AM 8000 alphamicro com demonstration system attached to the Internet without any firewall for months in 2003 AMOS 8 x was never damaged nor compromised Among the many attacks the RPC Service attacks were the only ones that affected XPE These attacks disabled rather than opened some RPC services having no effect on AMOS 8 x and only a temporary affect on XPE How To Make AMOS Virus Proof Please keep all system folders set to Not Shared to keep viruses off the system For systems manufactured after March 5 2004 do nothing For systems
111. SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB JOB208 SIO013 500K JOB JOB209 SIO014 500K JOB JOB210 SIO015 500K JOB JOB211 S10016 500K JOB JOB212 S10017 500K JOB JOB213 S10018 500K JOB JOB214 SIO019 500K JOB JOB215 S10020 500K JOB SERIAL PORTS AM359 SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB JOB216 S10021 500K JOB JOB217 S10022 500K JOB JOB218 S10023 500K JOB JOB219 S10024 500K JOB JOB220 S10025 500K JOB JOB221 S10026 500K JOB JOB222 SIO027 500K JOB JOB223 SIO028 500K JOB SERIAL PORTS AM359 SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB JOB224 SIO029 500K JOB JOB225 SIO030 500K JOB JOB226 SIO031 500K JOB JOB227 S10032 500K JOB JOB228 SIO033 500K JOB JOB229 SIO034 500K JOB JOB230 SIO035 500K JOB JOB231 SIO036 500K JOB SERIAL PORTS AM359 SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB JOB232 810037 500K JOB JOB233 SIO038 500K JOB JOB234 10039 500K JOB JOB235 SIO040 500K JOB JOB236 SIO041 500K JOB JOB237 S10042 500K JOB JOB238 S10043 500K JOB JOB239 SIO044 500K JOB SERIAL PORTS AM359 SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB JOB240 SIO045 500K JOB JOB241 S10046 500K JOB JOB242 SIO047 500K JOB JOB243 SIO048 500K JOB JOB244 SIO049 500K JOB JOB245 SIO050 500K JOB SETJO
112. SI tape drive installed the easiest way to copy files to or from other non networked AMOS computers is by using the MTUSAV and MTURES commands See the AMOS System Commands Reference Manual for information on these commands AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Appendix A Connector Configurations The types and number of connectors found on the rear panel of the AM 8000 or Eagle 800 will vary depending on the hardware configuration ordered See Figure 2 2 amp 2 4 for the position of these connectors on the Server s rear panel SERIAL I O CONNECTORS The AM 113 50 or 45 multipurpose serial I O interface board includes four on board RS 232 serial ports The Eagle 800 uses the AM 113 45 board the AM 8000 uses the AM 113 50 board All four serial ports have standard RJ 45 connectors and use the PCSIO IDV interface driver for port numbers 1 4 octal The AM 8000 may also contain a 68 pin interface connector for controlling a serial I O expansion chassis that can house standard Alpha Micro AM 359 I O paddle cards The AM 359 boards use the PCSIO IDV port numbers 5 to 174 octal in the AM8000 INI file The SIO 68 pin expansion connector must mate only to the AM 349 20 SIO buffer board inside the SIO expansion chassis The cable used is either a 3 or 6 foot 34 twisted paired cable This cable is identical to the SCSI cable be very careful where it is plugged into Additionally AMOS 8 x Servers are equipped with 2 PC COM ports Using the
113. SIO043 PCSIO 053 TRMDEF SIO044 PCSIO 054 SERIAL PORTS AM359 TRMDEF SIO045 PCSIO 055 TRMDEF SIO046 PCSIO 056 TRMDEF SIO047 PCSIO 057 TRMDEF SIO048 PCSIO 060 TRMDEF SIO049 PCSIO 061 TRMDEF SIO050 PCSIO 062 TRMDEF SIO051 PCSIO 063 TRMDEF SIO052 PCSIO 064 SERIAL PORTS AM359 TRMDEF SIO053 PCSIO 065 TRMDEF SIO054 PCSIO 066 TRMDEF SIO055 PCSIO 067 TRMDEF SIO056 PCSIO 070 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 TRMDEF SIO057 PCSIO 071 TRMDEF SIO058 PCSIO 072 TRMDEF SIO059 PCSIO 073 TRMDEF SIO060 PCSIO 074 SERIAL PORTS AM359 TRMDEF SIO061 PCSIO 075 TRMDEF SIO062 PCSIO 076 TRMDEF SI0063 PCSIO 077 TRMDEF SIO064 PCSIO 100 TRMDEF SIO065 PCSIO 101 TRMDEF SIO066 PCSIO 102 TRMDEF SIO067 PCSIO 103 TRMDEF SIO068 PCSIO 104 SERIAL PORTS AM359 TRMDEF SIO069 PCSIO 105 TRMDEF SIO070 PCSIO 106 TRMDEF SIO071 PCSIO 107 TRMDEF SIO072 PCSIO 110 TRMDEF SIO073 PCSIO 111 TRMDEF SIO074 PCSIO 112 TRMDEF SIO075 PCSIO 113 TRMDEF SIO076 PCSIO 114 SERIAL PORTS AM359 TRMDEF SIO077 PCSIO 115 TRMDEF SIO078 PCSIO 116 TRMDEF SIO079 PCSIO 117 TRMDEF SIO080 PCSIO 120 TRMDEF SIO081 PCSIO 121 TRMDEF SIO082 PCSIO 122 TRMDEF SIO083 PCSIO 123 TRMDEF SIO084 PCSIO 124 SERIAL PORTS AM359 TRMDEF SIO085 PCSIO 125 TRMDEF SIO086 PCSIO 126 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 TRMDEF SIO087 PCSIO 127 19200 A
114. SKERR causes the Server to report the location of any hard errors the diagnostic program finds If you don t use SET DSKERR the diagnostic tells you only that an error occurred not where on the disk it happened You must run the diagnostic program from the same job where the SET DSKERR was executed The next two sections discuss two very useful diagnostic programs REDALL and DSKANA You can find more information on disk diagnostic programs in the System Operator s Guide and the AMOS User s Guide The REDALL Command REDALL reads every block of data or the number of blocks you choose on the logical disk specified and reports any hard errors It does not alter the data on the disk REDALL works on all disks It is a good idea to run REDALL for each disk on the Server occasionally possibly once a month To use REDALL perform these steps 1 To read all the blocks on a disk enter REDALL followed by the device name of the disk desired REDALL DSK2 ENTER 2 If you don t want REDALL to read all blocks on the disk follow the disk specification with the decimal number of blocks you want read REDALL DSK2 100 The command above tells REDALL to read the first 100 blocks on DSK2 3 REDALL now tells you the number of blocks it is reading For example REDALL DSK2 Reading 13800 blocks AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 6 14 Chapter Six EXIT 4 REDALL ends when it finishes reading the blocks If any errors occur REDALL di
115. Sed 5 2 ON LINE DOCUMENTA TION BE 5 3 ADDITONAL DOCUMENTATION 12 2 Irt tke Hee A AEE AEE EEEE A EEEa 5 4 I Want To Start At The Beemnmnng AAA 5 4 I Want To Learn How To Maintain My Server AA 5 4 I Want To Write Computer Programs esses tenete enne nne en rennen eren 5 4 What Third Party programs are known to work on AMOS NY 5 5 What Third Party programs do not work on AMOS NN 5 5 CHAPTER 6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION ege eege regeert 6 1 ADMINISTRATIVE TASKS TT 6 1 Alternate Booting the AMOS Server 6 1 KEE 6 2 Passwords secede aide cen ee AAT RW bene ite ed e ete pe ei gue oe a ERA ooa exa pU do eee 6 2 Orsanizing the Disk hie Ee eee rect ais eet eee 6 3 Adding New Accouhts 2 gg ERR es Hle IER n aede el ec aiea 6 3 Using Virtual Terminals pee Ee a n ete eter tie e tee Ree dene eese 6 4 MODIFYING THE SYSTEM INITIALIZATION FILE esee rennen 6 4 CONFIGURING THE SYSTEM FOR PRINTERS eene eene nennen nennen nen 6 5 Defining the Parallel POrt 1 2 2 e bre Up epe e ee tan oret tede reds 6 5 Graphic Printers conet tnde rre prede tede erred Ee 6 5 Using Windows XPE Printets itn Lese tee ee et ede d Lise lee ents para ee a gU o EL de eg aa 6 6 Using Serial Printers eret ote it as SEA e esee Ec aa Pee ea potete tee 6 7 Adding a Printer ERE C eel iea 6 7 Setting Up Ihe AMOS Spoolers eege ettet ee ee eee esie eee op et 6 7 ADDING JOBS ECC di nee
116. SystemVolume with all the site specific settings before a disk failure then restore that Recovery CD to the new drive and reboot Disk Accounts Theoretically users could store their files on the disk without any type of organization A list of all the files the system software special application programs memos everything might be several pages long and would be a nightmare to decipher As discussed in Chapter 4 a better technique to organize your files is to create accounts in which to store as many files as you want An account is just an arbitrary designation for a group of files Your system software is already organized into various accounts and you can add as many or as few additional ones as you need The following paragraphs describe how to add accounts to your computer Passwords The Administrator should assign passwords to any disk accounts If the same account exists on multiple disks each disk can have its own separate password for the account The password acts as a mild security measure to prevent a casual user from accidentally logging into the wrong account Passwords do not prevent files from being copied into or out of an account and can be easily changed or erased using the SYSACT command described below AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 System Administration Page 6 3 Organizing the Disk Because there is the possibility of logging into the wrong account if you have accounts with the same account nu
117. T command 6 10 K Key symbol 1 14 Keys ALPHA key 4 5 ALT MODE key 4 5 CAPS LOCK key 4 5 CONTROL key 4 5 DELETE key 4 5 ESCAPE key 4 5 RETURN key 4 5 RUB key 4 5 SHIFT key 4 5 L Line editor 4 6 6 10 B 2 LOG command 4 4 6 3 LPT ports sharing 6 7 M Main enclosure cleaning 8 2 Maintenance Index air filter cleaning 8 3 preventive 8 1 Media cleaning 8 1 maintaining 8 1 Memory 6 11 DIMMs 1 6 recommended sizes 3 3 MEMORY command 6 11 MIKE INI 6 13 Modifying the Test InI 3 19 MONGEN Driver 4 2 More SCSI devices 3 13 MULTI 5 3 N Navigation B 1 NETINI 6 12 Network configure 3 10 Network Configuration Files 6 12 Network Hardware 1 9 1 11 O Operator Console 2 8 Operator terminal parameters F 1 Other Mountable Media 4 8 Outlets 2 7 P Parallel port 6 6 A 8 Parallel Printer 1 9 Password 4 4 6 2 Peripherals E 3 Power connections 2 7 cord 2 7 requirements 2 7 Power light deskside chassis 2 3 PPN command 4 4 Primary boot device F 1 print spoolers 1 11 Printer cable A 5 Printers adding 6 8 configure 3 9 graphics 6 6 serial 6 7 troubleshooting A 5 Windows 6 6 Product Installation Code PIC 4 1 AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 Index entering 4 1 Programming languages 5 1 AlphaBASIC 5 1 AlphaBASIC Plus 5 1 COBOL 5 1 FORTRAN 5 1 Project
118. TA connectors for up to four SATA disk drives o Fast Ethernet 100 10 Mbps communication ports o Two DDR DIMM sockets for support of up to 2GB of PC3200 DDR RAM o One 9 pin serial I O port with modem control o One 25 pin SPP ECP EPP parallel port o Integrated video graphics controller for system display console o PS 2 keyboard and mouse ports o CPU temperature and voltage monitoring o Four USB ports on the back and two on the front o CMOS BIOS setup for configuration and boot options Eagle 800 Series Ill Server System Board The Single Processor system board provides the Eagle 800 with o One AMD Athlon 64 high speed processor o One ATA 133 IDE channels for ATAPI Devices o Four SATA connectors for up to four SATA disk drives o Fast Ethernet 1000 100 10 Mbps communication ports o Four DDR DIMM sockets for support of up to 16GB of DDRII RAM o Two 9 pin serial I O port with modem control o One 25 pin SPP ECP EPP parallel port o Integrated video graphics controller for system display console o PS 2keyboard and mouse ports o CPU temperature and voltage monitoring o Four USB ports on the back and Four on the front o CMOS BIOS setup for configuration and boot options AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 1 6 Chapter One AM 113 xx Multi function I O Board The AMOS 8 x Servers must have an AM 113 Multi function board to run the AMOS 8 x system This board runs a special version of EAMOS Embedded AMOS that pr
119. THE SSD IDENTIFICATION NUMBER eerte nennen 2 3 OVERVIEW OF INSTALLATION PROCEDURES eere eren nennen nnne trennen nnne 2 3 AM 8000 Server Front Panel Controls and Indicators eene 2 3 AM 8000 Server Rear VO Panel e eee ERER ees Ad 2 4 Eaele 800 Front amp Rear Panel aee etie e deett eere eerte ete Dude et eset 2 5 PREPARING THE SIFE ene ects I Red ERU Ip ee pe HERE een 2 6 Environmental Requirement eese i E e en rennen ener ennnen rese neret 2 6 Environmental e tee 2 6 Static Electricity and Groundin g er ie ie eee ee wa ee ce oe Oe sen gae eed 2 7 Power and Cable Connections esee puce Re Ee cies Le dete cade bebe cete te eee optas 2 7 Verifying Voltage Compatibility rsrsrs niei ea ener nennen eren neen tenentes 2 8 AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page ii Table Of Contents Power Supply AC Voltage and Receptacle sees enne nennen nennen 2 8 INSTALLING THE OPERATOR CONSOLE MOUSE AND KEYBOARD m 2 8 TURNING THE SERVER QN derent iere t eei ette eg He eder teer ede e ERE d 2 9 BOOTING UP WITHAMOS EE 2 9 INSTALLING AMOS 8 X SOFTWARE estate ed ete tere these ete eet bel RE EEE EA 2 10 Expanding th AMOS Re server edu dedere eise NEESS De c tbe ade Eegen 2 10 TURNING THE SERVER ORFS teg eeschte deet Po feet re ERE ee edge eee rt Es 2 11 GELFING ASSISTANCHE EE 2 11 CHAPTER3 AM8000 CONFIGURATION PROGRAM eese ess
120. UB DVR I SYSTEM DVR UPD DVR for UPDates SYSTEM DVR DVD DVR for DVD amp MAKDVD SYSTEM DVR DBD DVR for BlueRay SYSTEM DVR ACD DVR SYSTEM DVR STR DVR SYSTEM RPC SYS N SYSTEM RPCLOD LIT SYSTEM RUN LIT SYSTEM ORUN LIT TCP stuff SYSTEM TCP IPCINI N 200 200K SYSTEM TCP FTPD LIT SYSTEM TCP FTPD RTI SYSTEM TCP TELNED LIT SYSTEM TCP TELNED RTI SYSTEM RTI LIT SYSTE AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page G 11 Page G 12 SMEM 8 OM LOG DEMO SET HEX SET DSKERR MOUNT D MOUNT MOUNT SK SUB NEW SETJOB VTM2 VTM2 500K JOB JIN SETJOB VTM3 VTM3 500K JOB JIN SETJOB VTM4 VTM4 500K JOB JIN SETJOB VTM5 VTM5 500K JOB JIN JOB1 Stol 500K JOB JIN JOB2 SIO2 500K JOB JIN JOB3 SIO3 500K JOB JIN JOB4 S104 500K JOB JIN JBPC1 COM1 500K JOB JIN JBPC2 COM2 500K JOB JIN SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB SETJOB LPT1 DUMMY 20K LPTINI LPT1 PIN WAIT L JBPC3 COM3 500K JOB JIN JBPC4 COM4 500K JOB JIN JBPC5 COM5 500K JOB JIN JBPC6 COM6 500K JOB JIN JBPC7 COM7 500K JOB JIN JBPC8 COM8 500K JOB JIN JBPC9 COM9 500K JOB JIN JBPC10 COM10
121. UEUE 10000 TRMDEF SIO1 PCSIO 1 19200 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 am113 50 ports TRMDEF SIO2 PCSIO 2 19200 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 TRMDEF SIO3 PCSIO 3 38400 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 TRMDEF SOA PCSIO 4 19200 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 TRMDEF Ser002 PCS1IO 4 38400 teltyp 200 200 200 null optional serial net TRMDEF COM1 PCCOM 1 19200 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 pc com ports TRMDEF COM2 PCCOM 2 19200 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 TRMDEF LPT1 PCLPT 1 TELTYP 100 100 100 pe lpt port TRMDEF NETSER PSEUDO NULL 80 80 80 TRMDEF TCPEMU PSEUDO NULL 80 80 80 TRMDEF NETLOG PSEUDO NULL 80 80 80 TRMDEF DUMMY PSEUDO NULL 80 80 80 TRMDEF VTSER PSEUDO NULL100 100 100 optional alphanet vt Server TRMDEF 5 100 100 100 EDITOR 5 optional 5 alphanet slots TDVDEF AM62 AM62A AM62C AM65 AM65A VT100 AM75 terminal drivers TRMDEF Required JOBS 40 jobs allocated JOBALC VTM1 VTM2 VTM3 VTM4 JOBALC VTM5 VTM6 VTM7 JOBALC JOB1 JOB2 JOB3 JOB4 JBPC1 JBPC2 onboard ports JOBALC NETSER TCPEMU NETLOG LPT1 VISER SCZDSP SCZPC SYS required for amos 8 0 DEVTBL DSK amos boot c AM80000 AM8000 AMD file DEVTBL NEW c AM8000 new amd DEVTBL BIG e AM8000 bigl amd DEVTBL SUB c AM8000 am8ksub amd DEVTBL TRM RES MEM STRO DEVTBL TLPO BITMAP DSK BITMAP NEW BITMAP BIG BITMAP SUB ERSATZ ERSATZ INI B 20 reserv
122. Virtual Terminals VER QUEUE 10000 TRMDEF VTM2 PCVTM 2 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 TRMDEF VTM3 PCVTM 3 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 TRMDEF VTM4 PCVTM 4 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 TRMDEF VTM5 PCVTM 5 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 TRMDEF VTM6 PCVTM 6 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 TRMDEF VTM7 PCVTM 7 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 TRMDEF VTM8 PCVTM 10 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 TRMDEF TRMDEF TRMDEF TRMDEF TRMDEF TRMDEF TRMDEF TRMDEF TRMDEF TRMDEF TRMDEF TRMDEF Pr TRMDEF TRMDEF TRMDEF TRMDEF TRMDEF TRMDEF TRMDEF TRMDEF Pr TRMDEF TRMDEF TRMDEF TRMDEF TRMDEF TRMDEF TRMDEF TRMDEF Pr TRMDEF TRMDEF SERIAL PORTS AM11350 SIO001 PCSIO 2001 SIO002 PCSIO 002 SI0003 PCSIO 003 SIO004 PCSIO 2004 SERIAL PORTS AM359 SI0005 PCSIO 005 SI0006 PCSIO 006 S1I0007 PCSIO 007 SI0008 PCSIO 010 SI0009 PCSIO 011 SI0010 PCSIO 012 SIO011 PCSIO 2013 SIO012 PCSIO 2014 SERIAL PORTS AM359 SIO013 PCSIO 015 SIO014 PCSIO 2016 SIO015 PCSIOZ2017 SI0016 PCSIO 020 S1I0017 PCSIO 021 S1I0018 PCSIO 022 SIO019 PCSIO 023 SIO020 PCSIOZ2024 SERIAL PORTS AM359 SIO021 PCSIOZ2025 SIO022 PCSIO 2026 SIO023 PCSIOZ2027 SIO024 PCSIOZ2030 SIO025 PCSIOZ2031 SIO026 PCSIOZ2032 SIO027 PCSIOZ2033 SIO028 PCSIOZ2034 SERIAL PORTS AM359 S10029 PCSIO 035 SI0030 PCSIO 036 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM65 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM62
123. W CMD file which can help initialize all platters of a new device Edit this file and change the device spec from NEW to BIG and save the file Then execute the INTNEW CMD file to initialize all 50 platters of the BIG device The logical platters must be extended format to take advantage of the space allocated in the BIGI disk file For an alternate way see Chapter 7 on the xAdmin utilities for other DO files that can initialize disk platters INTNEW ENTER a XPE s superior disk caching makes Extended Logical disks run at virtually the same speed as Traditional Logicals Once all the platters are initialized you can COPY or MTURES any data to the new disk file Normally start by coping DSKO to BIGO to create a bootable logical COPY BIGO DSKO AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 Chapter 4 AMOS Overview This chapter is a brief overview of the AMOS operating system The topics and procedures it discusses are o Installing the AMOS 8 x PIC code o Disk driver used by AMOS 8 x o System Device names and alternate booting o AMOS account organization for Server data o User names and how to log on to AMOS o The terminal keyboard and correcting typing errors o Streaming tape drives and capacities INSTALLING THE AMOS PIC FOR ADDITIONAL AMOS USERS To enable additional AMOS users a Product Installation Code PIC needs to be entered at the Operator Console This twenty digit code should be supplied by your VAR whe
124. a Ghosi image fil Ghost Advanced E LE Restore Ghost Lltilitizs Sc Restore your compuber rom a Ghost mags Mea E Wiew Log am Win This dracula eKalary of comemeied Cines bidba 8 symantec Norton G host 2002 Figure 6 14 Norton Ghost Main Menu When selecting the Backup option this will backup entire disk volumes to a file or to CD media Remember that this is an IMAGE backup of the hard disk If selecting CD media make sure you have enough CDs to complete the data transfer DVD R media has 4 7 GB of space and a standard CD R media has 700MB of space Ghost actually backs up more data to the media because it compresses the output file A typical CD R media may contain about 940 MB of disk data The DVD R media may contain close to 6 4 GB of disk data This will vary from system to system depending on the data itself Since Ghost runs from PC DOS it creates files of 2GB in size The Ghost program will span media and will ask the operator to insert the next CD if it cannot fit the backup onto one or more CDs If you use a USB Disk subsystem the whole backup can be placed on this type of drive The data transfer rate is a lot slower to the USB device Please label each CD with the DATE and the Series number 1 2 3 etc so that when restoring you feed the correct spanned media when Ghost asks for it We strongly suggest that you read and study the on line Ghost documentation You may access this by selecting Ghost Utilities in the a
125. a long file name to AMOS either use the XPE version of the name generally ending with 1 or change the file name in XPE before using FMDOS XDIR XPE pathname will display both the eight character file names and the long file names The optional amos filespec is the disk account and file name being copied to It defaults to the current account and the same name as the XPE file If the XPE file name has more than six characters refer to the information below for help If the destination file already exists FMDOS copies over it unless the NOD switch is included The NOD switch is described below The AMOS account where you want to put the file must already exist FMDOS cannot create accounts The options let you choose various FMDOS features Please Note Place a space before the that precedes the option Using any combination of the available options NOD If an AMOS file exists with same name as the file being copied do not delete it FMDOS overwrites the destination file name if the NOD switch is left off R Make the AMOS file a random access contiguous file This specifies how the file is arranged on the disk See the section Contiguous File Transfer earlier in this chapter To transfer a file from the C AM8000 directory into the current AMOS account and renaming is not necessary specify just the XPE file name Ifthe Protection violation error message appears the user is not logged into 1 2 during the copy to a
126. abled is not desired from the AMPCLiTE window Select gt Setting gt Keyboard Miscellaneous and uncheck the Metropolis Function Keys option Before saving this setting modify the terminal emulator and select one desired from the list Then this setup must be saved to disk From the AMPCLITE window for the session displayed Select Session Save As and the Save As window will appear With the mouse select the SessionX Aln file and double AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 Hints Restrictions amp Shortcuts Page 7 3 click Select the YES box with the mouse or press Enter Then the next time the system boots the new settings will always be applied to that VTM session If the settings are not saved the defaults will be used As in any multi tasking environment be careful not to run conflicting tasks on multiple virtual 7 terminals For example don t use one virtual terminal to run DSKANA to analyze the disk while another virtual terminal is editing a file on that disk or you may damage one or more files See Chapter 3 for more information on setting up virtual terminals and choosing the terminal emulations they use RE STARTING A VTM SESSION If the operator accidentally closes one of the virtual terminal sessions what do you do The operator can restart a closed virtual terminal session without rebooting the system Follow this procedure In the lt AMPCLITE windows Select Session and a pop down window should
127. age box before it executes the AM8000 EXE program When this is displayed on the system console if you press on the console keyboard the XPE software will execute the Windows Task Manger instead of AM8000 EXE If there is a problem with the system configuration you can fix it from the XPE software environment or execute the AM8000 Configuration program shortcut in the C AMS000 folder Once in the XPE environment you may update the EAMOS software or move copy or create AMOS disk files to the correct locations Sometimes a Hard disk or RAID subsystem will be added These devices must be initialized from the XPE environment first This process is accomplished AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 3 2 Chapter Three with XPE from the Select Control panel Administrative Tools Computer Management Storage Disk Management menu If you are familiar with Windows XP this is very easy to understand The files that are transferred into system memory when initializing AM8000 EXE are the Ethernet library the SCSI library and the embedded AMOS files The SCSI library will scan all SCSI busses to detect any SCSI devices The AM 113 XX board will be initialized with EAMOS MON and EAMOS INI Then AM8000 MON is loaded and executes the AM8000 INI 5 The Server is initialized with zen special file containing commands that define to the AMOS operating system all hardware and software programs needed from the booted envir
128. ages Be as specific as possible about the problem experienced the more information provided the easier it will be for the service technician to determine the reasons for any problems If any troubleshooting procedures were done let the person receiving the system know exactly what procedures were done and what the results were What s Included and What Else You Will Need Unpack the Server and peripherals and identify the following items o The software license and warranty cards o Documentation and System Manuals o Themain enclosure and AC power cord o LCD Monitor and AC power cord optional o Mouse and keyboard o AMOS 8 x Bootable CD In addition to the equipment Alpha Micro has provided and the operator console the following items are needed 1 Properly configured cables for connecting additional peripherals such as terminals modems and printers to the computer 2 The manufacturer s operator manuals for any terminals and printers 3 Ethernet Network Hub or Switch and Ethernet cabling for network connections 4 If the Server is set for 230 Volt AC you need a 230 Volt AC power cord with the correct plug for your geographical area Your local VAR may already have included this power cord with the Server if not contact the VAR for information on where to get it AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 Installation Page 2 3 RECORDING THE SSD IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Software Security Device SSD is a customized
129. ailable as well as warranty and service information o Chapter 2 has unpacking and Installation information for the Server It also contains information on choosing an installation site o Chapter 3 discusses the AM8000 Configuration program and its options o Chapter 4 is the AMOS overview o Chapter 5 highlights AMOS software application packages that are available for the Server To learn more about each subject we provide a list of Alpha Micro documentation that can be ordered AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 1 14 Chapter One O Chapter 6 System Administration mainly explains the AM8000 INI file changes and XPE administration details and Ghost backup procedures Chapter 7 gives Hints Restrictions and Shortcuts The minimum system configuration guidelines and general information on the use of the Servers is presented Some useful utility short cuts are also described Chapter 8 contains information on Preventive Maintenance for the Server Chapter 9 contains the diagnostic display codes which are active under AMOS 8 x Chapter 10 contains information on TODOS and FMDOS software Several appendices contain technical information including SCSI bus configuration details and instructions for serial cabling and installation The AM 113 info and AMOS INI examples are documented The AM 8000 and Eagle 800 Service Manuals contain additional information on opening and configuring the Server The service manuals are inte
130. ain Your particular terminal undoubtedly has many features we haven t covered in this section For complete information on using your terminal refer to the owner s manual that accompanied it STREAMING TAPE There are several 14 streaming tape drives available for the Servers the AM 629 AM 651 and AM 652 For information on transferring data to and from streaming tape see the System Commands Reference Manual For information on cleaning tape drive heads see Chapter 8 Backup to tape can be executed just like on any other Alpha Micro system using the MTUSAV program MTUDIR amp MTURES will work as on other systems Warm boot tapes are no longer supported under AMOS 8 x Servers The best performing tape drives are the AM 651 and AM 652 drives These drives have a wide LVD SCSI interface so the data transfer rate is high 20MB sec These drives contain an 8MB buffer for data so backups are very fast The wide SCSI tape drives are the preferred tape devices for the AM 8000 and Eagle 800 Systems For the Eagle 800 Server the SCSI disk interface board can support both single ended and wide devices Both connectors are available for use Normally the single ended AM 629 4 8GB tape drive is installed with a narrow cable Maximum data transfer is 1OMB sec When installing this drive make sure the Terminator SIPs are installed in the drive Optionally the AM 651 or AM 652 tape drives can be installed in the Eagle 800 system with a wide SCSI
131. al Ports Printers Network Scsi Devices Emulator Command Line Statt Mode AmpcLite AmpcLite exe p sessioni aln J Minimized VIM2 Ampclite AmpcLite AmpcLite exe p sessionZa Minimized vrM3 Ampclite WmpecLievAmpclite exe psession3 ain T Minimized vrM4 TmeGuPipe zl STrucGuiPipe TrucGuPipeexe 456 f Minimized viM amp l TC Miimied viM amp F Miimized VTMT VTM7 AmpeT erm v S amp mpcT erm s amp mpcT erm exe 4p Zt Minimized VTMS AmpcT erm s amp mpeT erm amp mpcT erm exe p zt v Minimized eg w Figure 3 6 Virtual Terminals Serial Ports Tab To define the PC serial ports for use by AMOS click on the Serial Ports tab Under XPE if a properly installed PC COM port is detected the port will show up in the left panel as in Figure 3 7 A red X indicates the port was not detected on the XPE side and is not mapped for AMOS use The detected ports must be mapped for use with AMOS by assigning them an AMOS COM port With the mouse drag the selected PC serial port on the left to the AMOS serial port desired on the right Please map them straight across for clarity AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 AM8000 Configuration Program Page 3 7 Note that when a PC serial port is mapped to an AMOS serial port a yellow double headed arrow replaces the green check or red X To un assign an AMOS serial port on the right simply drag the double headed arrow from the righ
132. and Select Next c Format Partition menu will display Only change the volume label to DataVolume no space with the keyboard d Select Perform a quick format is checked e Select Next f Select Finish Allow system to format the drive in NTFS Wait until Done Now close the Computer Management gt screen click on the X In the Explorer application Select D DataVolume and left double click AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Chapter Six Page 6 50 d In the white space in the right panel right click Select New Folder A highlighted rename box will display New Folder type over it with AM8000 Enter In the white space in the right panel right click Select New gt Folder A highlighted rename box will display New Folder type over it with Backups Enter 17 This completes this procedure Use your incremental backups to restore the D DataVolume This can be done with the Ghost Explorer to restore data AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 Chapter 7 MINIMUM SYSTEM CONFIGURATION INFORMATION Hints Restrictions amp Shortcuts The AMOS 8 x Server must have the following OO0O0000000 Keyboard mouse amp system console must be installed Always boots into the VTMI terminal as the console job Always boots from an AMD disk file One Hard Drive formatted in NTFS file system The Windows XPE kernel is installed on the first boot drive AM 1
133. another one If you relocate and want to learn the name and address of an Alpha Micro dealer near you please call Alpha Micro at 800 Buy Alpha 800 289 2574 or write us at the address inside the front cover For national field service at your location contact our authorized service provider Birmingham Data Systems at 800 968 0860 East Coast or 800 461 8410 West Coast AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Chapter2 Installation This chapter gives general installation information for the AMOS 8 x Servers It discusses the following topics o Unpacking the Server o Instructions for re shipping the Server o Recording the SSD identification number o Preparing a site for the Server o Verifying AC power requirements o Installing the operator console mouse and keyboard o Turning on the Server o Initially testing the Server o Booting AMOS 8 x o Installing Alpha Micro software o Turning off the Server o Expanding hardware capabilities Your Alpha Micro VAR can assist you with setting up expanding and servicing your Server UNPACKING GUIDELINES Unpack the Server and save all packing material and cartons in case the Server ever needs be to transport again The shipping material was carefully designed to provide optimum cushioning and protection When re shipping or otherwise transporting the Server the original packaging must be used to ensure safe shipment When moving the Server handle it gently The hard disk in the
134. any disk device for example DSKO Type LOG DSKO 1 2 If the user was not already logged into another account enter your user name after the LOG command If there s a password for this account you ll be asked for it too 3 Type SYSACT followed by the name of the device to add the accounts to For example SYSACT DSK1 4 SYSACT responds with its prompt symbol an asterisk To list all the program options type xH ENTER 5 The program options that can be performed are listed To add a new account type A and the account number to add and press ENTER For example A 100 5 ENTER 6 SYSACT responds Password SYSACT asks if a password is needed to protect the new account Enter a password of up to six characters A Z 0 9 or just press the key if no password is desired If the account has a password assigned whenever other users try to log into that account they must type in the password If the typed password is incorrect they aren t allowed to log in 7 To list all the account numbers on the disk device and their passwords select the L List function ENTER AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 6 4 Chapter Six 8 When finished using the SYSACT command select the E exit option to return to AMOS command level E For complete information on using the SYSACT command see the SYSACT reference sheet in the System Commands Reference Manual Using Virtual Terminals You will find virtual termi
135. are not familiar with Ghost please STOP here and call your vendor for help This software will wipe out all the data on the hard drive if you do not understand the functions of this program Please print out the PDF file from the Norton Ghost CD for further information See Chapter 6 for backup and restore procedures from Ghost Installing the software on the Server involves copying the latest system software image from the AMOS 8 x CD to the hard disk To install the system software from the CD to a new Server perform a Partition restore to the first logical of the first physical disk drive of the system The partition size is written for drive C on the left side of the CD label If the wrong number is used it may wipe out information on the second logical drive of the system Please refer to the service manual or chapter 6 for the complete restore procedure When the software load finishes eject the AMOS 8 x Bootable Recovery CD and the Server will restart and boot into AMOS The system should boot and display the ALPHA MICRO logo and the AMS000 EXE program should start the system initialization command file Expanding the AMOS 8 x Server Your Alpha Micro VAR can assist with setting up expanding or servicing the AMOS Server Once the Server is configured with the basic components additional subsystems may need to be installed Expanding the Server is easy Changes to the basic configuration to add more users printers and serial d
136. artitioned into two logicals The C SystemVolume is 4 15GB and contains the XPE software and utility programs such as Norton Ghost Ultra VNC or TightVNC Adobe 5 0 reader and the AMOS 8 x Operating System Software The E DataVolume drive is 12 94GB in size and is made available for the customer to create AMD disk files for their application programs Additionally the E drive has a Backup folder with an image of the C SystemVolume as shipped from Alpha Micro This file can be moved to other drives after the Server is installed It is provided as a restorable backup in case you damage the system software configuration This software configuration is also available on the AMOS 8 x Bootable Recovery CD provided with the system The AM 8000 Server s second SCSI bus can been configured to interface with any lower speed SCSI devices such as tape drives and other general purpose SCSI devices This bus exits the system at the top rear so that external SCSI devices can be attached Using the proper adapters you can attach both wide and narrow disk drives and tape drives to this second wide bus External RAID Subsystems may also be attached to this bus The RAID subsystem can also be made bootable with the customer data installed The external RAID can be configured as RAID Level 1 3 or 5 These RAID units are LVD SCSI 160 devices so plugging a single ended tape drive drops the transfer rate to 40MB sec We highly recommend that you install an AM652 tape
137. atch cord to connect any serial port on the AMOS Servers This adapter will handle just about any modem connected to either the RJ 45 serial ports or the PC COM ports The data signals are Modem TXD out to Server RXD in Server TXD data out to Modem RXD in Flow control is handled by RTS CTS connections Server hang up Modem control is DTR out to DTR input on the modem Modem status output DCD to DCD input on the Server M DB 25 modular adapter Direction Pin Color A A A ANM OM 5 4 3 6 2 7 8 1 A A A ANM VA Table A 4 Serial modem modular adapter AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 Connector Configurations Page A 7 Workstation Modular Adapters For RJ 45 connectors use the standard parallel RJ 45 patch cords to mate to the modular adapters defined below Female DB 9 connectors plug into the remote PC AT serial port Workstation Serial I O Server End Port Female DB 9 FDB 9 Connector SIGNAL PIN DIRECTION PIN SIGNAL Note Pins 1 6 and 8 on the workstation connector are jumpered together Table A 5 Pin out for Workstation to Computer Cable IBM PC AT and Compatibles Workstation Serial I O Server End Port Male DB 25 FDB 9 Connector SIGNAL PIN DIRECTION PIN SIGNAL Note Pins 5 6 and 8 on the workstation connector are jumpered together Table A 6 Pin out for Workstation to Computer Cable IBM PC XT and Compatibles AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page A 8 Appendix A
138. be the problem We recommend a low impedance power conditioner be used to filter out these power problems Alpha Micro offers a variety of appropriate approved power conditioners or UPS systems Ask your VAR for further details Several anti static sprays on the market can be of considerable help during days when static electricity is a problem Also using an air conditioner that controls humidity can greatly reduce a static electricity problem Power and Cable Connections Before selecting a site for the Server verify the site has adequately regulated AC power If you request it many power companies will install test equipment to determine if there is a need for additional line regulation Test the line voltage using a high speed line transient recorder If over several days of testing the line voltage varies more than 10 percent from the rated line voltage a power conditioner or UPS system may need to be installed and a new dedicated AC power circuit Alpha Micro Servers require a properly grounded power outlet for the system to run correctly A transient free or smooth and consistent power source and a properly installed earth ground can significantly improve the reliability of the system While the Server is in use it is important to maintain a constant line voltage free of power surges fluctuations and impulses Ideally a separate power circuit should be available for use only by the Server and the subsystems connected to it However
139. be used Using tapes b other than those recommended might result in excessive head wear Maximum Device Data Cartridge Capacity AM 629 DC6525 525MB DC9100 Magnus 1 0 1 0GB DC9120 Magnus 1 2 1 2GB DC9200 Magnus 2 0 2 0GB DC9250 Magnus 2 5 2 5GB SLR5 4 8 GB AM 651 SLRS read only 4 8 GB SLR7 20 40 GB AM 652 SLRS read only 4 8 GB SLR40 20 40 GB SLR50 25 50 GB SLR6O 30 60 GB Table 4 2 Supported 4 Streamer Data Cartridges AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 4 8 Chapter Four OTHER MOUNTABLE MEDIA The other types of mountable media for the AMOS 8 x Servers are CD DVD BluRay media The Eagle 800 can be equipped with either a CD RW or DVD RAM or BluRay drive The AM 8000 systems are equipped with a DVD RAM drive as standard Series 3 Am8000 come with BluRay multi media drive The CD RW drives will read CD ROM CD R CD RW media and write CD R amp CD RW media The DVD RAM drives will read CD ROM CD R CD RW DVD RAM DVD ROM DVD R and DVD RW media This drive will write to CD R CD RW DVD RAM DVD R and DVD RW media The BluRay drive will read all the above and BluRay media The AMOS 8 1 Bootable Recovery CDs provided with the Servers are normally written on CD R media The larger systems with RAID equipment come with the release written on a DVD R media One of the biggest improvements in AMOS Servers is the ability to use CDs When either drive type is installed the drive manufacturer has provide
140. ble from Alpha Micro and their part numbers and details are documented in the AM 359 product installation instructions For pin out and cable construction information refer to AM 359 8 Port Serial I O Installation Instructions PDI 00359 00 SERIAL ADAPTERS PC COM Port RS 232 DB 9 Connector Signals DWB 10317 25 4l For standard PC COM Ports or octopus cable set on PCI Serial interfaces use the b modular adapter below to convert from the Male DB 9 to an RJ 45 pin out that has the same signal pairing as the AM 359 ports that Alpha Micro has historically used The only difference is RJ45 pin 1 is not connected to any pin in the DB9 This cabling system uses twisted pair parallel patch cords between the Server end and the peripheral device The following table shows the signal to pin orientation applicable to each standard DB 9 serial I O connector Server End FDB9 RJ 45 pin Signal Pin Direction Pin Color Pair Table A 1 PC COM port MDB 9 Modular adapter connector Signals DWB 10317 25 Do not drive devices on PC COM ports longer than 100 feet Some COM ports do not drive the cable with full 12 volts Some COM ports only output 9V which can cause reliability problems AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page A 4 COM Port RS 232 DB 9 Connector Signals DWB 10317 30 Appendix A 4l For standard PC COM Ports or octopus cable set on PCI Serial interfaces use the b modular adapter below to convert from the Male DB 9 to an RJ
141. bove window Then select Norton Ghost User s Guide This will launch the Adobe Acrobat Reader If you have a network printer defined this document can then be printed The restore procedure is easy once you understand Disks Partitions Source and Destination devices This software does a complete image restore of the data that was backed up larger size the extended partition on the same physical drive gets written over This will destroy The drive size when performing a partition restore to the C drive is Critical If you type in a A the data on the E or D drive so be extremely careful and accurate The Ghost utility program is normally used to replace a bad system disk drive with a working copy of the AMOS 8 x software When adding another disk drive to the Server and you wish to make an exact AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 6 44 Chapter Six working copy of the AMOS 8 x software use the Clone tool under the Ghost Advanced heading Please read the Norton documentation for the specific details Ghost Backup Procedure This process will create a bootable DVD or CD disc with a restorable image of the AMOS Server s software This backup is a completely restorable image of the hard disk partition The administrator should create one whenever there have been changes to the Server s setup environment The AM 8000 System configuration should be fully tested and stable e The Ghost process is neither automated
142. cable and internal terminator The AM 652 will backup about 21GB hr The AM 629 will backup about 2 7GB hr AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 AMOS Software Applications Page 4 7 Loading and Unloading Tape Cartridges To avoid static discharge always ground yourself by touching the metal chassis before loading or AI H ys gr y y g g b unloading a tape cartridge Press the button on the drive s front panel to open the tape drive door 2 Hold the cartridge with the metal side down The end of the tape cartridge with the write protect switch will enter the drive first 3 Insert the cartridge into the drive Keep pushing until the cartridge stops and then close the door After the door closes the drive positions the tape after which it is ready for use With front loader drives the 65x models take the tape from the operator once it is installed about half way into the drive Before unloading the tape cartridge be sure the tape activity light is out To unload press the tape door release button and remove the tape from the drive On front loader drives press the eject button Tape Capacity The storage capacity of the tapes depends both on the drive installed and the type of tape cartridge being used The following table shows the different types of tape cartridges available and the corresponding capacity for the AM 629 AM 651 and AM 652 drives NI The tape drive manufacturer has specified which cartridge tapes that may
143. cal AM359 INI f E18SIO INI E18SIO INI System Start UP Normally for Eagle 800 Heil LOAD SYSMSG USA LOAD AMO000 0VR 1 4 LOAD TRMDEF LIT 1 4 SLEEP 4 TRMDEF VTM1 PCVTM 1 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 VER QUEUE 10000 TRMDEF VTM2 PCVTM 2 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 TRMDEF VTM3 PCVTM 3 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 TRMDEF VTM4 PCVTM 4 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 TRMDEF VTM5 PCVTM 5 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 am113 45 T T T T T T RMDEF SIO1 PCSIO 1 RMDEF SIO2 PCSIO 2 RMDEF SIO3 PCSIO 3 RMDEF SIO4 PCSIO 4 on motherboard RMDEF COM1 PCCOM 1 RMDEF COM2 PCCOM 2 cable A to USB1 8 PORT 19200 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 19200 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 or PCI board TRMDEF COM3 PCCOM 3 19200 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 TRMDEF COM4 PCCOM 4 19200 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 TRMDEF COM5 PCCOM 5 19200 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 TRMDEF COM6 PCCOM 6 19200 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 AMOS 8 x INI s TRMDEF COM7 PCCOM 7 19200 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 TRMDEF COM8 PCCOM 10 19200 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 TRMDEF COM9 PCCOM 11 19200 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 TRMDEF COM10 PCCOM 12 19200 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 8 PORT cable B to USB2
144. ces before and after an sign This one does not The options at the end of the FMDOS command line in either XPE or AMOS format allows optional command features The options for FMDOS are described in the FMDOS section NOTE Place a space before any option AMOS AND XPE FILE NAMES XPE file names may be very long but AMOS file names cannot be longer than six characters Take this difference into account when using FMDOS to copy files from XPE to AMOS Either assign a new name to the file copied or FMDOS will automatically truncate the names to six characters When a file name is truncated the three character extension which follows the file name in both XPE and AMOS is not affected WILDCARDS TODOS allows the use of and 1 Wildcards as part of the file name and extension in the XPE and AMOS file specifications FMDOS allow the use of these characters only in the XPE specification The replaces any number of characters in the file name or extension The stands for any one character Wildcards are not allowed in the XPE directory or AMOS device specification but you can use wildcards in the AMOS account specification e g 100 represents all disk accounts in project 100 For example TODOS C USER TXT 23 Transfers all AMOS TXT files in the accounts in project 23 on the current disk device to the XPE directory C USER using the AMOS file names For more information on the use of wildcards in AMOS fil
145. cked ii Verify that the Permit Only for TCP Ports is Checked ii Verify that the lt TCP Ports Window displays NO Port Numbers iv If ports exist under that column Select gt the port number and Click on the Remove button v Verify that the Permit Only for UDP Ports is Checked vi Verify that the lt UDP Ports gt Window displays NO Port Numbers vii If ports exist under that column Select the port number and Click on the Remove button viii Verify that the Permit Only for IP Ports is Checked ix Verify that the lt IP Ports gt Window displays NO Port Numbers x If ports exist under that column Select the port number and Click on the Remove button g As shown in Figure 6 11 the TCP IP Filtering application menu is configured for a complete firewall no ports allowed for TCP UDP and no IP protocols h For the lt TCP IP Filtering window gt Select gt OK button to apply these settings To exit out of Advanced TCP IP Setting gt Select gt OK button Ge To exit out of Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties Select OK button To exit out of Local Area Connection Select Close button 5 This completes the Firewall Enabled section If you made changes to the system settings the system will reboot If no changes were made you re done a AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 System Administration Page 6 37 6 Allow the system to re start Figure 6 11 Compl
146. command prompt o xCP Accesses the XPE Control Panel o xCMD Creates additional XPE routines o XTasks Accesses the XPE Task Manager o xEdit Edits XPE files with MSDOS Edit o xNoteP Edits XPE files using MS Notepad o XxAMD Handle the AMD configuration o InitM DSK Initialize raw AMD files can only be used from OPR o SysSN Get the system type and serial number o PDF Using local PDF files o XCLRLG Clear XPE log files and empty the Recycle Bin o Xerror Emails log files to support alphamicro com o UPDPAS Bat o PASUPD do These work together to provide and administrator password to the AM8000 configuration menu If you do not use this command then anyone that has access to the console can change the AM8000 configuration The password is stored in the Windows Registry o XBAKUP This new command allows the Customer to backup the AMD files to other Windows disks or other drive media AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 Chapter 8 Preventive Maintenance The AMOS Server requires little care However preventive maintenance is an integral part of keeping any Server running at peak efficiency To safeguard your investment we recommend you establish a regular maintenance schedule for the system Have your service technician check power supply voltages once a year to check the health of the system Keep a record of the readings for future comparison This can head off a power supply failure Use the main board CMOS hardware monitor to f
147. coprocessor on the System Diagnostics screen but it will Boot if the Server is NOT connected to the local network The common cause is The system is looking for a DHCP Server on the network which does not exist On the primary physical Ethernet interface there are two systems AMOS and XP Embedded Without a DHCP Server on the network XPE will hang the AM8000 EXE boot In the standard system configuration the XPE s Network Connection is set to Obtain an IP address automatically AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 Hints Restrictions amp Shortcuts Page 7 9 AMOS and Viruses AMOS 8 x uses Microsoft s XP Embedded XPE operating system for many supporting services including low level networking Previous versions of AMOS have been immune to network related viruses Many VARs have inquired as to whether AMOS 8 x is now subject to certain virus risks using Microsoft software The answer is a simple one Keep the configuration a purely AMOS system and AMOS 8 x remains as immune as all other AMOS systems have been Specifically AMOS 8 x uses the same AlphaTCP as other AMOS systems Any new network related virus weakness depends upon the Microsoft features we install and activate We only install and activate Microsoft XPE features needed to support AMOS 8 x There is no Microsoft Web Server no Microsoft E mail etc The XPE firewall configuration XPE includes a basic firewall This firewall has no effect on AMO
148. cters depends upon your initial system setup AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page B 2 Control Q Control R Appendix B When you press TEL WS described above to freeze the screen display you must press TEL WO to resume the screen display If you have typed anything while the Control S was in effect a Control Q tells AMOS it can now go ahead and act upon that input Try this Press TDL S then type DIR RETURN and then PRINT RETURN The commands aren t displayed on the screen and it appears that nothing happened Now press ETH WO to release the display and you see first a list of the files in your account printed on the screen then a display of the files waiting to print The command buffer is an area of memory where the computer stores commands that have been entered Pressing T L WC BT shows you what commands are in your command buffer If the line editor is installed on your computer you can use TDL WB to call up previous command lines make changes to them and then submit them again This is a great convenience if you want to enter a series of similar commands you can just keep making minor changes to one command and reusing it AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 Appendix C Console Function Keys Under AMOS Many Alpha Micro software packages such as AIphaWRITE and AlphaCALC contain function key translation files that let you use the function keys on your terminal to perform actions while u
149. ctions for many of the procedures used every day It expands on many of the topics discussed in Chapter 4 I Want To Learn How To Maintain My Server If you are going to be responsible for making data backups adding new PC s terminals or printers to the Server running disk diagnostics and otherwise managing and maintaining the Server we highly recommend you read the System Operator s Guide and obtain a copy of the System Commands Reference Manual and the System Operator s Guide to the System Initialization Command File The first manual explains how to perform the maintenance and diagnostic procedures required by the Alpha Micro system software The second book will prove an invaluable reference tool it contains short reference sheets on over 200 AMOS programs The third book describes how to change the system configuration by editing the AM8000 INI file Please refer to Appendix G for INIs used on AMOS 8 x Servers I Want To Write Computer Programs If you have programmed in BASIC before and want to learn how to use the AlphaBASIC programming language refer to the AlphaBASIC User s Manual Also refer to the AlphaBASIC PLUS User s Manual for information on the enhanced AlphaBASIC PLUS programming language If you are an experienced assembly language programmer who wants to write machine language programs for the Alpha Micro computer we recommend you read these books o Alpha Micro Instruction Set which contains information on the a
150. d packet writing software This is normally installed on all AMOS Servers You are thinking what can I do with this software Well you can use CD RW and DVD RW and DVD RAM media like a big Floppy disk AMD disk files can be copied to the CD for a permanent backup This task must be performed in the XPE Control panel Explorer Application Warning When performing the copy with the packet writing software and AMOS is booted system performance is impacted greatly This only happens when accessing the CD The analogy is if you are familiar with copying files to a floppy disk when other programs are running you see a slow sluggish response to the system The write to CD is no different The system is only about 1 3 as fast when no access to the CD is being performed Do not try to eject the media after a write for up to 5 minutes XPE posted writes are occurring so the media cannot be ejected Check the CD DVD access light on the front panel to see if the writes are still occurring Use the explorer application and right click and select eject after the writes have finished Since the new AMD files are readable while AMOS is booted the Console terminal VTM1 can select the XPE control panel task and copy the AMD files to CD as a backup The one restriction is not to have many users on the system during the copy When the system is finished writing select gt Eject from the Explorer application Label the media and save in a safe location The better
151. d to one of the 5 remaining AMOS device IDs This mapping must be done first before generating the disk driver A new disk driver must be generated for this older drive Log to DVR and create a driver with FIXLOG use SCZPC DVR as the input driver name Enter the number of logicals and the SCSI ID mapped in the screen above Save the new driver with a new name like SCZ DVR Then modify a TEST INI and add DEVTBL BITMAP SYSTEM amp MOUNT statements as with any other AMOS system Saving The Configuration After setting up all the configuration screens described in the previous section click on OK Then make sure to select EXIT from the lt File menu gt This action will write the new configuration for the system into the GE SSES on the hard disk 5 When you select the Exit the EEE next box you will see is the Confirm Quitting AM8000 box minal 5 Click on the Quit button HA VARMHBH Ni ninal 6 IL amta terminat amita terminal f has Outing 444308 val chua mri gl AH pagent m 58000 Shubdawn Socket request from 1327 Deag von thal all dats baw been deed 5 PI amnis terab amp ab 73 Bas AMTIS terminal B h Bas Socket request fren 777 J oo a Settiog job level far T ta 2 5etkimg job devel Far Ter yee ns Seren t a ammo OD Figure 3 14 Exit to Save the Configuration When you do select the Quit button the AM8000 Shutdown warning box will be displayed and the program will exit The Reboot
152. d voltage monitoring o Expansion slots for additional serial I O and other specialized functions o Two USB ports on the back Two USB ports on the front panel o CMOS BIOS setup for configuration and boot options AM 8000 Series II Multi Processor System Board The Multi Processor system board provides the AM 8000 with o One Opteron high speed processor 2 processor optional o SCSI controller with support for two Ultra 320 SCSI busses o Four SATA connectors for up to four SATA disk drives o Two Gigabit 1000 100 10 Mbps and Fast Ethernet 100 10 Mbps communication ports o Eight DDR DIMM sockets for support of up to 8GB of PC3200 Registered DDR RAM o Support for ATA 100 66 33 IDE and ATAPI devices o Two 9 pin serial I O ports with modem control AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 1 4 Chapter One One 25 pin SPP ECP EPP parallel port Integrated video graphics controller for system display console PS 2 keyboard and mouse ports CPU temperature and voltage monitoring Expansion slots for additional serial I O and other specialized functions Two USB ports on the back CMOS BIOS setup for configuration and boot options AM 8000 Series Multi Processor System Board The Multi Processor system board provides the AM 8000 with O O O Two Athlon MP high speed processors SCSI controller with support for two Ultra 320 SCSI busses Gigabit 1000 100 10 Mbps and Fast Ethernet 100 10 Mbps communication ports Fou
153. display 8 boxes The second from the bottom will list all the SessionX Aln files in use or that have been used Using the mouse Select gt Session1 which was disconnected and double click to restart the VTM1 session This should restart the session without having to reboot AMOS UNSAFE DISCONNECT Some users may wish to enable the Unsafe Disconnect option of the terminal emulator This will inhibit anyone from disconnecting the VTMI terminal accidentally Follow the procedure below to enable this feature for both terminal emulators To enable this feature from the AMPCLITE window Select Settings Terminal Safe Disconnect Then check the Enable Safe Connection Warning Then check the Disable unsafe disconnect For the Safe String Enter admin For the Unsafe Disconnect Warning Message fill in VTMI Cannot be terminated Select gt OK Then Select gt Session program option for the terminal emulator and Save Session1 Aln Terminal Options EE xl This will write these settings to the disk Connection Terminal Type Safe Disconnect Seconday Pat For further information on this Click on Safe Dixconpart Help from the AMPCLITE screen E Enable Sate Connection Warming v Disable ursade disconnect Sere Conia C on deconnect Sele Shing Les Sale Acer n Sale Couri h Linsafe Diconnect A unma Message j THI Cannot be eene r uia Daconnact Disconnect if the following ating is recemed from the host po
154. drive that has a LVD compatible interface to take advantage of the SCSI 160MB Sec speed In the AM 8000 Servers the number of devices you can attach to the SCSI bus can be limited by three factors the legal number of SCSI IDs cabling limitations total length and device spacing and the number of drive bays available in the chassis See Appendix E SCSI Configuration Details for further information regarding SCSI bus considerations The Series III Am8000 has a high speed 73GB SAS hard drive This is partitioned with a SASBoot C volume size of 7569Mb and the D DataVolume is 62432Mb in size This system model can use SCSI or SATA or SAS Raid systems connected to PCI X internal controllers The D DataVol has GhostBackup folder with the VolC system software backup The AM8000 folder is used for customer AMD files The AMOSBackups folder has the AM8000 system software release The Series I Eagle 800 Server comes standard with a 40GB IDE 133 Drive This drive is partitioned into two logical drives The C SystemVolume is 4 8GB and contains the XPE software and utility programs such as Norton Ghost UltraVNC Adobe 5 0 reader and the AMOS 8 x Operating System Software The D DataVolume drive is 34GB in size and is made available for the customer to create an AMD disk files for their operating application programs Additionally this volume contains a Backup folder with an image backup of the C SystemVolume as shipped from Alpha Micro The Seri
155. e 32 epe eed ede ete Ul E eMe duet F 2 Boot Initialization File Name 2i eee eerte rettet dicente ee ite vied GE F 2 Serial Port O Speed wisi sive mesa aede e ede i ete sen inn dena F 2 Display Console Boot Messages etri ece teet idet ete e ete bel ea esed eoa i ENNEN esae F 2 Memory Size Refresh 52 3 3 0 diete aou ipte car eet dp Nahas ae eats F 2 SAVING THE CMOS SETTINGS tator oet tret e tette Eee etre e tei ett ee ee er ete tene F 2 AMOS 8 X AND EMBEDDED AMOS esee nnne E nennen tnnt ene en F 3 CPUPIC Procedures 2 2 eit tet ees toed e eerte xe tee et eee Ee pete Pee bd tee F 4 Modify the EAMOS INE geit h lle e roe Debe oen or ede Ee F 4 CPU PIC Entry x iter n eerte e irt re tert ar obere eed RUE e echar uud F 4 After CPUPIC is Accepted Clean UP and Hide VTMS esee F 5 AM 113 XX COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATRMENT cerent F 6 APPENDIX G AMOS 8 X INI S siccccitessncssisassonsseciustesvncscutensausessenstesstondeudveuosseapeoaoceussscasoostonteusneesbe G 1 AMSAPFEBBOOQOT INLI rne tet ere tod esta etie ENEE G 1 AM S000 INT ia tcc creates tees Ha ieee e hoe ec a peo e A eee Ane ae a G 1 AM359 e LEE G 4 ETSSIO INI 0 ieri es ettet dci es bs eee d MS toate Aes ite tod caen G 10 APPENDIXH IDE INTERNAL RAID OPTION DETAILS eeeeeee cesse eee n etna tntnann H 1 INTERNALEIDER AID e tht hee te RHEIN Hee Hte ete pert o Ere eese H 1 RAID INSTALLATION AND CONFI
156. e The generation of the AMD file requires 10096 of the CPU time Do not have AMOS 8 x booted during this process When finished the system will clear the Step 4 menu off the screen and will show the new file name filled in the input box as shown in Figure 3 20 Select OK to save this new setup to memory The next step is to Select gt File gt Exit then Quit from the lt AM8000 Diagnostic window to write this new information into the system registry You must Quit the program in order to save the settings AM8000 Configuration ixl General Amos Disks Virtual Terminals Sena Ports Printers Network Sosi Devices Amos Disk PC Data File Amos System BEIM Caamsooowms000 AMD Browse _ Create Disk Subsystem sus CAM8000AM8kSub AMD Browse Create Disk Subsystem oLD JEMAMs000 0LD AMD i Browse Create Disk Subsystem BIG E AMs0008IG1AMD Browse Create DiskSubsystem Browse Create Disk Subsystem Browse Create Disk Subsystem Ur Browse Create Disk Subsystem Browse Create Disk Subsystem 1 Browse create Disk Subsystem urb co4M8000Dec2004amd o Browse Create Figure 3 20 AMOS Disks Defined AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 AM8000 Configuration Program Page 3 19 Once this is done you can inspect the location of the new AMD disk file If you select the control panel and browse to the E drive
157. e System Operator s VTMI job all the memory not specifically assigned to other jobs If you want to increase the amount of memory assigned to the VTM1 job the operator console you need to subtract memory from the SMEM statement The SMEM size is about 100MB or increases the RAM size in MB parameter in the lt AM8000 Configure Menu 4 Save the TEST INI file and exit AlphaVUE Then perform a test reboot by running MONTST as described earlier in this chapter You can then use the STAT or SYSTAT command to see how much memory is assigned to each job MODIFYING PRE CONFIGURED NETWORK CONFIGURATION FILES AMOS 8 x comes configured for network operation but the network parameters must be modified for your specific network Before booting a network enabling configuration make the following changes to the network configuration files contained in the TCP account i Depending upon your complete network configuration other AMOS files may need to be Sa updated in addition to the files listed below Please Consult the AMOS TCP documentation for additional details 1 All AMOS 8 x Servers use the ETH101 NIN file to enable both AlphaNET and AlphaTCP to function This is called out in the AM8000 INI file with the NETINI statement The Ethernet driver is a simple packet driver called PCNDV NDV The following statement is incorporated into the AM8000 INI command file to configure your Ethernet hardware for all models of the AMOS 8 x Servers NETINI
158. e Wide SCSI bus Alpha Micro offers this cable in both three foot and six foot lengths PDB 00440 80 and PDB 00440 81 2 Plug the narrow active external terminator PRA 00222 21 into the unused SCSI I O port of the external device This terminates the low half of the SCSI bus AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page E 4 Appendix E Notice that in this configuration the Wide SCSI active external terminator PRA 00222 20 which is normally plugged into the external SCSI port is not used SCSI DISPATCHER SOFTWARE AMOS 8 x includes a SCSI dispatcher which controls all SCSI devices in the system The SCSI dispatcher is set up in the system initialization command file The following AMOS 8 x specific command is added to the INI file after the JOBALC statements but before the first DEVTBL statement SCZDSP SCZPC SYS required AM 8000 RACK MOUNT CHASSIS CONSIDERATIONS In the Rack Mount chassis available for AM 8000 Servers the second SCSI bus has a different internal cable than the Deskside chassis for the second channel This cable will mount to the rear panel connect to the SCSI Channel B and then continue up into the drive mounting area of the chassis where it will end with an Internal SCSI 320 terminator VERY IMPORTANT You must deactivate the on board SCSI Controller Termination as follows 1 Power up the system and during the system POST when it displays the Adaptec Controller self test Type Ctr T on the c
159. e 20 more blank ersatz slots MSGINI 100K NETINI ETH101 NIN Ethernet network for AMOS 8 0 NETINI SEROO2 NIN optional serial network 2 SYSTEM SYSMSG USA SYSTEM AMSORT SYS SYSTE ISAM SYS SYSTE ISAMP SYS SYSTEM CMDLIN SYS SYSTEM DVR TRM DVR SYSTEM DVR MEM DVR SYSTEM DVR RES DVR SYSTEM DVR ACD DVR SYSTEM DVR STR DVR SYSTEM DVR DVD DVR SYSTEM DVR DBD DVR AMD pseudo disk drivers are copies of PCDSK DVR SYSTEM DVR NEW DVR AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 AMOS 8 x INI s Page G 3 SYSTEM DVR BIG DVR SYSTEM DVR SUB DVR SYSTEM DVR UPD DVR for UPDates Only use dcache for AMOS formatted disk drives not necessary for AMD files SYSTEM DCACHE SYS N M U 2000K For AMOS formatted drives mer mr use FixLog with SCZPC DVR to create the SCZ driver SYSTEM DVR SCZ DVR for AMOS formatted drive 7 Other program loads SYSTEM RPC SYS N SYSTEM RPCLOD LIT SYSTEM SYS RUN LIT SYSTEM SYS ORUN LIT SYSTEM BAS FLOCK SBR TCP stuff SYSTEM TCP IPCINI N 200 200K SYSTE TCP FTPD LIT SYSTE TCP FTPD RTI SYSTEM RTI LIT SYSTEM DVR TLP DVR SYSTEM TCP LPR LIT SYSTEM TCP LPR RTI SYSTE TCP TAMED LIT SYSTE TCP TAMED RTI SYSTE TCP TELNED LIT SYSTE TCP TELNED RTI SYSTE SMEM 120M Increase for more telnet jobs LOG DEMO SET HEX SET DSKERR MOUNT DSK MOUNT SUB MOUNT BIG SET N
160. e 4 ways DVD RAM media can be used on the new AMOS 8 x Servers 1 Using the media from the XPE side with FAT32 or UDF 2 Use the packet writing software on the XPE side 3 Use MAKDVD to create DVDx backup logicals from AMOS 4 Use FMTDVD from AMOS to create multiple identical sized logicals The XPE Side Before using a new DVD RAM media for the first time it must be formatted To use the DVD RAM media only from the XPE environment format the media as FAT32 or UDF so that the XPE OS and programs may access it Some media vendors format the DVD RAM media in UDF 1 5 format This media can be used with the Packet writing software for data backups To format media in FAT32 format follow the steps below to initialize a DVD RAM media The System Administrator must perform this function on the main system console AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 6 22 Chapter Six These steps erase any data already on the media Make sure the media does not contain files you need before formatting The Administrator can access the correct tool by selecting in the lt AM8000 System diagnostic window Select Tools Control Panel By using the Control Panel with the mouse Select Folders find the DVD device in the left panel and right click on it Next from the popup menu Select FORMAT Select FAT32 format type and a name for this volume like DVD RAM1 and Select OK The XPE utility will format the media in FAT32
161. e for that specific process such as the printer model application location etc Here we have used different names for each of these logical links so that you can better understand the interdependencies and troubleshoot any problems In the above example the names in lower case are arbitrary but must match other specific names The SPOOL2 must match a JOBALC statement DUMMY in SETJOB must match DUMMY in the TRMDEF statement and LETTER PIN must be the name of the printer initialization file for this printer referred to in the last line above See your AMOS System Operator s Guide for a description of A Before using a printer create a PIN printer initialization file This is the LETTER PIN file this file which tells AMOS the characteristics of your printer Create the necessary printer initialization file PIN using VUE Here is a sample LETTER PIN file ICE TRM LPT2 E PRINT1 AULT FALSE RATOR JOB1 FEED TRUE MS NORMAL BANNER FALSE HEADER FALSE Lr LT mothe c ei 6 WIDTH 80 The DEVICE TRM LPT2 is the connection to the TRMDEF for the printer either the XPE printer or a TRMDEF for a serial printer After booting the TEST INI file with the spooler added test the spooler installation with the command PRINT PRINT1 TEST INI ADDING JOBS When the administrator increases the number of terminals connected to t
162. e read the on line documentation for the B sClip software package T OPERATOR NOTE The Server is impacted by the format and writing to CD RW or AMOS and MAKDVD The MAKDVD program copies complete logical AMOS disk drives onto the DVD media in a format that is compatible with the DVD program A DVD media can contain approximately 4 7 gigabytes of data MAKDVD program will copy AMOS files and the directory structure to the DVD RAM media This software package is our first choice to be used under AMOS 8 0 A big advantage with the MAKDVD software is different sized disk platters can be written to the DVD RAM media in the same pass So if the DSKO to DSK5 platters are 80MB and SUBO is 32MB all these platters can be written in one pass The only disadvantage in this example is the resulting DVD6 is padded with nulls to equal 80MB in size The last logical for the original 32MB disk is only readable not re writeable with the DVD program A SYSTAT will show that DVD6 is Bitmap Kaput because of the padded nulls AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 System Administration Page 6 23 The backup can contain one or many disk platters up to the media capacity of 4 7GB DVD RAM media is used as the backup media using the MAKDVD program Label your disk platters with a description of the device and data contained This label description is written to the DVD media along with the full disk logical being backed up This process if fairly fast The MAKDV
163. e specifications see the AMOS User s Guide AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 TODOS amp FMDOS Page 10 3 SENDING FILES TO XPE FROM AMOS TODOS TODOS copies files from AMOS to XPE Use either of these formats for TODOS TODOS XPE pathname amos filespec amos filespeoc Or TODOS amos filespec amos filespec XPE pathname amos filespec is the name of the file to be copied to XPE Leaving out part or all of the file specification it defaults to the current disk and account and all files As shown multiple specifications can be entered separating them with commas The optional XPE pathname is the file name and directory to copy the file to The default is the C AM8000 directory because this is where AMOS 8 x boots from Al TODOS understands only XPE 8 3 file names not long file names The destination file name w entered must be eight characters or less with a three or less character extension If the destination file already exists in the XPE folder TODOS overwrites it with the file being copied Be careful not to accidentally overwrite existing files when using TODOS Here are a few examples of TODOS To send a file from the current AMOS account to the C AM8000 folder and renaming is not needed enter only the AMOS file name TODOS PAYROL DAT To send the file to another directory and give the file a different name on the XPE side specify something like this TODOS C NUSER
164. e still accessible if a new disk driver is generated using FIXLOG Use SCZPC DVR as the input driver specify the number of logicals and the mapped SCSI ID give the driver a name Save the resulting driver in the DVR account DISK ACCOUNTS Disk accounts are an organizational feature the Alpha Micro Server uses to help keep track of data Instead of searching through one enormous list of files for the specific one you re looking for the AMOS operating system is designed to group files into accounts also know as Project Programmer numbers P PN A two part account number identifies accounts The two numbers are separated by a comma and enclosed in brackets The first number is called the project number the second part the programmer number 1 2 200 0 and 34 11 are examples of account numbers Since they are actually octal numbers the digits 8 and 9 aren t used and the highest possible number is 377 376 and the lowest is 0 1 The two part structure of the account number allows another level of organization Besides grouping files into accounts group related accounts in the same project For example all accounts containing files dealing with payroll can be in project 50 50 0 50 1 etc Accounts are called disk accounts because each account is specific to a particular device usually a disk For example you may have the account 63 1 on both DSKO and DSK1 Though these accounts have the same account number since the
165. e text files in the XPE environment Norton Ghost is a backup and restore utility for disk volumes The Task Manager is the XPE program that provides information about programs and processes running on the Server It is also the gateway to the performance monitor The performance monitor is useful occasionally but does slow down the system so we advise against using this feature The operator can load multiple programs and use the keyboard command to select the correct task USING MULTIPLE VIRTUAL TERMINALS You will find virtual terminals on the console very easy to use Switching from one virtual terminal to any other is just like switching from one Window to another As you switch from one virtual terminal to another the processing continues for the task running on the virtual terminal you left When using AMPCLITE to switch VTM jobs press Control Tab on the console keyboard or use the mouse to click on the terminal session if the tiled display option is used To select full screen click on the full screen box in the upper right hand corner of the VTM session Or with the mouse place the cursor over the window header and double click When using AMPCTerm press Alt Tab to select the correct V TM job Many systems have been shipped with the Metropolis function keys enabled for AMPCLITE This will cause some function keys such as Page up Page down Insert and Delete to not send the expected codes to AMOS If Metropolis function keys en
166. ed Data Sources odbc has not been tested and may not function Mail not allowed on the system for virus protection Game Controllers Do not use Sound and Audio Devices Do not use this program Sound and the audio drivers degrade the system response so they should not be used or are disabled Scanners and cameras This function is not supported under AMOS 8 x o Taskbar and Start Menu Not supported There is no desktop or start menu OO O O O Administrative Tools Overview The lt Administrative tools gt application is used to defragment disk drives clean up the event logs and add delete or restart Services Use this tool to add and format new disk drives or RAID controlled subsystems These programs are only used once in a while by the System Administrator and are not for the general AMOS user These programs will only run on the Console terminal To add network printers to the Server double click on the Printers and Faxes item to accomplish this task Clear Application and System Logs The Administrator should clear the Event Logs with the Event Viewer for the Application and the System about once a month This will keep the size of the logs down to about 65k each These logs keep growing because certain XPE functions that Alpha Micro has disabled may log an entry From the Computer Management application Select Event Viewer Select Application and right click Select Clear all Events This is
167. ed for originally the data on the D DataVolume drive will get written over Doing a Disk Restore will also delete the data on the D DataVolume if the drive was already partitioned For an empty drive you must do a Disk restore to correctly write the boot sector and drive partition table on the drive to make it bootable Power system up place the Bootable CD in the drive and boot the system from the CD DVD drive The Console Screen will display lt Press any key to BOOT from CD DVD gt Press 3 The first screen displayed is About Norton Ghost will ask for OK Press Note Anything that is highlighted in White is the command that is selected 4 Inthe Symantec menu is selecting LOCAL Press i 5 The Action menu DISK is highlighted Selecting DISK will overwrite all partitions on the Drive selected Either Press to select Partition or Press for Disk a If selecting a Disk Restore in the Disk menu Press I4 twice to select From Image then press b If selecting a Partition Restore Press to select the Partition menu Press twice to select From Image then press ENTER 6 Image file Name to Restore from menu a Type to select lt Look in gt lt A gt press b Now a pull down menu shows all drives We must select the 0 CD R drive or press to select the DataVolume which contains an image save of the C System Volume Press L4 to select GhostBackups and press ENTER The filename of the C volume will have a
168. eeded by the user Screen or box Title or Application Program top line gt Selected item action for you to do keyboard input keyboard key or lt Selected item gt mouse Select gt menu item lt Menu gt action key press or lt Menu gt Select gt menu item scroll box with mouse left click Radio Button mouse Select or Action notes and choices Select program option or Select Title menul menu2 gt menu3 gt program option To select the last program option you need to make multiple left button selects with the mouse of each menu number to reach the correct program selection BOOTING THE AMOS 8 X SERVER Booting is the process the system goes through whenever the power is turned on or the reset button is pressed The main CPU board goes through a POST the SCSI devices are scanned and the CMOS settings are displayed The CPU reads from the CMOS to find the selected order of the boot devices Then the CPU loads from the first listed hard drive the operating system into RAM and executes its instructions The first program set loaded into memory is the XPE software and drivers The XPE software also loads configuration information about the specific hardware and other software drivers allowing AMOS to access these resources Once loaded the AlphaShell program takes over and executes the AM8000 EXE program which is the AMOS 8 x operating system The AlphaShell program displays a 5 second count down mess
169. een by Select X The RAID does not have a Boot Sector or an XPE operating system on it To load the XPE OS with a correct boot sector onto the RAID Alpha Micro has a special AMOS 8 x Bootable Recovery CD with an Image of this configuration To load this configuration place this CD into the DVD RAM drive and restart the system with Norton Ghost From the Ghost menu restore the RAID Image from the CD DVD to the RAID subsystem as a DISK RESTORE Once this is done reboot the Server The RAID system should have an XPE Operating System on it with a bootable AMD disk file You may erase the standard AMD disk file after generating your own AMD disk file Make the disk file as large as you want In our example we made the NEW AMD disk as 12 logicals and 2650MB in size This left a few GB of storage for the XPE system software Once you have the XPE operating system with the AM8000 folder containing all of AMOS 8 x support programs inside to make the RAID the Boot Volume follow this procedure 1 Shutdown the Server and Restart AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 System Administration Page 6 33 por d During the POST press the F2 key on the AM8000 Series I system console The BIOS window should display a Press to select Exit Press to select Boot press ENTER In the lt Boot Select Menu gt for AM8000 Series I you should see CD ROM Drive Hard Drive Removable Devices Press to select Hard Drive and press
170. equal to or less than the number in the JOBS statement above Define the terminals that will be attached to these jobs The TRMDEF statement defines the terminal characteristics and tells the Server which port on the back panel it s connected to Add any new TRMDEF statements after the last TRMDEF statement in the file Here is a sample TRMDEF statement TRMDEF TRM2 PCSIO 1 19200 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 15 Using this sample here is the information about the terminal o TRM72 is the terminal name Use any name containing six or fewer letters and or numbers Each terminal must have a different name o The next word is the Interface Driver IDV which has 4 different possible drivers which can be used with AMOS 8 x o PCSIO is the name of the interface driver for the AM 113 xx multi function controller the terminal 1s connected to The PCSIO interface driver 1s embedded in the AMOS monitor The ports on the AM 113 xx board are numbered 1 to 4 The ports on the AM 359 boards are numbered 5 to 174 octal o PCVTM interface driver is used for Virtual terminals ports 1 to 10 octal This interface driver 1s embedded in the AMOS monitor o PCCOM interface driver is used for PC COM ports 1 to 22 octal This interface driver is embedded in the AMOS monitor PCLPT has been discussed in the printer s section above 1 is the octal number of the port the terminal is attached to Each terminal must be connected to a unique port 19200
171. er Management em E gis System Tools GOInformation 3 13 2004 4 31 20 Service Control Ma El a Event Viewer GO information 3 13 2004 4 31 20 Service Control Ma Nor E Application Information 3 13 2004 4 31 20 Service Control Ma Nor x Control Ma Nor Event Viewer E Lg Shared Folde Control Ma Nor Control Ma Mor mS Local users 27 Do you want to save System before clearing it b Control Ma Nor E Zi Performance Control Ma Nor 89 Device Mana E f Storage Control Ma Nor Control Ma Nor E Removable Pn 2 753 Disk Defragmenter E Information 3 13 2004 12g ES cm sbes Nor 8 Mi DidcMtanatement Infor mation 3 13 2004 4 29 37 Application Popup Nor nad GO Information 3 13 2004 4 28 37 Application Popup Nor D n Services and Applications Warning 3 13 2004 4 29 43 Server Nor Warning 3 13 2004 4 20 43 Server Nor D information 3 13 2004 4 29 40 eventlog Nor 3 mfnrmatian 3 13 20n4 4 70 4N eventina Nor jla gt EE EE Figure 6 5 Computer Management Event Viewer Select No save of the system logs To execute this function Select No button Other Administrative Tools lie arisunestratrve Fein When adding disk drives to the system you must Ple ft Ven pop Tode Heb format and allocate these as storage volumes to XPE tet ER Iesel rations Ie en To perform this task Select Administrative Tools 4 9 d E
172. es III Eagle 800 Server has a 160GB SATA 300 drive standard This drive is partitioned into two logical drives The C System Volume is 7577Mb and the D DataVol is 145047Mb On the D DataVol you have GhostBackup folder for Ghost Backup files AM8000 folder for AMD files and AMOSBackups folder for a backup of the AM8000 software release All AMOS 8 x Servers only boot from AMD pseudo disk files This will be detailed in Chapter 3 All Eagle 800 Servers have the option for a SCSI interface controller normally used to provide a SCSI bus for an internally mounted streaming tape drive This controller also has two SCSI busses The AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 1 8 Chapter One second bus is available externally through the rear panel for external SCSI devices through a VHDCI connector An internally mounted IDE RAID system is optionally available for customer requirements This unit takes up two 5 drive bays in the chassis The RAID is a Level 1 mirror RAID device The standard internal disk drive is moved from the lower drive bay into the first drive tray of the RAID system Then flip the front panel switch from Single to Default and the RAID 1 controller does the rest It will mirror the first drive to the second drive in about two hours for a 40GB drive This provides a complete drive backup at all times If one of the drives fails the controller switches to the second drive and continues to run It creates an audible a
173. es enean aetas sensn aeta ao 3 1 BOOTING THE AMOS 8 X SERV PR tede tree e eite e ere e RE yet teen 3 1 Switching Between AMOS and SPD 3 3 CONFIGURING AM8000 AND EAGLE 800 SERVERS esee 3 3 The General lab seis he Ret Hp ette etel qtio ee Gee ei ead piis esee e die eens 3 3 AMOS Disks Tabi eres roe Ee ier iu Noe tee e ete E e net A E e cedes 3 4 Virtual Terminals Tab eee e e n e er ERR RENS IEEE PIE sade seas 3 5 Seral Ports KC 3 6 Printers KEE 3 9 heroes ege teritur ec eo ae ehe e EE e ree e E aee rre ege qe 3 10 SCSI DEVICES Ir c PEDES 3 12 Saving l he Configu ration hie ettet eet ENEE ee e ee A ce Eo dte gode 3 13 System E EE 3 14 Other AM8000 Information and Tools 3 14 The System Control Panel 4 1 net ee EHE OL Ree ge ciet needed 3 15 AMD DISKS AND OTHER HARD DRIVES esee en rennen 3 15 AMD Pseudo AMOS Ian He UR T RE oet dr Ege Lie e IL dde 3 15 Other Hard Drives idee rrt me eof tte tere bes dates rove dee ete e cie Pe Rivet 3 16 AMD FILE CREATTION doge norit ee t er Eee bees Fes eet eet taion ge te ote ng 3 16 How to create a new AMD disk file n i oie naie EE EEE EEE testen 3 16 Modifying the TEST INI amp Initialize the new Pseudo disk file eeeeeeeese 3 19 CHAPTER 4 AMOS OVERVIEW eeeeee eese enses sna tn seta sons tosta sesso seta sees sns s etos e es sons ense essen sense 4 1 INSTALLING THE AMOS PIC FOR AD
174. essor System Board 1 4 Eaele 800 Server System Bond zue eR ad I e ae estas 1 4 Eagle 800 Series II Server System Board 1 5 AM 113 xx Multi function VO Board 1 6 MEMO MP 1 6 Disk Configurations SERERE ege Dae deis 1 6 Seriabl O Gapabllibys EE 1 8 Parallel Printer Pott ensi centies en teret ERU ede e steer etie iesus 1 9 Network Hardware einer 6 en ete et len eter Ee E tpe o Ebor ope ree on are beetle 1 9 System Console amp Diagnostic Status Display eese 1 9 Real Time Clock I eee tt ep eite P peace ens duces tee 1 9 Rear l O Panel tei eer EE pr pot sheen LE DECR EE 1 10 Add On oa ona n T 1 10 SOPTWARE FEATURES eege EE EE EA 1 10 SoftWare Coripatibility EE 1 11 What IsHidden ninem Eeer eegene DENGE Au 1 13 ABOUT THIS EK LEE EE 1 13 Graphics Conventions and Definitions esee nene ener nre nennen nnne 1 14 Text Conventions and Definitions enen eieiei eieiei ener ener E ERE nne 1 15 SERVICE INFORMATION ege eet oae biel ree eoe e ege Ee Let R de 1 15 Post Sales Suppott EE 1 15 For Further ASSISCances stupeo qe eei RE ien 1 15 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION siiccscsiscstencsscsalestundesepsttinsctesssocsdonssnncusssisvs usnscsvscousecsaoonsdnceasuagoousaes 2 1 UNPACKING GUIDELINES Ide Rete deae eaae 2 1 Reporting Shipping Dairnage nae etre t del eee eret ENEE ENEE 2 1 Instructions for Reshipping the Server 2 2 What s Included and What Else You Will Need A 2 2 RECORDING
175. estore Please refer to the MAKDVD documentation for more information The DVD RAM media may be formatted in Fat32 or UDF and used as an alternate disk drive for XPE storage This media has a longer life than all other media type described but still has a limited life DVD AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 System Administration Page 6 21 RAM media formatted in UDF is useable with AMOS to store AMD files and is faster to update than the MAKDVD format RAID Level 1 is an on line mirrored backup of the system data Normally the 40GB drive system has two physical 40GB drives installed The second drive is a Mirror copy of the first Alpha Microsystems can provide a SCSI 160 RAID system for the AM 8000 Servers and an IDE version for the Eagle 800 Servers The drive trays can be removed and another hard drive of like size installed Once installed the IDE Level 1 RAID controller does the rest to mirror the first drive in the system This gives the administrator a hard disk backup of whole system XPE and AMOS A 40GB drive takes 2 hours to mirror and slows down the operating disk response if booted from the RAID by 30 during the rebuild process Once finished with the mirror task the speed penalty disappears The IDE RAID system can also be used as a backup device to internal SCSI drives on the AM 8000 system This device can also be made the alternate boot device There is no down time with RAID Level 1 and no system restarts other than Administra
176. ete Firewall Enabled Network Firewall Changes to Enable Remote Access The standard settings as shipped from Alpha Micro for all AMOS 8 x Servers is a complete Firewall No ports are allowed through Do not allow any folders to be Shared on the AMOS 8 x Servers Keeping the system folders not shared will keep peer to peer viruses off the system Having said this let s first discuss what port numbers are needed to allow different access to the XPE side The list below is a portion of the Services file in the Windows directory and shows some ports and their descriptions which we may need to use j lon Area Comnection z PF Internet Protecel TCP IP P EE Genemi Abe mate Configuration iP Settings DS WINS Options reus can get IP setting maig than Ckeseeg your the sporopaate ID settings fs Diar ars F addii aul Use tha follwing IP aside Fairs B utet mail Dx n Asien H wll Ur m DNE P Den tha fading DNS s Trierer Control Pretec A E mida een meter proincol tt Presented HS veer moras cheese ini emconnecter Akerin ORS merae domain 53 tcp Domain Name Server domain 53 udp Domain Name Server epmap 135 tcp loc srv DCE endpoint resolution epmap 135 udp loc srv DCE endpoint resolution netbios ns 137 tcp nbname NETBIOS Name Service netbios ns 137 udp nbname NETBIOS Name Service name lookup netbios dgm 138 udp nbdatagram NETBIOS Datagram Service network browsing netbios ss
177. evices or change memory allocations are accomplished in two steps AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 Installation Page 2 11 Step one for adding new hardware involves changing the AM 8000 Configuration Step two is to make the changes to the System Initialization Command File to define the new hardware Changing the allocation of system resources also requires changing the system initialization file For information on modifying this file refer to the System Operator s Guide to the System Initialization Command File Please read that document carefully Modifying the system initialization command file without S understanding its elements is dangerous A serious mistake could damage the file and leave the Server unable to boot from the defined System Disk Instead of modifying the file directly alter and test a copy then replace the original file with the validated copy Please refer to the sample INIs in the last Appendix of this manual for AMOS 8 x specific information that is not contained in the older documentation TURNING THE SERVER OFF Turn off the Server whenever o You add to or modify the system hardware configuration o You move the Server for required servicing o Add or remove external SCSI devices To turn off the Server always follow these steps 1 Make sure all users have exited all programs and are logged off the system 2 Remove any backup media such as CDs and tapes or USB drives from the Server 3 From the lt
178. figuration 1 6 E 2 number of devices E 2 repeater AM 441 E 2 Wide SCSI disk drive E 3 external termination E 3 Wildcards 10 2 WINDOWS file names 10 2 transferring data to AMOS 10 1 Workgroup local 6 40 X XPE administration 6 27 IP address 6 35 AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00
179. for the internal cable from the repeater to the external SCSI port the AM 441 allows up to eight feet of external wide SCSI cabling with as many devices as you can physically attach obeying the specification of at least 5 25 between each devices The AM 441 occupies an internal 5 25 drive bay There are 3 available bays for 5 25 devices in an AM 8000 chassis since the DVD RAM drive uses one of four This does reduce the number of internal SCSI devices that can mount in the desk side chassis NARROW DEVICES ON THE WIDE BUS Any narrow SCSI device may be attached to the second Wide bus by using a 50 pin to 68 pin adapter PDB 00440 91 The adapter connects the device to the 68 pin cable However if you use both a narrow and a wide device the narrow device s lower transfer rate slows down the entire bus causing the wide device to lose its performance advantage INTERNAL SCSI TERMINATOR The Eagle 800 requires the internal tape drive to have the terminator SIPs installed and placed at the end of the 50 pin SCSI cable The second channel does not require a terminator on the back panel When AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 SCSI Configuration Details Page E 3 installing a SCSI extension cable to the external device a SCSI terminator needs to be installed on the back panel of the external device The AM 8000 first SCSI 320 channel has an internal SCSI terminator mounted at the end of the first cable Do not remove this terminato
180. fter a Ghost Partition Restore Initialize Second Logical Partition Procedure 6 48 CHAPTER7 HINTS RESTRICTIONS amp SHORTCUTS eere eese esee ee ense tn senten tnaen 7 1 MINIMUM SYSTEM CONFIGURATION INFORMATION 7 1 MINIMUM BOOT CONFIGURATION esses rennen n ei enne 7 1 SWITCHING BETWEEN AMOS AND SPF 7 2 USING MULTIPLE VIRTUAL TERMINALS eese rennen nennen enne 7 2 RE STARTING A VTM SESSION tette eeittc estote te e senna eti eR ee Hee e EE SEN ENEE 7 3 UNSAFE DISCONNEC RE 7 3 ALTERNATE TERMINAL EMULATORS esee enene nter 7 4 RESTARTING AMOS AFTER EXIT peer eth ore teet bes otbaebonlesshiscadeseteslodastendieniceade 7 5 BOOT SHORTCUTS AND SPECIFIC INITIALIZATION FILES eerte 7 5 GENERAL HINTS amp RESTRICTIONS iieii esita nenne enne nnen nennen nennen netten 7 6 AMOS and WEE 5 era recor itte et ee He ER nt aree EE Ae 7 9 The XPE firewall configuration 2 ceret term eee dence ge re tere de kg e koe e Pre pee HEC een 7 9 Patches available from Microsoft 7 9 Alpha Micro s Own In House Experience 7 9 How To Make AMOS Virus Proof sees eene nennen enne entente enne 7 9 XPE ADMINISTRATIVE UTILITIES s eeeeeeeeeeete eerte tne the treten tnn tela toten ntn ne nenas taste 7 10 CHAPTER 8 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE eeeeee eee ee seen n etas ts tents tuse ta stas sn sso s etas ens 8 1 CDOR DV D MEDIA EE 8 1 C
181. g FMDOS and TODOS Later in the chapter describes how you can copy AMOS files from the Server to other computers To use these commands you must be at the AMOS prompt The command names reflect the action taken To send files from AMOS to XPE or receive files from XPE into AMOS the following AMOS commands are used o TODOS to copy files from AMOS to XPE o FMDOS to copy files from XPE to AMOS N These utilities only support file names containing eight characters and a three character Sa extension They do not support long file names When using one of these commands the file is not changed A copy of the file is moved to the other operating system and the original file remains where it was Contiguous File Transfer Every file on the system consists of a series of blocks on the disk AMOS supports two file types linked or sequential access files and contiguous or random access files A contiguous file has all of its disk blocks in adjacent order on the disk while a linked file s blocks are in various locations on the disk XPE does not support contiguous files When transferring a contiguous file from AMOS to XPE the file is converted to a linked file If you transfer such a file back to AMOS use FMDOS R for random access to convert it back into a contiguous file Preparing to Copy TODOS and FMDOS allow you to specify the XPE directory and AMOS disk account for the source and destination files Make sure you know what XPE directo
182. gement Tool Disk Management 6 32 Fipure 6 8 RE EE 6 34 Figure 6 9 Setting XPE SAP ine et pe ae desee pee Red eee ete Eee eget e kn Deo p ca 6 35 Figure 6 10 Disabling Folder Shares AAA 6 35 Figure 6 11 Complete Firewall Enabled eese eere enne rennen 6 37 Figure 6 12 Firewall Enable for VNC to Function rennen rennen 6 39 Figure 6 13 Selecting Norton Ghost 6 42 Figure 6 14 Norton Ghost Main Men 6 43 Figure 7 1 AMPCLITE Enable Unsafe Disconnect esses 7 4 Figure 7 2 AMPCTerm Enable Unsafe Disconnect eese eene nennen 7 4 Eigure 8 1 Air Filtet Removal eene miden EES 8 3 Figure 8 2 AM8000 Rack Mount Server 8 4 Figure 8 3 Optional Dual Redundant 400 Watt Power Supply Subsystem eee 8 4 Figure E 1 Active LVD External Terminator eene E 3 Figure H 1 AM 452 IDE RAID Level 1 Subsystem esee nennen nennen H 1 AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Chapter 1 Introducing AMOS 8 x Servers SYSTEM OVERVIEW Alpha Micro has developed a series of high performance computer systems Servers that are based on the AMOS 8 x Operating System These Servers are designed to run a wide range of applications in business headquarters departmental facilities and professional offices AMOS 8 x has the power to support many users simultaneously in local or networked configurations The AMOS 8 x Servers lend themselves to virtually any business data processing environment
183. ger window and click on the End Task button This will restart AMOS 8 x with the default AM8000 MON and AM8000 INI Then minimize or close the Task Manger Once the terminal emulator starts the Alpha Micro banner will appear on the screen followed by the system initialization file The last statement in the initialization file is MEMORY 0 The AMOS system prompt usually a dot will then display allowing the user to Log onto AMOS An alternate method is to execute Boot Shortcuts in the AM8000 folder Alpha Micro has provided several different shortcuts The two most commonly used are Configure AM8000 and Boot AM8000 Their names describe what they do The first will only bring up AM8000 in configuration mode and not boot This uses the C switch in the target line of the shortcut properties The system administrator uses this mode to build new AMD files add serial devices map SCSI or IDE devices etc The Boot AM8000 shortcut will execute with AM8000 MON and AM8000 INI BOOT SHORTCUTS AND SPECIFIC INITIALIZATION FILES To boot with a specific AMOS initialization file from the XPE environment simply use the AM8000 EXE L FileName option by changing the shortcut properties to include the following line AM8000 EXE M Monitor file L Ini fil xpe side AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 7 6 Chapter Seven Ini file is the initialization file e g TEST INI or AM8000 INT or other filename You must
184. he 13GB into two 6GB independent NTFS partitions Place an AMOS AMD disk on each partition Then regularly use one to quickly backup the other about 12 minutes For off site backup the raw backup 6GB partition can usually be compressed with Ghost onto a 4GB DVD To recover a single AMOS file from the DVD the whole AMD file would be restored defined to the system and then the individual AMOS files can be accessed o Some administrators may want to add a USB removable hard disk drive The administrator can copy the AMD file s to that drive The drive can then be removed from the system for off site storage and replaced with another drive for the next backup The initial copy of the AMD file is slow but if you mount the AMD disk file from AMOS you may not be able to tell the difference in access speed Writes are slower than reads The XPE disk caching helps access time Remember to execute a Shutdown of the system to flush the disk caches Use the new XMOUNT utility program to mount removable storage o RAID Level 1 disk subsystem can be used for on line backups or Ghost Image storage AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 System Administration Page 6 25 o Use the new MAKDVD program to backup specific disk logicals or complete sets of DSK devices Remember not to allocate a disk logical larger than the DVD RAM media can hold Limit your disk logical size to 4GB and under o Use RAID Level 5 disk subsystem with hot spares to maintain up ti
185. he Server modifications to the system initialization file are needed to define what terminals are attached to which jobs The steps below are necessary to add an additional terminal to the Server However all the systems shipped from Alpha Micro have multiple INIs as examples to inform the administrator how to set up the system Please refer to the 8 x INI s in the appendix for more information AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 System Administration Page 6 9 l 2 Before adding jobs to the Server check the number of jobs that remain on your AMOS license To increase the AMOS user license contact your VAR To add jobs to the Server make a copy of the initialization file as discussed previously At the beginning of the TEST INI file is a JOBS statement The number following the JOBS statement represents the total number of jobs on your computer If your computer has 25 jobs now and you want to add two more jobs change the number in the JOBS statement to 27 or more For example JOBS 27 Onthe lines following the JOBS statement there are one or more JOBALC statements Each job can be defined in a separate JOBALC statement or several jobs in the same JOBALC statement by separating the job names with commas For example JOBALC JOB4 JOB5 JOB6 JOB7 Each job name which can have up to six characters A Z 0 9 defines a job on the Server The total number of jobs defined in the JOBALC statements must be
186. he two cabling specifications which affect the total number of devices are o The total length of the cable cannot exceed three meters approximately 10 feet o Each device must be separated on the SCSI 320 cable by 5 25 Each standard internal wide SCSI cable for the AM 8000 ensures adequate space between internal devices One SCSI bus should be dedicated to interconnecting high speed disk drives This bus allows up to four internal LVD capable drives plus an internal terminator The first SCSI bus is reserved for internal devices unless an external RAID subsystem has been ordered along with the Server A special cable may be purchased to install an external LVD RAID subsystem to the first SCSI channel On the AM 8000 the second SCSI bus allows up to three internal SCSI devices plus an external connector at the rear of the system This connector is normally used for an active terminator or you can attach a 3 foot LVD SCSI cable to an LVD RAID device If you need a longer external cable use a repeater as described below THE WIDE SCSI REPEATER As mentioned above the total allowable bus length for the Wide SCSI bus is 10 feet This can be limiting especially in configurations which require more than one external device The AM 441 Wide SCSI Bus Repeater attaches to the end of the AM 8000 s second internal SCSI cable In effect it starts a new physical bus From the repeater you can have up to ten additional feet of bus cable Allowing
187. hernet LAN1 x e Standard Serial UO Paddle Gigabit Ethernet LAN2 j Card Bus connector optional Second Serial I O Paddle Card bus connector optional Standard Multipurpose I O controller Second Multipurpose I O controller optional AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 Installation Page 2 5 Eagle 800 Front amp Rear Panel System Power On Switch Power LED Disk LED Network LED Reset Switch Figure 2 3 Eagle 800 Front panel Master ON OFF Switch AC Voltage Selector AC Power input Keyboard Mouse connectors VGA 2 Parallel Port VGA 1 USB Port 1 amp 2 Ethernet Port PC COMI and COM2 VHDCI SCSI Connector PCI Serial Connectors AM 113 45 Serial 3 2 1 0 USB Port 3 amp 4 Figure 2 4 Eagle 800 Rear Panel AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 2 6 Chapter Two PREPARING THE SITE For the Server to do its best job it must be placed it in a clean environment and one that meets the temperature specifications of the Server Extreme temperature or humidity can cause computer failure But it is not very demanding its environmental needs are similar to your own Physical Requirements The first step is to make sure the location for the Server is large enough and sturdy enough to support it Leave enough room for any local terminals and printers that are needed Do not place the system in a hallway or other high traffic area The dirt and dust from these areas end up inside the c
188. hough other ATAPI compatible devices such as disk drives and CD drives may appear in e the upper panel do not map your NTFS formatted SCSI Drive on the AM 8000 or the NTFS Zeg formatted IDE disk drive on an Eagle 800 to an AMOS disk device This will corrupt the data on the drive and make the system not bootable AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 AM8000 Configuration Program Page 3 13 The system drive is always formatted as NTFS for use by the XPE system AMOS only boots from an AMD disk file stored in the AM8000 folder of the NTFS system drive Only map true AMOS formatted drives in the SCSI Devices configuration Note that ATAPI compatible IDE CD ROM drives are listed as SCSI devices even though they are not actually on the SCSI cable For maximum speed and to take advantage of XPE disk cache you should formatted the system disk drives in the NTFS file system under XPE To access this go to the lt Control panel gt find lt Administrative Tools gt lt Computer Management gt lt Disk Management gt program See Chapter 6 for more details To unassign a device simply drag the yellow double headed arrow from the lower box to the upper box and drop it If there is no assignment in the lower panel the SCSI command from AMOS will show no devices The AMOS drive IDs do not need to be the same addresses as the physical device detected under XPE If you want to add an older AMOS formatted drive to the system configuration it must be mappe
189. hrough a command file The copy to the DVD disk logicals is slower than using MAKDVD and will wear out the media faster than MAKDVD The excessive media wear is due to the fact that the BITMAP must be updated for each file copied The DVD RAM media is lifetime is 100 000 read write cycles The DVD RW and CD RW media lifetime is 1000 read write cycles There is no write caching available for this process so it is slower writing data to the media than having AMD files stored on the media formatted in UDF MAKDVD can create a six logical 32MB disk in about 15 minutes If you use the FATDVD COPY method may take 12 hours for the same task We strongly recommend not to use FMTDVD Copy method We do not encourage using DVD RW media for this process because it is only a 2X write speed device DVD RAM is 3X write speed TYPES OF BACKUPS NEEDED There are two types of backups needed for every site They are o XPE System Backup o AMOS Data Backup AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 6 24 Chapter Six XPE System Backup The XPE System backup should contain all the XPE software and the AM8000 folder with all its contents This backup should contain all the system settings contained in the XPE Registry The best way to make sure you have this backed up is to create a Ghost CD of the C SystemVolume drive This one backup will restore your system exactly the way it is setup now and working AMOS Data Backup An additional image backup of
190. idity ranges Air circulation around the system is something that should be considered Do not put a computer in a closed closet where there is no cooling See the separate specification sheet for detailed requirements It is very important for the health of the Server that its cooling system is not obstructed The Server takes air in from the front and exhausts air at the rear Allow at least six to eight inches at the rear of the unit for ventilation Environmental Specifications Server external operating temperature 60 to 90 degrees F 16 to 32 2 degrees C 10 degrees C per hour maximum fluctuation Humidity 20 to 80 non condensing AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 Installation Page 2 7 Static Electricity and Grounding One of the greatest enemies of computers terminals and printers is static electricity The chief villain is climate dry winds and dry seasons On dry and windy days when humidity is low static electricity could affect the Server Be aware that both carpets and the plastic mats often used under desks are a prime source of static electricity If possible install the Server in an uncarpeted area If the Server is placed in a carpeted area where static electricity could be a problem treat the area with anti static spray on a regular basis If problems occur when equipment near the Server is turned on for example if the Server stops functioning when someone uses the photocopier improper grounding could
191. ighted Press k Next is highlighted Press no Advanced settings changes L Run Now Press From this point it runs like the backup In general Press No Keys Normally the only human intervention needed is to change discs if this was a multi disc backup Ghost Explorer The Ghost Explorer gives the system administrator the ability to restore files out of a Ghost backup file GHO There are a few restrictions for this process Please refer to the Norton Documentation Any open file such as AMD files cannot be restored to the hard drive if the lt AM8000 program is active and it is using the disk file You must QUIT the AM8000 program to perform the restore Other files like AM8000 EXE and the terminal emulators also have this restriction The XPE system files that are open also have the same restriction If the operator selects another folder destination on the hard drive the Ghost Explorer will extract and restore the file but only if there is enough disk space left on the disk volume selected See the Ghost user Manual for more information Ghost Restore Procedure The Ghost Restore process is normally used when a new replacement hard drive is installed All system settings and configuration settings must be re entered for the Server installation The AMOS Bootable Recovery CD shipped from Alpha Micro has the default settings and the original disk files Any patches or Customer data applied to the Server after ins
192. igure 1 4 AM 8000 Series II Full Tower Chassis 1 2 Figure 2 1 Front Panel Controls and Indicators deskside chassis sess 2 4 Figure 2 2 AM 8000 Rear Panel Configuration Deskside Chassis eee 2 4 Figure 2 3 Eagle 800 Front panel itt et ee tee ge e ge eene eet ise cad 2 5 Figure 2 4 Basle 800 Rear Panel neg Oe E t 2 5 Figure 3 1 AM 8000 System Diagnostic window eesseeseeseeeeeeeeeeeee nne enne enne 3 2 Figure 3 2 Sample Boot SessIon iu ioni Bede rete HR eg 3 2 ELCH e RR EE One 3 3 Figure 3 4 AM8000 Configuration General Tab 3 4 teure ena Meester 3 5 Figur 3 6 Virtual Terminals aei neget tene eee tie gt Eege 3 6 Figure 3 7 Serial Ports for a standard AM 8000 system sseeseeeseeseeeeeeeeeeen eene 3 7 Figure 3 8 Device Manager Ports assignment sessesseeseeeseeeeeeeeene tenente nnne 3 8 Figure 3 0 Serial Ports assignment EE edd 3 9 Figure 3 10 LPT Printer assignment nennen nennen nennen nennen enint nne 3 10 Figure 3 11 Network Tab for AM8000 System sess enr emeret nennen 3 11 Figure 3 12 Network Tab for Eagle 800 system essere enne nne 3 11 Lipure 3 13 5 CS DDeVICeS rut e tert tenete tig rete tere i teer eve ede cue eere 3 12 Figure 3 14 Exit to Save the Confguraton esses ener enne nennen ener 3 13 Figure 3 15 End AlphaShell Task to Restart 3 14 Figure 3 16 About AMS000
193. ilable for use to AMOS Restart the AM8000 configure program Once the ports are installed under XPE correctly the COM ports on the left can be mapped to the corresponding AMOS COM port on the right with a select drag and drop technique with the mouse Figure 3 9 is an example of a properly configured system setup Most Eagle 800 systems would look like this if they have two 8 port USB boxes attached If you unplug the USB boxes the mapping will still be on the right but the left panel will show COMG to 18 missing In the diagnostic window during the COM port scan the ports must show up in order to be used by AMOS 8 x If a PCI 8 port board is used it must also be installed in the same manner as described AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 AM8000 Configuration Program Page 3 9 AM8000 Configuration a xj General Amos Disks Virtual Terminals Serial Potts Printers Network Scsi Devices PC serial port COM1 Amos serial port COM1 Assigned to PC serial port COM1 PC serial port COM2 Amos serial port COMZ Assigned to PC serial port COM2 PC serial port COM3 Amos serial port COM3 Assigned to PC serial port COM3 PC serial port COM4 gt Amns serial nat COMA Assianed to PC serial nat COAMA PC serial port COMES Amos se al port COM5 Assigned to PC serial pot COM5 PC serial port COMS Amos seral port COMS Assigned to PC seral port COME PC se al port COM7 Amos serial port COM7 Assigned to PC se al port COM7 PC serial port
194. ind these readings Each Server has the capability to display this information CD DVD OR BLURAY MEDIA In order to protect your data the CD media must be handled and cared for properly Depending on the model of drive installed in the Server the DVD drive can read and write standard CD media as well as DVD media A CD RW drive cannot read or write DVD media Here are some important hints to remember o The recording film of the CD is under the top label Never try to remove this label If you do you will destroy the CD o Treat CD and DVD media gently Scratches spills and dirt and fingerprints can ruin them Handle them by the edges Do not flex this media as that can cause various internal layers to start separating o Use a soft dry cloth to clean the disc Do not use solvents Always wipe from the hole to the edge o Keep your CD Media in a dust free environment like the jewel case or envelope to store them This helps them stay clean o Avoid temperature extremes Do not expose CD media to temperatures below 50 degrees Fahrenheit 10 degrees Celsius or above 125 degrees Fahrenheit 52 degrees Celsius o Donotleave your CD next to a window where radiant heat from direct sunlight can cook them This will warp the plastic and destroy them o CDs should be at about the same temperature as your computer o Only write on the top surface and only with a Soft Felt Tip marker CD DVD RAM OR BLURAY DRIVE The CD or DVD RAM
195. ing configuration may not be in compliance with the referenced FCC rules Corrective measures if any are required are the responsibility of the user Information on emission levels of peripheral devices should be obtained from the manufacturer of the device CABLE CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES To construct your own cables there are a few things to keep in mind before installing a cabling system Most modern installations are wired for networking This same cabling system may be used for RS 232 communication Just the termination of the circuit must not go into Ethernet switches or hubs Parallel patch cords from the cabling system patch panel connect the serial I O ports of the Server and then to the remote serial device The wall plates at the work station locations will have a parallel patch cord to a modular adapter pined out for the serial devices I O connector All serial diagrams in this appendix refer to the RJ 45 pin outs and twisted pair numbering The high speed serial lines TX data and RX data must never be in the same twisted pair The RXD is paired with a low speed signal RTS The TXD signal is paired with DTR Engineering has tested this cable design scheme up to 300 feet with no transmission or cross talk problems with Level 5 cables Cable Length When using twisted paired shielded cable you may increase the length to 150 feet using Level 3 or Level 5 Twisted paired cable for RS 232 connections The premises circuits should all be paralle
196. ink 1 Syevola Fz 17 09 GE 4 15 Ge NTFS 1 Healthy es l Move the mouse cursor over the Back bar and Right Click Left click Select gt New Partition The lt New Partition Wizard gt will display a Click on Next Select gt Extended Partition Select gt Next For the S1AM 8000 the partition size is 13249 MB leave it alone Select Next For the S2AM 8000 the partition size is 30749 MB leave it alone Select Next For the S3Am8000 the partition size is 62432 MB leave it alone Select Next For the S2 Eagle 800 the partition size is 34200 MB leave it alone Select Next For the S3 Eagle800 the partition size is 145047 MB leave it alone Select Next Completing the New Partition Wizard will display Select Finish Now we must allocate the free space as the D drive Move mouse over the Light Green bar and Right Click In the New Partition Wizard a Select New Logical drive b Select Next c Logical drive is selected This is what we want Select Next New partition Wizard Partition size 2 13249 MB for the S1 AM 8000 leave it alone Partition size 2 30749 MB for the S2AM8000 leave it alone Partition size 62432MB for the 53 AM8000 leave it alone Partition size 2 34200 MB for the Eagle 800 leave it alone Partition size 2 145047 MB for the S3Eagle 800 leave it alone mye ho ao g a Select Next b Assign Drive letter Allow D
197. integrated circuit located on the multi function board inside the AMOS 8 x Server The SSD uniquely identifies the Server to customized software that has been configured to run only on this system If customized software was purchased from your VAR or other software vendors please give them the SSD identification number before they key the software to the Server The SSD identification number is written on the system ID label on the back of the Server in the area titled SSD Serial No Please note the identification number of the SSD at this time and enter the number at the front of this manual OVERVIEW OF INSTALLATION PROCEDURES Installing the Server is a matter of 1 Choosing and preparing a location for the system that is clean of dirt and dust and a ventilated environment to cool the system Please provide at least 6 to 8 inches behind the system and at least 8 inches in front Making sure the power supply is configured correctly for the local electrical requirements Connecting the operator console mouse and keyboard 2 3 4 Running the initial POST diagnostic test to make sure the system is working correctly 5 Creating a backup tape or backup CD 6 Connecting additional terminals and printers 7 Getting assistance Some of the sections in this chapter refer to various locations on the front and back panels of the system The next two sections describe the front and rear panel connectors controls and indicator
198. itching between AMOS and WINDOWS 7 2 Switching between AMOS and XPE 3 3 SYSACT command 6 3 SYSTAT command 4 3 6 3 6 11 System Administration XPE 6 27 System Administrator 6 1 System configuration minimum 7 1 System Console 1 9 System disk definition 4 2 System initialization file 6 9 7 6 F 2 modifying 2 11 6 4 T Tape capacity 4 7 care of media 8 2 drive 4 6 drive cleaning 8 2 loading and unloading cartridges 4 7 Task Manager 1 11 6 17 Technical Support 2 11 Terminal cables A 5 keyboard 4 5 B 1 TRMDEF statement 6 9 Terminal emulators 7 5 Test INI modification 3 19 Testing line voltages 2 7 Text conventions 1 15 TightVnc 1 11 TODOS 10 1 10 3 command format 10 2 wildcards 10 2 Tools Page 8 Control Panel 3 15 Editor 3 15 Ghosts 3 15 Task Manger 3 15 Transferring data 10 1 Transferring files between Alpha Micro computers 10 5 source and destination 10 1 to other PCs 10 5 TRMDEF statement 6 9 Troubleshooting printer A 5 Turning off power 2 11 Turning the Server on 2 9 U Unpacking 2 1 Unsafe disconnect 7 3 UPS monitoring A 10 Utility programs 5 2 V VersiCOMM 5 3 Virtual terminal 3 5 restarting a session 7 3 switching between 6 4 7 2 Index using 6 4 7 2 Viruses 7 9 Voltage compatibility 2 8 W WAIT Command 6 10 Wide SCSI and narrow devices E 2 bus length E 2 con
199. ke any AMOS formatted physical drive To give AMOS 8 x far superior disk performance XPE s internal disk caching software is used AM8000 EXE works with the AM8000 monitor which makes up the AMOS 8 x operating system AM8000 EXE opens the AMD disk files and reads and writes to these files just like a physical disk AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 3 16 Chapter Three drive The AMD file is created from the AMOS Disks tab of the Configuration screen in the AM8000 program Since XPE does the disk caching for AMOS you do not need AMOS disk cache for these pseudo disk devices Installing AMOS disk cache on top of XPE cache is slower and less efficient therefore we advise you not do this You will be double caching data and AMOS must look up the record in both caches before the disk record is returned To create AMD disk files see the procedure AMD File Creation The AMD files themselves can be copied providing a complete image backup These AMD files can reside on any supported file system normally NTFS UDF or FAT32 The copies can be defined to AMOS 8 x through the AM8000 configuration program XPE must perform the copy which is FAST about 2 minutes per GB if using an internal hard drive as the destination This can be slower depending on the drive media being used The optional RAID subsystems are formatted in NTFS and made bootable under XPE This allows the customer to restore their data to AMD files created on the RAID
200. ke sure the AC power cords are installed in the I O subsystems and the signal cables that connect the I O subsystems to the AM 8000 Server are in place Apply power to each Serial I O subsystem prior to turning the power on the AM 8000 Server For Eagle 800 Servers equipped with a SCSI controller these systems do not need a back panel mounted terminator The sub system that is connected to the controller must have the terminator If an internally mounted streamer tape drive is present the internal SCSI cable must be terminated at the end of the cable either by enabling terminators on the last internal SCSI peripheral or by a separate terminator installed in a cable connector at the end of the SCSI cable 1 Verify once again that the Server has been configured correctly for the AC power service in your region 2 Insert the socket end of the AC power cord firmly over the three prongs in the power cord receptacle in the back panel Then plug the pronged end of the cord into an electrical outlet 3 Turn on the Server by switching the AC power ON OFF switch on the rear panel to the ON position Then push the power button located on the front panel 4 To verify that the power is on o Are the Power and Run or Disk activity indicator lights on the front panel lit See Figure 2 1 o Are the cooling fans running To check the fans place your hand behind each fan opening in the back panel you should feel air blowing out 5 Verify that any RAI
201. l circuits Here are some things you can do if the cables absolutely must be longer than what is specified 1 Signal conditioning equipment for example a short haul modem can improve signal quality 2 Use Eagle 450TX terminal Servers to connect RS232 devices 3 Convert the device to Ethernet and Telnet into the Host Server 4 Forreliability reasons do not allow PC COM ports to drive cables longer than 100 feet Cable Type We recommend that you use a twisted paired shielded jacketed cable The cable should be rated at least CMP Level 3 but you can use CMP Level 5 cable for lines longer than 150 feet Most cities require that AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 Connector Configurations Page A 3 any low voltage communication cable have a CMP Communication cable Plenum rating This type of cable should comply with your local fire codes for installation in your facility Using a high quality twisted paired overall shielded cable helps minimize electromagnetic interference Reducing this interference protects the Server from signal noise It also protects other devices around the Alpha Micro Server such as a TV or radio from interference radiated by an improperly shielded system Except for the PC COM ports and PC serial port adapters the AMOS RJ 45 serial ports have a shield ground connection at pin 1 The AM 359 cable adapters and assemblies have the shield ground connection to pin 1 These pre made cable assemblies are availa
202. language is a standard part of the software for the Server AlphaBASIC contains many business oriented features AlphaBASIC also provides an ISAM Indexed Sequential Access Method interface AlphaBASIC PLUS also provided contains advanced features such as sophisticated data structures and program control constructs Please see your VAR for information on other programming and assembly languages available for the Server such as AlphaC AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 5 2 Chapter Five Networking The Networking software AlphaNET and AlphaTCP are included in the AMOS 8 x release AlphaNET is Alpha Micro s 2 generation software to transfer files exchange information and share resources between different models of Alpha Micro computers It is provided primarily for compatibility with the older AMOS system that might be on a network AlphaTCP is Alpha Micro s 3 generation networking software allows the Server to transfer files exchange information and share resources between different computers on the Internet This package also provides Telnet and network printer services Web Server and e mail Server can be set up under AMOS 8 x Please read the AlphaTCP Administrators Guide for more information on this flexible software Text Preparation To create documents on the Server there are multiple word processing programs available AlphaVUE a screen oriented text editor allows the user terminal to create and change documen
203. lation Data cables should not be located near high voltage power lines power transformer telephone cables or in elevator shafts They should not cross walkways If cables must cross walkways cover the cables with a cable bridge Please consider how long the serial communication cables will be Single ended serial circuits are susceptible to all forms of electromagnetic interference As line length increases beyond fifty feet the reliability of the RS 232C cable connected to the terminal and printer decreases rapidly If local terminals are to be located further than fifty feet from the computer we recommend you use low capacitance twisted paired overall shielded cables If this cable does not solve the problem then use a Terminal Server to extend the reach of serial devices See Appendix A for more information Verifying Voltage Compatibility Different parts of the world use different standards for electricity Most areas of the United States use 115 Volt electricity Many other areas of the world use 220 to 240 Volt electricity Power Supply AC Voltage and Receptacle o The AM 8000 systems power supply is auto sensing and therefore allows 115 VAC or 240 VAC input without any input selector switch setting See Figure 2 2 o The Eagle 800 requires that the Voltage selector switch be set for 115 or 240 VAC for the site See Figure 2 4 o The AM448 RAID subsystem must have the Voltage selector set correctly o The Serial I O subsy
204. lert to notify the system operator of a failure Once the operator replaces the defective drive the RAID controller automatically mirrors from the remaining working drive to the new replacement With this type of RAID controller use the same type and size IDE 133 disk drives This is only a two drive system Additional details are shown in Appendix H With respect to the XPE system the RAID looks like ONE disk drive with two partitions C amp E The CD DVD drive is always the D disk device Serial UO Capability In addition to the standard serial I O ports previously described other serial I O ports can be added to the AMOS 8 x Server in a variety of ways 1 On any AM 8000 system you can include up to 120 serial I O ports housed in the Alpha Micro AM 905 31 chassis or 56 serial ports in the AM 3501 I O expansion chassis The serial I O boards that are supported are the AM 359 00 optically isolated 8 port serial I O board and the AM 359 01 non isolated 8 port serial I O board These subsystems are interconnected with a 68 pin 34 twisted paired cable to the AM 113 50 Multifunction board housed inside the AM 8000 system chassis These serial ports provide RJ 45 connector interfaces to mate with your serial port cables 2 All AMOS 8 x Servers can add additional serial ports via an Alpha Micro Eagle 450TX terminal Server attached to the network You can also convert an existing Alpha Micro computer into a Terminal Server to Telnet into the AMOS
205. les It is important that only a knowledgeable technician perform these tasks BACKING UP THE SERVER DATA Once the Server is in use you will soon find yourself operating it with confidence and ease However no matter how smoothly everything goes please remember one important thing you must keep current copies of the data contained on the Server This copy is your backup Computers and data storage devices are very reliable but no one can guard against an unforeseen occurrence like a power outage fire or hardware malfunction Such disaster can happen to anyone Your data is probably one of your most valuable possessions How long would it take to re enter the entire company payroll all of your accounts receivable invoices or your inventory if they were lost What if you could not reconstruct the information no matter how much time you had All Alpha Micro Servers come with some type of data backup device Whether your backup A device is a streaming tape CD RW or DVD RAM device learn to use it Develop regular backup procedures and follow them If disaster strikes you ll be glad you had a little foresight The administrator should back up some or all of the data on the Server at regular intervals How often to back up depends on how often data is added or changed If data is added every day you should back up the Server each night Month end and Year end backups also make sense Because both backup and diagnostic procedures usually must
206. ls o When the Server boots from the AM8000 AMD disk file the normal occurrence the system drive will be referenced as 12 disk devices named DSKO DSK1 DSK11 o Ifyou change the Configure menu to boot the Server from a different AMD file the first pseudo drive might be referenced as disk devices named WINO WINI to WINI1 and the new pseudo disk drive is named DSKO Remember this is only an example Your Server may be set up to reference the hard disk as more or less than 12 logical devices The disk device containing the system initialization command file and other system software the device AMOS boots from is always called DSKO Normally this is the first logical device of the pseudo disk AMS000 AMD When you change the device you boot from it will also change the names of other devices on the Server You must change the Configuration to specify each AMD file to be assigned a disk device name like DSK or SUB or NEW etc A different system initialization command file on the alternate drives may define devices differently Once the Server is booted to see a list of the disk devices on the Server type SYSTAT and press RETURN The end of the display lists the available disks DEVTBL can show you the relationship between physical AMD devices and logical drives within the AMD drive With original AMOS formatted SCSI drives the actual disk drive is called the physical device and each partition is a logical device These disks ar
207. ls give you the ability to define your own type of terminal or printer to the Server o System Firewall has been enabled to protect the XPE system environment o Series II AM 8000 and Series II Eagle800 systems now have European language support for the XPE side English French German Italian and Spanish are selectable from the XPE Control panel from Regional and Language Options o All Series III Systems have XPe SP2 patches with dotNet 2 0 with C 6 0 amp 8 0 libraries installed which is required for AM8000 exe version 1 1 939C3 and later to function o Series III Am8000 systems now have a BluRay DVD Ram drive standard This is an optional equipment for the Eagle 800 For an introduction to AMOS software refer to Chapter 4 AMOS Overview that also provides a list of additional documentation available from Alpha Micro to assist you with specific information in your area of interest Software Compatibility In general all non hardware dependent AMOS code should work The full AMOS 68000 instruction set and monitor calls are supported in all cases When an unsupported but formerly supported instruction or monitor call is encountered a message is displayed in the System AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 1 12 Chapter One Diagnostic window Usually no additional changes are made to registers etc Unsupported 68000 instructions will also generate an AMOS Illegal Instruction exception Important If the sy
208. m Diagnostic window E callis ETATEN Gi The Server processes the Kat AECH SEMI TA apr RU commands in the system WRIT METSER initialization file Each line r utoe Iik viser jin executed is displayed on the ARI Me LIC NER TL Es Soo 00 FENU TEPETR mm TOP HIE CHO operator console When all be deem of the commands in the Log opr initialization file have been oput EESTI processed successfully the ee pl E Server is up and running i e Us The last command in any A8 9 TELMED 2 system initialization file is sferred Fron OPH te SYS E MEMORY 0 In other jiis sie PPN T mmt ipiri Local HE IHI file Fig igure e 3 2 pue Boot nem AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 AM8000 Configuration Program Page 3 3 Switching Between AMOS and XPE Once in AMOS and operating from VTM1 you can switch between AMOS and XPE with just a keystroke on the console keyboard The standard method is ALT ATAB to activate the System Diagnostics window CONFIGURING AM8000 AND EAGLE 800 SERVERS On the task bar there are 5 command options The third one is Configure With the mouse select and click on Configure This will launch the AM8000 Configuration Window We will step through each program option tab in the remainder of this section to initially configure the AM 8000 Environment 1E AM8000 System _1 0 936e EG ini x File Tools Configure Window Help 8 x Socket request from 127 6 6
209. manufactured prior to March 5 2004 make sure the XPE Firewall is fully enabled and neither local XPE paths nor local XPE printers are configured for Microsoft sharing See chapter 6 for this procedure AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 7 10 Chapter Seven XPE ADMINISTRATIVE UTILITIES xAdmin utilities are now available on all systems These AMOS utility programs provide quick shortcuts to XPE commands The system administrator should be the only user to run these XCMDs Most of these commands will only run on the VTMx terminals on the Console Some XCMDs must be run from the OPR account which can be password protected We strongly urge using SHUTDN which will safely shut down the AMOS 8 0 server from any AMOS job This utility will MONTST the AMOS Server and execute the SHUTDN EXE program on the XPE side and power off the Server Most of these utilities are DO files and some BASIC programs so feel free to create your own variations with different names Most of these commands include HELP files HLP HLP and command will also provide help The xAdmin Utilities includes the following o ShutDn Shuts down AMOS and powers off the system o GoDown Does a MONTST and Shuts down the whole System o xDir Lists XPE files o xDel Deletes XPE files o xRen Renames XPE files o XxIPcfg Reports the XPE IP information o xDisks Accesses the XPE disk manager o xPlore Accesses the XPE Explorer o xDot Accesses the XPE
210. mbers on different disks please establish a different numbering scheme to prevent duplicates AMOS 8 x operating system has reserved the accounts 1 2 2 7 and 10 1 10 2 accounts on DSKO Any application software can use any of the other account number possibilities 11 100 200 and so on Most software applications have already organized themselves with proper account numbers for the account number The ERSATZ INI file is located on DSKO 1 4 and contains several predefined ersatz names The administrator can add more accounts to this file For example one of the predefined ersatz account names is OPR for DSKO 1 2 So whenever you need to log in the account DSKO 1 2 you can type LOG OPR instead The AMOS User s Guide contains more information on ersatz names and how you can use them T If remembering account numbers is cumbersome you can substitute a predefined Ersatz name Adding New Accounts There is no specific number of accounts the system must have as long as there is room on the disk When the Server is brand new the only accounts are the ones the system software has predefined To add more accounts from time to time as applications are added use the SYSACT command following these steps 1 To see a list of the disk devices on the AMOS 8 x Server type SYSTAT The end of the display lists the available disk devices Decide which device to add the accounts to 2 Log into account 1 2 on
211. me and data backups Are the Older AMOS DVD RAM Backups Compatible AMOS DVD RAMSs as well as CDs and CD RWs made on older AMOS systems are readable on the AM 8000 However DVD RAMs and similar media written on the XPE side with the AMD files are NOT readable on older AMOS systems The new version of MAKDVD will work on all models of the AMOS 8 x Servers which have a DVD RAM drive The new MAKDVD provides a better more flexible backup utility It allows different size AMOS drives on the same DVD media In addition DVD R media can be used to create more permanent backups Unmountable and Mountable AMD Files With the Version 925C2 and later of the AM8000 EXE program along with the XMOUNT LIT version 8 0 100 AMOS 8 x has the ability to un mount and mount AMD disk files This results in a whole new way of using AMD disk files Except for the DSK device the other subsystem disk files can be mounted and un mounted without shutting down AMOS This process can provide a way to have on line backups without shutting down AMOS to change the disk configuration To provide this capability follow this procedure 1 Define the subsystem name and file name in the AMOS Disk tab of the Configuration program For example UPD D AM8000 UPDATE AMD The AMD file must be on a hard drive or DVD RAM media 2 Save the Configuration with the OK button 3 Modify the AM8000 INI and only define the disk subsystem driver for example SYSTEM UPD DVR 1
212. mentation AMOS AND DELETING OLD UNSUPPORTED PROGRAMS AMOS the Alpha Micro Operating System supervises all of the programs that run on the Server Regular updates to the AMOS operating system and its accompanying system software are available from your VAR There are different revision levels of AMOS To use the AM 8000 or Eagle 800 these Servers are provided with AMOS 8 0 101 10 or later Please do not mix older versions of AMOS on the new AMOS 8 x Servers They are not compatible and may cause instability To eliminate older programs that are not supported under AMOS 8 x LOG OPR and execute ERAS8K DSKO This will erase all unsupported files that have been named in previous versions of AMOS32 and AMOSL The only filenames that will not be erased are multiple copies with different filenames that were not released by Alpha Microsystems Any application software will remain on DSKO with no change Clean up of the system can be done after you have tested your applications and are comfortable with the results The files that should be erased are older versions of the monitors old VME disk drivers and SASI disk drivers Even older INIs which defined older hardware should be erased from DSKO The older program files merely clutter up the disk and take up backup space INTRODUCTION TO AMOS SOFTWARE This section will give you an idea of some of the software available for the AMOS 8 x Servers Programming Languages The AlphaBASIC programming
213. n 139 tcp nbsession NETBIOS Session Service file shares amp printer sessions printer 515 tcp spooler shared printers 5900 tcp VNC access TrueGui 8000 tcp AMOS TrueGuiPipe port AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 6 38 Chapter Six To enable VNC and allow peer to peer network access or network printing the firewall must allow certain ports through To set up the firewall to allow the VNC remote administration to function and peer to peer network access follow the procedure below l 2 3 DA Qv UA m From the lt AM8000 Diagnostics gt window Select gt Tools gt Control Panel a In the Right Panel double click Select Network Connections b Select Local Area Connection and Right Click and Select Properties c Select Internet Protocol TCP IP with left mouse click d Select Properties button The Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window will be displayed a Select Advanced button b The Advanced TCP IP Settings window will display Select gt Options tab i TCP IP Filtering will be highlighted in Blue ii Select Properties button c In the TCP IP Filtering gt window i Verify that the Enable TCP IP Filtering All adapters check box is checked ii Verify that the Permit Only for TCP Ports is Checked ii Verify that the lt TCP Ports box displays Port Numbers 137 and 139 for peer to peer network access or only port 5900 for VNC remo
214. n Ghost After a Ghost file is created on a hard drive the Ghost Image file can be written to this media for archive copy This can only be done with the packet writing software once the media is formatted in UDF format DVD R media is new to AMOS systems Normally this media is used during a Ghost Image Backup of the Server The Server must shutdown AMOS and restart into PC DOS for Ghost to make the image backup of the selected logical disk The DVD R media holds about 6GB of compressed disk data If your Server has more data than this you must feed the DVD drive with more DVD R media This is a long procedure to backup a complete Server This media is write once read many DVD RW media is new to AMOS systems This media can be used for both Read and Write operations from XPE The RW media can also be used on the XPE side for data backups from the Explorer Application The packet writing software allows you to drag and drop files onto the media if it has been formatted in UDF The DVD RW speed is not fast this takes a lot more time than with DVD RAM or DVD R media This media type does not work with Ghost or MAKDVD DVD RAM media is not totally new to AMOS systems This media can be used for both Read and Write operations The media can be used on the XPE side or with AMOS but not both on the same media The MAKDVD software gives the greatest flexibility to backup procedures It is faster to search and retrieve data files faster than a tape r
215. n you order additional AMOS users The PIC code for the number of users you ordered with your system originally is installed at Alpha Micro as a part of the system manufacturing process To enter PIC from AMOS command level type OSINST 8 for AM113 45 50 SSD security Figure 4 1 shows a prompt requesting the PIC First type a down arrow to get to the PIC code field With Caps Lock on type in the code being sure to use the correct letters amp numbers Be sure to include the between the 4 sets of 5 characters and press ENTER Tae eS aa Example GLE41 51548 576LE 75EFW ENTER AONE Monitor PIC Program 7 The next prompt asks to confirm i SCC 2 that the entered PIC is correct Currently logged into accpumt DEM 1 81 ES Erler FSPEE ahere NOM NER 1s lnaded 5 e Check your entry and if it s r E Ao phar g K S correct type Y ENTER Figure 4 1 AM 8000 PIC Program AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 4 2 Chapter Four DISK DRIVER FOR AM8000 MON For the AM8000 MON the main disk driver is different than for other AMOS based systems When building a new monitor using the MONGEN program specify the ACE DVR Do not use PCDSK DVR Additionally include your Language LDF file either ENGLSH LATINI BRITSH or your own when performing the MONGEN process To place the new version in the AM8000 folder TODOS AMS000 MON or LOG OPR and MONTST AM8000 The MONTST executes the TODOS for you TH
216. nals on the console very easy to use Switching from one virtual terminal to any other is just like switching from one Window to another As you switch from one virtual terminal to another the processing continues for the task running on the virtual terminal you left As in any multi tasking environment be careful not to run conflicting tasks on multiple virtual terminals For example don t use one virtual terminal to run DSKANA on a disk while another virtual terminal is editing a file on that disk You may damage the file and possibly many files MODIFYING THE SYSTEM INITIALIZATION FILE The name of the system initialization file for the AMOS 8 x Servers is usually AM8000 INI This special file in account DSKO 1 4 defines to the AMOS operating system all of the devices connected to the Server the jobs that will run on the Server and special programs which need to be loaded into memory As requirements change or as devices are added on the Server you must modify the system initialization file NEVER change the system initialization file directly Always make a copy of it and modify the copy as described below To make a copy of the system initialization file to be modified and tested execute the following commands LOG DSKO 1 4 COPY TEST INI AM8000 INI ENTER VUE TEST INI ENTER Use AIphaVUE or XED to edit TEST INI If you are unfamiliar with AlphaVUE refer to the AlphaVUE User s Manual Make all the necessary changes to TEST
217. nd ANGEL and SHiFT CANCEL l R E COMPOSE HIFTJ ACTRL Q For example to use AlphaWRITE s menu key on AM 62 terminals on the PC console press CCS USING FUNCTION KEYS Both supplied console terminal emulators AMPCTerm and AMPCLITE included in AMOS 8 x have ADDITIONAL function key support features Refer to the on line help information provided with each emulator for information about these additional function key support features AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 Appendix D AMOS 8 x Command Summary The following table summarizes commands you can enter to use the AM8000 EXE program Command Function AM8000 option Launches AMOS from the XPE shortcut IC Launch the Configuration Window without booting AMOS L filename Boot AMOS using specified file INI stored in the AM8000 folder JM filename Boot AMOS using specified file MON stored in the AM8000 folder If no M switch is specified the default AM8000 MON file is used in the booting process This file must exist in the AM8000 Folder WI Enables diagnostic message in the EAMOS trace window for diagnostic purposes The following table summarizes the AMOS commands specific to AMOS 8 x For information on other AMOS commands see the AMOS System Commands Reference Manual Command Function FMDOS Windows Amos option Copies the XPE file Windows to the AMOS file Amos Or FMDOS Amos Windows option TODOS Amos Windows option Copies the AM
218. nd DOS Other 3 party application programs such as Ghost writes the Image backups in CDFS format Other applications programs can read this CD format Ghost Image Data As the name implies a complete disk volume image is compressed into a GHO file with file extents of 2GB in size The image can span multiple CD R or DVD R media or be stored on any hard drive other than the one being backed up The Ghost Image backups are only readable by the Ghost Backup and Restore utility or the Ghost Explorer The Ghost Explorer can open and read the GHO file displaying the files compressed inside The data backed up are XPE programs AMOS programs and AMD disk files The operator can then select any file inside the Image and restore it to any location controlled by the XPE operating system The files cannot be restored to the AMOS operating environment directly The AMD disk files inside the GHO file can be restored but only to an NTFS UDF or FAT32 formatted disks One way to restore the data is to install a UDF formatted DVD RAM media into the DVD RAM drive Using the Ghost Explorer restore the AMD file to DVD RAM media as long as the selected AMD file size is less than 4 2 gigabytes Then the operator must define the AMD file as another AMOS disk device Modify the TEST INI and boot the new configuration Data from the backup is accessible to AMOS once the disk is mounted Any AMD disk file of any size can be restored to any internal hard drive or USB hard
219. nd load your application programs onto the NEW AMD disk file on the RAID volume Disk Defragmenter To clean up a disk volume and defragment the file system select the Disk Defragmenter tool from the lt Computer Management gt application Select the volume to clean up from the upper panel Then select the Defragment button in the lower panel A sample session is shown below This process requires 15 free space on the drive to complete If you generate a large AMD file that consumes all the storage you cannot defrag that volume This process is necessary to fit as much data onto the drive and to be able to fit the data onto a CD R media for a system Ghost backup AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 6 34 Chapter Six 18 re Vew Window Help Lei zi Gm rg Computer Management Lic I il Side Tashi 4 E Event Viewer Des Poder Local Les sj Grows a Performance Loge ard Aaria Device Hanger Sj Storage Dick Defragmenter Cenk Maragernent Ezbeated chek come Before cef ners oa Donc Ti i NE Istrreried d e usage after dedi grena Hor EET Pa Stee ess Report Erprieri ckame C Defragmen ng 69 Compacting Fir Figure 6 8 Disk Defragmenter How to set XPE IP s 1 From the AMOS console VTM1 Terminal Enter to display the lt AM8000 Diagnostics window a Select Tools Control Panel 3 Inthe Control Panel screen a Enter N or to select Network Connections P
220. nded for authorized technical personnel only Graphics Conventions and Definitions Like other documents in the Alpha Micro documentation library this manual contains a number of standard symbols to make our text easier to read and understand Symbol Meaning TEXT Bold text in an example of user computer communication represents the characters Eee you type When the text is all capitals type exactly what s shown TEXT We use text in this typeface for characters the Server displays on the screen Ro D program examples and command format When showing command format all capitals indicates a constant part of the command line such as the command name while lower case indicates variable information such as a file name Text in this bold italic typeface is a reference to part of a previous command format description or sample This says Halt and lets you know an important warning or message is being presented that could cause serious damage or inconvenience if ignored This Hint symbol indicates a helpful bit of information or a short cut that could save you time or trouble This Remember symbol indicates something you should keep in mind while following sets of instructions These key symbols refer to the enter key on the keyboard The name of the key bu appears inside the key symbol AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 Introducing AMOS 8 x Servers Page 1 15 Text Conventions and Definitio
221. ning systems restaurant management medical office billing laboratory analysis and many others Please see your VAR for details Office Information Products Several office information products are available separately from your local Alpha Micro VAR The office information products series includes AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 AMOS Software Applications Page 5 3 o AlphaMAIL is an electronic mail system for sending and receiving messages and reminders among multiple users and combined with AlphaTCP over the Internet o AlphaFAX an easy to use faxing program provides the ability to automatically send faxes from within application programs just like printing to a local printer o MULTI is a window based environment manager letting the user access multiple programs on one terminal at the same time and providing a number of desk accessory features including a phone list alarm clock notepad and others o VersiCOMM is a versatile general purpose communications system capable of performing a broad range of communication services See your VAR for more information on these and other Alpha Micro office information products When upgrading to AMOS 8 x please check for update patches to the above software packages Most software had to be updated to run under AMOS 8 x ON LINE DOCUMENTATION On line documentation is installed on each system The Adobe Acrobat Reader is also installed on the Server The Reader can be
222. nother account Here are some examples of FMDOS FMDOS PAYROL DAT To copy a file from a different XPE directory to another AMOS account or give the file a different name specify something like this AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 TODOS amp FMDOS Page 10 5 FMDOS ONE TXT 23 4 2C NUSERNONETEST TXT This example copies the XPE file ONETEST TXT from the C USER directory to the file ONE TXT in account 23 4 If the destination file already exists FMDOS overwrites it If you are more familiar with Windows command syntax use it For example enter the previous command as FMDOS C USER ONETEST TXT ONE TXT 23 4 FMDOS automatically truncates file names when copying XPE files to AMOS if they are longer than six characters so let FMDOS shorten the file name for you instead of specifying a destination file FMDOS 23 4 NEWSYSTM TXT This syntax creates the AMOS file NEWSYS TXT COPYING FILES TO ANOTHER PC COMPUTER To copy AMOS files to another PC copy the AMOS files to the XPE partition with the TODOS command Then copy the files over the network to move them to the other PC COPYING FILES TO OTHER ALPHA MICRO COMPUTERS One way to copy files from computer to computer is to use the AlphaTCP File Transfer Protocol FTP across the network This software must be installed on both computers See the AlphaTCP User s Guide and AlphaTCP Administrator s Guide for more information on this protocol If the Server has a SC
223. ns AMD AlphaMicroDisk is a pseudo disk drive XPE Windows XP Embedded operating system Select Tools With the mouse select the program option Tools and left click ESC Type the enclosed key in this case the ESC key Device Manager XPE application program or a window title enclosed in braces Ports Ports is a program option under the Device Manager example above Menu item Menu item is a title of one item in a menu or application screen SERVICE INFORMATION The following sections give support information for the Alpha Micro AMOS 8 x Server Systems Post Sales Support Alpha Micro provides a comprehensive post sales support program for its entire product line Our Technical Support organization is structured to provide the Alpha Micro dealer with fast access to support assistance and information Our customer commitment is maintained through the expertise and skills of our competent professional staff whose dedication assures all Alpha Micro customers the maximum benefits of quality support Alpha Micro warrants its products through our VAR network Alpha Micro will repair or replace a defective product under warranty without cost to the purchaser Should you wish to arrange for factory warranty service for your equipment you should obtain a Return Authorization Number from the Alpha Micro Order Administration For Further Assistance If you are unable to contact your dealer Alpha Micro will be glad to refer you to
224. o find the location of any file errors DSKANA detects The C option is discussed in the next section To see the list of DSKANA options type DSKANA without specifying a device name The CHECK Option and Automatic Backups At times use DSKANA to examine a disk without re writing the bitmap especially when using an automatic backup method such as a command file or the Task Manager to perform the backup The reason for this is simple assume you run DSKANA at night as part of an automatic backup procedure If anyone on the Server leaves a file open such as an AlphaVUE or AlphaWRITE document on the device DSKANA is checking DSKANA doesn t take the open file into account when it rewrites the bitmap for the device When the person returns in the morning and writes the file to the disk it causes a bitmap error because the Server didn t know the file was open This process could corrupt the disk causing data loss To run DSKANA without rewriting the bitmap use the C option switch You see DSKANA s normal display when you use the C option except for the Rewriting BITMAP message AMOS Formatted SCSI Drives ONLY When installing a new AMOS formatted hard drive follow these steps Power down the system and install the drive onto the appropriate disk interface channel Power up the system and verify that the new drive is detected during the Adaptec device scan Allow the system to boot Select gt Configure menu of the lt AM8
225. o use Network Tab When AMOS 8 x 1s installed the communication network adapters present on the hardware should be identified in the Network menu as shown in Figure 3 11 If more than one adapter is displayed on the screen select the one you want to use with AMOS A yellow double headed arrow should indicate the selected network adapter Figure 3 11 illustrates how the AM 8000 is shipped with the Gigabit port mapped for AMOS use This high speed port allows 10 100 1000Mbps connections depending on your network equipment Please use the fastest routers and switches for connection to the AM8000 Server For Series 3 Am8000 or Eagle 800 the restriction for more that 2 network adapters is allowed The AMS8000 exe 1 1 939B3 and later allow you to select which network adapter is used AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 AM8000 Configuration Program Page 3 11 The later version of the AM8000 exe program only uses two network MAC addresses for the system security verification LLLLZILZLITITIMENEENNNNNNENENMNNNE 0x Genera Amos Disks al Tess Seis Fors Printers Meteor Sos Devices mL idame 1 intel PRO Toe MT Sere Adapter KR Aciapime 2 ine Fy PROS Seer cipis Een up se Figure 3 11 Network Tab for AM8000 System Figure 3 12 illustrates the network mapping for an Eagle 800 system SS xj Genera Amos Disks Vetus Temenais Sens Pons Pamen Maweni sos Devices E Ethers adapisnm detected om tis PC
226. obLevel 0 Create Editor ock for 171CC JobLevel Enabli erlapped disk access Liste Si for socket requests fro Creating VIMI process AmpcLite AmpcLite exe OnAccept called for virtual terminal 1 Figure 6 13 Selecting Norton Ghost From the menu in Figure 6 14 the system administrator can Backup Restore and View the Backup log files Selecting Ghost utilities allows access to the Ghost Explorer This utility can inspect the Ghost backup files on CDs or disk files A specific file can be restored out of the compressed Ghost backup by selecting the file name and right click A popup Restore To destination input box will display With the browse button select a location to restore the file Remember that Ghost cannot restore a file if the same filename is open and in use This could be the case if AMOS is up and running and you selected the AMD disk file that the system is booted from You will not be able to restore the disk file to the original location with the same name You must select a different location or different folder name Make sure you have enough disk space to restore the file to the restore location or an error will occur LU Before executing an Image Backup you must shutdown the AM8000 Exe by selecting File Exit b or X and confirm with the Quit button AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 System Administration Page 6 43 Norton Ghost Le Ghost Basic shoal Basie d Backup ei Backup your Semple ta
227. ocuments and perhaps a modem for serial data transmission via the telephone lines Your Value Added Reseller VAR may have provided these items as part of your computer system purchase If you want to expand these Servers in the future by adding additional storage and backup devices see the AM 5000 Service Manual or Eagle 800 Service Manual for a diagram of where additional peripherals should be located in the chassis SOFTWARE FEATURES Computer hardware is all potential and no action until the software programs instruct it to do something All AMOS 8 x Servers run the same AMOS 8 x dual operating system software The underlying operating system is Windows XP Embedded which is a componentized subset of Windows XP Professional and does the low level work for the AMOS 8 x system This software component is referred to as XPE XPE provides disk caching network serial USB LPT ports SCSI controllers IDE devices and video display drivers to AMOS 8 x The XPE software is hidden from normal users of AMOS AMOS runs under the control of the AM8000 EXE program on the XPE side The AMOS 8 x Operating System does all of the other functions that you are normally used to Additionally a special version of AMOS called EAMOS Embedded AMOS boots up underneath the AM 8000 system to provide access to AMOS controlled serial ports and the AMOS Software Security Device SSD There are small differences in the XPE software for the different system
228. oint emulation B0 Replace Batteries B1 Data that was backed up is not guaranteed BB Diagnostic test DO 6242 Clock calendar chip failed DE The DEAD error AD The DEAD error meaning the Serial I O subsystem has no power Please turn it on E2 Next byte will be displayed EF Supervisor Stack is 83 3 used F0 Bus error F1 Start of Word Display Address error F6 Privilege violation FE Start of Long Word Display FF Next byte will be displayed AM113 50 terminal 1 has been initialized Any serial port controlled by the AM 113 board has this message AM8000 DIAGNOSTIC COMMANDS There are a few AM8000 Diagnostics commands which are helpful in troubleshooting a system problem To execute the command select the AM8000 Diagnostic window and type on the console keyboard the command and an Input box will be displayed with the command and press Enter The following list shows some of the most used commands Some of the responses will be displayed in the bottom status line of Diagnostic Window or will open a new display window LE List the errors into the Test error log Float The Float command will toggle between the traditional Floating point emulation method and the new native code AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Chapter 10 TODOS and FMDOS HOW TO COPY FILES BETWEEN OPERATING SYSTEMS The next section gives some general information about copying files then specific instructions on usin
229. omputer chassis Make sure the AC power cord will reach from the back panel to an electrical outlet and that there are enough electrical outlets for all terminals and printers Make sure the terminal cabling will reach from the back panel of the Server to the terminals and printers See the following section on Power and Cable Connections for more tips and suggestions Environmental Requirements It is important to remember that the cleaner the environment the more efficiently the Server performs Treat the Server with respect For example do not place coffee cups or soda cans on top of the main enclosure where they can spill If spilled liquid happens to reach the circuit boards inside the computer it could cause a failure In general install the Server in an area where people do not eat drink or smoke since all of these activities can cause contamination problems Try not to place the Server in a high traffic area This typically creates more dirt and dust which can clog the air intakes of the Server chassis This will cause cooling problems because of the dirt accumulation A side effect of a high traffic area is static electrical discharge which can cause system resets This can be avoided by installing the Server in a better environment For information on cleaning the Server and taking care of its components refer to Chapter 8 Preventive Maintenance The selected location for the Server must be within certain temperature and hum
230. onment Sgctem ctartup en Sunday Fobruary 15 208k at 10 21 23 AH DEIER release version 1 0 975r Startup argumentzr AWi bE SsS HOH L ams B IHI AE ZS High resnlgtinm timer Frequency 3 579585 Mhz Hibgh resnlstium timer tick 2707300945 nampsecanis RHBEBU system ssperwizsnr is CDTXAHBEBBITIRHHSTSD ep Startup parameter si will lead AHEDO HOH monitor from supervisor disk Startup parameter P will lead amBB THI From superyviser disk ter initia Startup parameter Fa will start with jourmel trace on Starting the I 8 driver threads Iaitializimg the AMITa S0 coprocessor RH113 58 Procesor debkected Dick BIR azcigned ta C VHBBlU HEU emp As the Server boots it reads RH113 58 Processor has been reset and initislized the AM8000 INI file and Sgccha thread is running a i Rtcchm thread ix rumming builds the operating system Sedchm thread is running TEE E crc tibus uoi d artim nterface Pa inum peecessor interface is running Changes to the AM8000 INI Serial port X veDHMi detected and available file are needed whenever AH113 50 peecessor dish acsigeed te DIUAHBBUEBADSERHIES AHD e x Serial port AN AED detected and available hardware is added like Scanniog for Ethernet adapters done Scanning fer S05 amd ATAPI deulcwr dono Readimg Inzksll cEq File For configuration settings drives tapes terminals jf printers or new programs are wT mew added into system memory Figure 3 1 AM 8000 Syste
231. onsole keyboard 2 Press to select the AIC 7902 B controller and press 3 Configure View SCSI Controller settings is highlighter press ENTER 4 Press to select SCSI Controller Termination press 5 Press to select Disabled 6 Press to exit and press to exit 7 Press to display EXIT Utility gt 8 Press to select Yes press 9 Press to reboot the Server On the later AM8000 Series I systems with the Adaptec 39320s controller the new BIOS has automatic termination at the controller end so disabling termination is not needed AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 Appendix F AM 113 xx Info amp CPU PIC Procedure AM 113 XX CMOS SETUP PROCEDURE This procedure is currently for diagnostic purposes only The normal setup of this controller is to boot from the PCI bus To access the multi function co processor setup menu plug a serial terminal into port 0 of the AM 113 xx During the boot process when the message in the lt AM8000 Diagnostic window shows the code CS press on the terminal connected to Port 0 of the AM 113 xx board This will interrupt the boot process and access the CMOS Configuration menu You have approximately three seconds to press the ESC The CMOS menu looks like this ALPHA MICRO Configuration Menu Primary boot device type PCI Primary boot device unit 00 Alternate boot device type None Alternate boot device unit
232. or second PCI board TRMDEF COM11 PCCOM 13 19200 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 TRMDEF COM12 PCCOM 14 19200 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 TRMDEF COM13 PCCOM 15 19200 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 TRMDEF COM14 PCCOM 16 19200 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 TRMDEF COM15 PCCOM 17 19200 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 TRMDEF COM16 PCCOM 20 19200 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 TRMDEF COM17 PCCOM 21 19200 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 TRMDEF COM18 PCCOM 22 19200 AM62C 200 200 200 EDITOR 10 TRMDEF LPT1 PCLPT 1 TELTYP 100 100 100 TRMDEF VTSER PSEUDO NULL 80 80 80 TRMDEF NETSER PSEUDO NULL 80 80 80 TRMDEF TCPEMU PSEUDO NULL 80 80 80 TRMDEF NETLOG PSEUDO NULL 80 80 80 TRMDEF DUMMY PSEUDO NULL 80 80 80 TRMDEF Required JOBS 40 JOBALC VTM1 VTM2 VTM3 VTM4 JOBALC VTM6 VTM7 VIM8 VTM5 JOBALC JOB1 JOB2 JOB3 JOB4 onboard ports JOBALC JBPC1 JBPC2 JOBALC JBPC3 JBPC4 JBPC5 JBPC6 JBPC7 JBPC8 JBPC9 JBPC10 JOBALC JBPC11 JBPC12 JBPC13 JBPC14 JBPC15 JBPC16 JBPC17 JBPC18 JOBALC TCPEMU NETLOG NETSER VTSER LPT1 SCZDSP SCZPC SYS DEVTBL DSK DEVTBL NEW DEVTBL SUB DEVTBL TRM RES MEM STRO BITMAP DSK BITMAP NEW BITMAP SUB ERSATZ ERSATZ INI B 20 reserve 20 more blank ersatz slots MSGINI 100K NETINI ETH101 NIN SYSTEM SYSMSG USA SYSTEM AMSORT SYS SYSTEM ISAM SYS SYSTEM CMDLIN SYS SYSTEM DVR TRM DVR SYSTEM DVR MEM DVR SYSTEM DVR RES DVR SYSTEM DVR NEW DVR SYSTEM DVR S
233. out until the original DVD media is installed and mounted The same is true for the MAKBD DIRBD DBRES programs with either BluRay or DVD RAM media VersiCOMM considerations When using TRANS or RETRV with AMOS 8 0 on the remote system use the NOHOG switch Within COMM make sure JWAIT upper right is ON and that FLOW HW ON Usually this is handled in the TALK INI with SFLOW ON and JWAIT With respect to AUTOLOG SLAVE LIT currently only works correctly on the PC COM serial ports Within AUTLOG be sure to SET FLOW RTS as RTS CTS hardware flow control is required for reliable behavior Make sure the cabling supports the flow control signals When MONTSTing you may notice that the MONTST arguments get TODOS ed to XPE This provides backup copies and maintains consistency When modifying the AM8000 INI file always MONTST or TODOS the INT to update the XPE copy especially the AM8000 INI which is used by AM8000 EXE on the first boot The MONTST procedure always transfers using the AMOS file name 6 3 format Alpha Micro has provided backup copies of the original AM8000 MON There is an AMSAFE BOOT MON and AMSafeBoot INI in the AM8000 folder as an emergency backup should the AM8000 INI accidentally be erased This allows the Server to boot and allows the user to TODOS the working AMS000 INI file AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 7 8 Chapter Seven o If during the boot the system hangs with Initializing the AM 113 50
234. ovides the following system functions o SSD Software Security Device chip and a System Security device o Four high performance serial ports o Hardware timer o Optional front panel interface port o One serial I O paddle card interface AM 8000 only o Uninterruptible power source UPS monitor port for future software enhancement AM 8000 system only The Eagle 800 systems uses the AM 113 45 board which has no paddle card interface or UPS port and the AM 8000 systems uses the AM 113 50 board which has one serial I O paddle card bus for externally connecting up to 15 serial I O cards 8 ports per card via the AM 3501 or AM 905 I O expansion chassis Memory The AMS000 Series III has the ability up to 64GB of DDR2 ram at 667Mhz The AM 8000 Series II system board has eight sockets in which main memory DIMMs Dual Inline Memory Modules PC3200 Registered are installed Each processor controls four DIMM sockets The AM 8000 Series II supports a minimum of 512MB and a maximum of 8GB The AM 8000 Series 1 Multiprocessor system board has four sockets in which main memory DIMMs Dual Inline Memory Modules PC2100 Registered are installed The AM 8000 supports a minimum of 512MB and a maximum of 4GB The Eagle 800 Series I system board has three sockets in which PC2700 DIMM memory is used to a maximum of 3GB The Eagle 800 Series II system board has two sockets in which PC3200 DIMM memory is used to a maximum of 2GB The Series III Eagle 80
235. ows graphic printer See Chapter 6 for more information on this setup uq Any printer seen by XPE including USB and Network printers can be defined as an AMOS LPT printer None of these assignments count against the AMOS user license AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 3 10 Chapter Three AMS8000 Configuration General Amos Disks Virtual Terminals Serial Ports Printers Network Sesi Devices LPT1 Generic 7 Text Only x Raw Data Mode gt gt gt gt gt IV RawMode LPT2 HP Laserjet Ill R RawMode LPT3 HP LaserJet IIl RawMode LPTs O i i i Fr Lete Gg r ier EL F Besitos Lets e Mite LPTS pO F ResMede erm fF Rast eris T F Besitose era E eu E eme PE Ee Cancet zeg Figure 3 10 LPT Printer assignment In Figure 3 10 the standard Generic Text only printer is assigned to LPT1 and the HP LaserJet III is assigned to both LPT2 and LPT3 LPT2 is setup for Raw printing mode and LPT3 is set up for 10 point Arial font Any Windows network printer that is added under the XPE Control Panel Printers and Faxes application can be assigned to AMOS To add a new printer LPT4 click on the left box button and the Printer browse window will display Use the down arrow button to find a local or network printer to assign To select a Font Click on the Right hand box and the XPE printer properties page will be displayed Use the scroll boxes to find the font and point size you wish t
236. peat the reassignment for ports 7 to 10 If you install the second 8 port card the driver will take COM 13 and you must reassign the ports from port 11 to 18 1 When the System displays the 5 SEC count down Press on console keyboard In Task manager gt click on NEW TASK a Inthe Task Box type in EXPLORER Enter b Minimize the Task Manager box click on in the upper right hand corner 3 In the Explorer application a Select Folders in Task bar to Split screen b Select Control Panel c Select System and double click d Select gt Hardware gt Device Manager 4 Device Manger window Find the Yellow under MultiFunction Controller a Select Yellow mark unknown hardware right click Select Update Driver button b Select Install from a List or Specific Location Advanced Select NEXT c Deselect Search Removable media Select gt Browse AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 System Administration Page 6 41 moe g In the Pull down box Browse to C AM8000 WinXP ESC100 a Select gt OK b Select gt NEXT Let the driver install Select gt NEXT when asked Now Select under ports right click Select gt UPDATE Driver Install from the Recommended Location Select gt NEXT When done Select gt Finish 5 When the lt Device Manger gt is finished the system should have PORTS COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 COMS5 COM6 6 Ifthe ports are numbered 1 2 4 5 6 7 the
237. pha Micro Server to communicate using the popular TCP IP protocol This software allows you to connect to the Internet send and receive mail and transfer files o AlphaNET allows the Server to connect to older legacy AMOS computers Serial and Ethernet networks are supported o Programs called print spoolers let you use one or more printers at the same time without tying up a user terminal o The Task Manager lets you schedule multiple background tasks to run without operator control at preset times and dates o A sophisticated command language allows you to invoke a stream of commands and program input predefined by you by entering a single command o The business oriented AlphaBASIC and AlphaBASIC PLUS programming languages are uniquely suited to the programming of business applications software packages o ISAM Indexed Sequential Access Method Plus a machine language file management system callable from AlphaBASIC or assembly language programs provides a method for quick information organization and retrieval o AlphaFAX is optionally available for faxing documents to clients o The VUE screen oriented text editor provides an easy to use tool for creating documents o Asimple system initialization procedure allows you to quickly change the types of peripheral devices connected to the Server change user memory allocations and customize the Server to your exact needs o Support for many different kinds of printers and termina
238. ports must be reassigned sequentially NSM ES EOP ROTOR Re OAS Hr hg ao sp aa Select COMA right click gt Select Properties Select gt Port Settings Select gt Advanced button Select the Com port number DOWN ARROW Move the Scroll bar up with the Mouse Find and Select COM3 and Select OK Select OK Select COMS right click gt Select Properties Select Port Settings Select gt Advanced Select the Com port number Down Arrow Move the Scroll bar up with the Mouse Find and Select COM4 and Select OK Select OK Now Select COM6 right click gt Select Properties Select Port Settings Select Advanced Select the Com port number Down Arrow Move the Scroll bar up with the Mouse Find and Select COMS and Select OK Select OK Now Select COM7 right click gt Select Properties Select gt Port Settings Select Advanced Select the Com port number Down Arrow Move the Scroll bar up with the Mouse Find and Select COM6 and Select OK bb Select OK p Close Device Manager with the X in the upper right with the mouse Select OK 3 Inthe Explorer application a Find and Select the C AM8000 Folder b Find Configure AM8000 and double click 4 In the lt AM8000 Configure window a Select Serial Ports Tab Make sure that the serial ports are sequentially numbered from 1 to 7 in the left box
239. pper tray before power up The RAID subsystem as shipped from Alpha Micro will have a working operating system installed on the drive and the second drive mirrored AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page H 2 Appendix H Alpha Microsystems provides a Bootable Recovery CD as the primary system recovery for the Eagle 800 system In the unlikely event that both drives fail do the following With the power off take your new disk drive and install it into the lower drive bay of the Eagle chassis Move the primary IDE channel cable from the RAID chassis and plug it into the new drive Install a four pin power connector to power the drive Install the AMOS 8 x Bootable CD into the CD DVD drive tray Power up and boot from the CD Select the internal drive as the primary disk to restore to from the CD Restore the system software to the drive When Ghost is finished make sure that the system boots from the primary IDE drive Install any other data from tape or DVD RAM Shut down the system and power off Remove the IDE cable and power connector Move the new drive from the lower internal drive bay and place it into the RAID drive tray Use the mounting screws provided Slide the tray back into the primary slot Move the primary IDE cable back to the RAID s input connector Make sure the power connector is installed Place you new secondary drive in the lower tray Power up the system and it should boot from the RAID just as it did before The RAID con
240. programmer number 4 4 Prompt symbol 1 14 R Rack Mount chassis 1 2 RAID bootable 6 33 internal IDE H 1 Real Time Clock 1 9 Rear panel 2 4 deskside chassis 2 4 REDALL command 6 13 Remote administration 6 39 Repeater Wide SCSI AM 441 E 2 Reset button deskside chassis 2 3 Reshipping 2 2 Restart system 3 14 Restore Ghost software 6 47 RJ 45 connector A 2 A 3 A 4 A 6 A 8 RS 232 cables A 2 definition A 1 standard A 1 S SCSI configuration 1 6 device types E 1 SCSI devices configure 3 12 SCSI disk drive E 3 external termination E 3 SCSI dispatcher software E 4 SCSI termination E 3 Serial I O Capability 1 8 Serial ports configure 3 6 connectors A 1 external 1 2 installation 6 40 renumbering 6 40 Server booting 3 1 reshipping 2 2 shutdown 2 11 SET DSKERR command 6 13 SETJOB command 6 10 6 11 AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 7 Shipping damage 2 1 Site preparation 2 6 environmental requirements 2 6 physical requirements 2 6 Software 1 10 5 1 5 4 Adobe Acrobat 1 10 AMOS 1 10 Norton Ghost 1 10 SCSI dispatcher E 4 XPE 1 10 Software Compatibility 1 11 Software Features 1 10 Software Security Device SSD 1 6 2 3 Software utilities xAdmin 7 10 Static electricity 2 7 Status display codes 9 1 Streaming Tape 4 6 Support information 1 15 telephone number 1 15 Sw
241. r EXTERNAL SCSI TERMINATOR The preferred method of terminating the SCSI bus in an AM 8000 Server is the installation of an external terminator The external terminator must be an active LVD model part number PRA 00222 20 and is included with the AM 8000 The main CPU board terminates one end of the SCSI bus and the other end of the bus is terminated with the external active terminator The AM 8000 main CPU board provides the termination power for the SCSI bus To use the external terminator make sure none of the SCSI peripherals inside the computer are terminated To install the terminator slide it over the connector and screw into place Figure E 1 Active LVD External Terminator ATTACHING EXTERNAL DEVICES To attach an external SCSI device remove the terminator from the external SCSI port of the AM 8000 Server However make sure the SCSI bus is still terminated at both ends To do so install the external active terminator in the unused SCSI I O port of the external SCSI device at the physical end of the SCSI bus Attaching an external narrow SCSI device such as a tape drive to a Server using the Wide SCSI bus is a special case Any narrow external device must be the last device on the cable with all wide devices inside the chassis Make sure all 16 lines of the Wide SCSI bus are terminated with an active terminator To do so Use an external wide to narrow SCSI cable which actively terminates the high nine lines of th
242. r The MAKDVD program will write the data to the media and give a progress report on the written When done it exits to the AMOS dot To mount the new backup type DVD ENTER The system will respond by mounting the DVD RAM media and display the disk labels read from the media XPE ADMINISTRATION There are a few procedures that the System Administrator must set up for an installation These have to do with Network setup Disk and RAID setup These and others are normally controlled through the Control Panel program The XPE system has its own IP address and AMOS 8 x has its own unique IP If your installation has a DHCP Server the XPE system will obtain its IP from the DHCP Server This is the AMOS 8 x Server Default as shipped from Alpha Micro The System Control Panel lt lt lt Fie Edit Mew Favonnes Teale Hele To access the XPE system go to lt Control o 5 k EI rit e Search S imanin IS Go oX 9 Ga Panel gt Select gt Tools item from the Addeen O Carre d Pred lt AM8000 System Diagnostics window Fee oe S Je fts rmumcdly Dub Aquat ear comput This is shown in figure 6 1 K ga MESI inate oc amin Madd or Remove P Intel or remove pr H Hh Y te amp This one window has the greatest power B roe bd digg Adres amet Tech Configure seet pets Sources D Maintsins OOBE disc i TE dae Sober iE and largest options to control the AMOS z 2 deeg H eee RAAE 8 x Servers settings
243. r NETSER VTSER LOGGER NETLOG and TCPEMU The WAIT gives the operating system time to initialize the new job and process other commands in the SETJOB statement For example WAIT SPOOL1 7 Three job types on an AMOS 8 x Server require better job servicing They are TCPEMU TELNED and SMTPD These jobs can have the job scheduling priority changed from 1 the default for all jobs to 2 the recommended setting At the end of the AM8000 INI file after the TCPEMU job has been initialized enter the following statements LOG OPR this process must be run from OPR SLEEP 1 time for tcpemu to finish initializing JOBLVL TCPEMU 2 set a higher job level SLEEP 1 allow time for tcpemu to finish JobLvl JOBLVL TELNED 2 set a higher job level JOBLVL SMTPD 2 set a higher job level LOG SYS back to sys The JOBLVL program must be run from the OPR account The SLEEP 1 gives time necessary for TCPEMU to login and change its job level before the TELNED job changes its job level 8 After adding the SETJOB and WAIT statements you are ready to perform a test reboot using the procedure described earlier in this chapter Changing User Memory How much of the Server s total available memory assigned to each job is determined by the memory parameters in the SETJOB statement or the MEMORY command If you decide to add jobs or alter memory allocations first refer to the System Operator
244. r DDR DIMM sockets for support of up to 4GB of PC2100 Registered DDR RAM Support for ATA 100 66 33 IDE and ATAPI devices Two 9 pin serial I O ports with modem control One 25 pin SPP ECP EPP parallel port Integrated video graphics controller for system display console PS 2 keyboard and mouse ports CPU temperature and voltage monitoring Expansion slots for additional serial I O and other specialized functions Two USB ports on the back and two on the front Deskside Chassis front ports CMOS BIOS setup for configuration and boot options Eagle 800 Series Server System Board The Single Processor system board provides the Eagle 800 with One Athlon M XP high speed processor Two ATA 133 IDE channels for ATAPI Devices Fast Ethernet 100 10 Mbps communication ports Three DDR DIMM sockets for support of up to 3GB of PC2700 DDR RAM Two 9 pin serial I O port with modem control One 25 pin SPP ECP EPP parallel port Integrated video graphics controller for system display console PS 2 keyboard and mouse ports AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 Introducing AMOS 8 x Servers Page 1 5 o CPU temperature and voltage monitoring o Four USB ports on the back and two on the front o CMOS BIOS setup for configuration and boot options Eagle 800 Series Il Server System Board The Single Processor system board provides the Eagle 800 with o One Sempron high speed processor o Two ATA 133 IDE channels for ATAPI Devices o Two SA
245. r board is connected to the AM 349 20 SIO Buffer interface board with a 34 twisted paired cable with 68 pin connectors The AM 349 20 SIO Buffer interface board cleans up and re buffers all SIO bus signals A chain of AM 359 boards is then connected with a 60 pin cable The AM 359 boards are addressed 0 to 14 Only 15 boards are supported in the AM 905 31 SIO Expansion box o The AM 359 00 amp 01 boards are the only external serial I O paddle cards that work properly with the AM 8000 The EAMOS INI file for an AM 8000 Server using the AM 113 50 board must reserve 124 SIO slots The INI file supports the 4 on board ports and the 15 AM 359 boards The EAMOS INI file can be modified to only reserve as many SIO slots as there are physically installed AM 359 boards This action will decrease the time it takes to boot the controller This is why there is a required 4 second sleep statement at the top of every AM8000 INI file All this takes is a semi colon in column 1 in front of the AMSIO line of the EAMOS INI The EAMOS INI file uses SIOO IDV port numbers 0 3 for the on board ports The AM 359 ports use the SIO1 IDV ports 0 to 167 octal The PCSIO IDV is the only IDV used in the AM8000 INI file to control all the SIO ports on the AM 113 50 board PCSIO 1 to 174 octal link the SIO slot in the EAMOS INI to the TRMDEF in the AMS000 INI The AM8000 INI file TRMDEF line controls the terminal driver and baud that the physical terminal uses The
246. r is installed right click on printer name and Select Properties 3 Select gt Advanced tab and verify that the Driver input box shows Generic Text Only If not Select down arrow button or New Driver button to change the driver While on the Advanced tab Select Print Processor button The Default data type dialog box should display RAW Select OK to exit these dialog boxes Then click on Apply Select OK to exit the Properties menu From the lt AM8000 System Diagnostics window Select Configure wo Dm uH o n S Select Printers 10 For the new printer Check the RAWMODE check box on the right side of the menu 11 Select OK The printer configurations are always saved to memory and disk To finish up you need to define this printer as LPT3 in the next section Using XPE Printers Using Windows XPE Printers Before AMOS can use the XPE printer it must be fully installed and tested from the XPE side If the printer will not work from Windows applications it won t work from AMOS To test the printer on the XPE side double click on any text file and select Print from the file menu to verify the printer produces output To configure AMOS to use an XPE printer it must be defined in the Printers tab of the lt AM8000 Configure see Chapter 3 Once a XPE printer is mapped to the LPTx channel in the AM8000 program you then need to modify a TEST INI file to define it to AMO
247. r on the network to Remove the check in the check box Select gt OK to finish the disabling procedure Figure 6 10 Disabling Folder Shares AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 6 36 Chapter Six Configuration for a Complete Network Firewall Follow the procedure below to verify that the Network Firewall is enabled with ALL ports disabled This procedure will place the machine setup back into the standard settings as shipped from Alpha Micro for all AMOS 8 x Servers This firewall protects the XPE operating system from unauthorized intrusion No ports are allowed Do not allow any folders to be Shared By keeping the system folders Not Shared peer to peer viruses will be kept off of the Server 1 From the lt AM8000 Diagnostics window a Select gt Tools gt Control Panel 2 In the Control Panel Right Panel double click Select Network Connections a Select Local Area Connection and Right Click and Select Properties b Select Internet Protocol TCP IP with left mouse click c Select Properties button d The Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window will be displayed i Select Advanced button e The Advanced TCP IP Settings window will display Select Options tab i TCP IP Filtering will be highlighted in Blue ii Select Properties button f Inthe TCP IP Filtering window i Verify that the Enable TCP IP Filtering All adapters check box is che
248. r takes about 2 hours During this time a 30 reduction in drive response is observed This is normal for the RAID Level 1 subsystem Figure H 1 AM 452 IDE RAID Level 1 Subsystem Once the drive is mirrored the speed penalty disappears and the disk response time returns to normal Before removing the lower drive tray make sure there is no disk activity by observing the HD LEDs Unlock the lower tray and with the handle pull straight out Replace the drive tray with another spare drive and slide the tray in until it seats Lock the drive into place and make sure the selector switch is down in the Default position Then the RAID will rebuild the primary drive to the secondary During drive removal or if a drive fails the audible alarm will be heard The white push button when pressed IN will turn off the alarm With the button out the alarm will sound as the abnormal condition alert This RAID subsystem is seen as one disk drive with two partitions to the XPE operating system Every Eagle 800 has this configuration when it leaves the factory The drive in the upper tray is formatted and loaded with the system software RAID INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION INFORMATION There is one restriction with the AM 452 RAID controller If both drive trays have no working operating system installed you cannot load the system software onto an empty drive with the Ghost utility The manufacturer warns that a Working operating system must be in the u
249. r the Serial Ports tab of the lt AM8000 Configure program See Chapter 3 As an AMOS only serial printer the serial printer can be plugged into one of the AM 113 serial ports or into one of the PC COM ports which are mapped for AMOS use In the AM8000 INI file make the appropriate changes to the TRMDEF for that COM port to use the TELTYP terminal driver and remove the EDITOR statement if present Change the baud rate to one appropriate for the printer that will be used Adding a Printer Additional LPTx ports up to 16 can include Windows network printers or USB printers connected to the AMOS 8 x Server Remember to add the printer through the XPE lt Control panel gt Printers and Faxes option The printer TRMDEF statements for PCLPT 1 to 20 octal are valid The PCLPT interface driver is embedded in the AMOS monitor therefore you do not need to add a DEVTBL line or a SYSTEM statement to load the printer driver Verify that the lt AM8000 Configure program has the LPTXx device defined before modifying the TEST INI file Setting Up The AMOS Spoolers The print spooler is a background process that handles the transferring of print files to the printer Print jobs can be queued to the spooler by applications or by the AMOS PRINT command AMOS offers two types of print spoolers For this example we will illustrate the original version which is the memory based spooler with a background job for each spooler The job needs a dummy
250. ral Amos Disks Virtual Terminals Serial Ports Printers Network Scsi Devices Minimize the diagnostic window after startup I Confirm quitting 48000 Iv Use Metropolis terminal output for LB asic Ram size in Mb 200 Number of error logs to save fi 0 Magic Code Figure 3 4 AM8000 Configuration General Tab AMOS 8 x creates Boot Diagnostic Logs which record the boot process If the system fails a complete system memory dump is logged The next input box allows the administrator to select how many of these logs are to be kept on the disk If this setting is greater than 2 the oldest file is deleted before a new one is allocated on the hard drive These files are allocated each time the system boots These logs are located in the C AM8000 Error logs folder The Magic Code is keyed into the next input box This code mates together the AM 113 board and the main system board The magic code is entered only when the AM 113 board or the main system board is changed There is a white tag on each main system board with a 12 digit number This number is branded into the AM 113 board Once this code is entered it will enable the SSD to function This only needs to be done once for each installation All systems shipped from Alpha Micro have this number already installed In Appendix F this process is explained in detail To save the settings configured click on the OK button or Cancel to leave it alone The save proces
251. ral switch or hub is required to perform the task of re broadcasting the Ethernet data signals to all other computers connected on a network Such switches are commonly available from commercial sources 10BaseT and 100BaseT connections use 100 ohm unshielded twisted pairs Level 5 cable has four twisted pairs Two of these pairs is used for transmitting and receiving data These cables terminate in eight pin RJ 45 connectors with the following pin assignments RJ 45 Signal Name Pin Color 1 W ORG TXD 2 ORG TXD 3 W GRN RXD 6 GRN RXD 5 W BLU P3 4 BLU P3 7 W BRN P4 8 BRN P4 Table A 8 TIA 568B 10 100BaseT RJ 45 Connector Signals Please consult the 10BaseT and 100BaseT cabling specifications for details on cable lengths n impedance wiring guidelines and other details to insure that your network configuration is properly designed and configured Gigabit Topology and Cabling The AM 8000 has a Gigabit port which complies with industry standard 4 twisted pairs The cable connected to this port must be Level 5e Level 6 or better The connector spec is TIA 568B for the RJ 45 connector AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 Page A 10 Appendix A AM 8000 UPS STATUS PORT The UPS status port is an optional connector that may be located on the back panel of the AM 8000 on a male DB 9 connector The UPS system also has a male DB 9 connector for its switch contact port To connect the UPS to the computer yo
252. re already cached by XPE degrades performance If both device types are installed use the SET NOCACHE dev for the AMD disk files Place a line for each AMD file in the AM8000 INI There is no hardware status display Status display numbers are shown in the system diagnostic window The following have not been tried and functionality is unknown o AMIGOS OSEXEC FORTRAN PASCAL COBOL RJE The AM 8000 s parallel port is not interrupt driven Using it may degrade system speed If upgrading from a system with two 2GB disks DSKO to 4 and DSK5 to 9 Create one 4GB AMD pseudo AMOS disk with a 10 logical split giving DSKO to 9 All of your software will work just the same When 2 GB of memory or larger is installed on the AM 8000 only 750MB is actually usable by AMOS This is a restriction of Windows XPE Since 750MB is larger than the capacity of any previous AMOS system this should not be a problem XPE uses the extra memory for a disk cache buffer We recommend a maximum of 512 MB for AMOS 8 x on AM 8000 systems For Eagle 800s with smaller number of jobs the maximum these systems need is about 256MB For Eagle 800LCs the maximum these systems need is about 100MB When using the DVD RAM drive with MAKDVD or DVD programs do not eject the media before executing a DVD U to un mount the media Additionally make sure that you are not logged into any DVD disk device when un mounting the DVD media The job will be frozen not able to log
253. red in the AM8000 folder on the C SystemVolume The E DataVolume is a logical partition of the first physical drive This drive is where the E Backups folder is located The system administrator should build the AMD disk files in the E AM8000 folder Zei Computer Fanesermat dj ne nee vm ee Im O SET e a ig Ox ub i Commuter biacagerrart Local TET gt A I E Srian Tonle tetas A Parton Basic NTS E ES i ford ET Petion Bee RITES Sege DAcisw Shared Fakdens Mea exe Banc ES Mesh Seer 41508 5958 LN LESE Sei aes e BE Persae oornticn BI Enters poten H Lopes deve E _ k__ al ns Figure 6 7 Computer Management Tool Disk Management Adding a RAID Volume amp Selecting the RAID as Bootable for the AM 8000 To make Active and Bootable Drive volumes the new disk or RAID drives must have a Primary partition When adding a RAID subsystem the drive must be allocated as a Primary partition and formatted in NTFS To format the RAID Right click on the Disk 1 box in the lower panel and go through the Disk Wizard Follow the on screen menus for this process Right click when the mouse pointer is over the box in the lower panel to activate the command menu When finished formatting Right click on the Blue bar and Select gt Active from the pop up menu The RAID subsystem is not bootable at this point First exit the Disk Management application scr
254. ress lt Advanced Settings gt screen will display lt Next gt is highlighted Press lt Norton Ghost task summary gt Gm ho E Check to see if all looks right In particular check the Approximate size of backup image If this is over 4000 MB you may need more than one DVD R If using CD R then 900 MB of disk data will compress down to the 700MB space on the CD R media If your backup is larger than this you must have more than one CD disc A CAUTION When you press ENTER the system will start a reboot to DOS process Please be sure all the AMOS jobs are ready to shut down 7 Run Now is highlighted Press a Norton Ghost gt application screen b lt OK gt is highlighted Press The AMOS Server will now shutdown and restart booting into PC DOS to run Norton Ghost It is important to remember that WHITE letters indicate highlighted items Norton Ghost 2003 application will display DO NOT TOUCH THE KEYBOARD OR MOUSE Ghost should start the backup process automatically unless there is a problem Ghost will eject the media when it is done so be sure to leave the door open on the AM 8000 chassis This should take about 3 minutes for every 1 GB of compressed data written to the DVD R If the backup does not fit on one disc Ghost will eject the disc and ask for another When the Ghost backup is complete the CD will eject and the system will automatically reboot into AMOS You can let users back onto the system unle
255. ress 4 In the Network Connections screen a Press J to highlight Local Area Connection b Press F opens the File menu item c Press R for Properties 5 In the Networking Properties screen a Press to highlight Internet Protocol b Press R for Properties 6 Inthe Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties screen set the IP information as desired If you do not have a DHCP Server do not check Obtain an IP address automatically Instead assign a permanent IP This IP address is needed for Microsoft Printer and File sharing and for VNC access to troubleshoot system problems For AMOS to initialize the packet driver the XPE side must have an IP AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 System Administration Page 6 35 met Penh TEP EP Properties The sample on the left shows this but your numbers will probably be different Fill in the DNS addresses if you have any When you are done Select gt OK The Server must be shutdown and restarted to install these changes Figure 6 9 Setting XPE s IP Disabling Folder Shares To disable a Folder Share use the lt Explorer gt Application Search the folders for a little blue hand holding the folder name In our example below Error Logs is shared To turn off the share right click with the mouse cursor over the Error Logs folder From the pop up menu Select gt Sharing amp Security In the figure on the left we clicked on the Share this folde
256. ry the files will end up in While normally this is the C AM8000 folder always use full paths such as C AM8000 file to be sure To use these programs LOG into the correct P PN account before executing the command While in single user mode you are usually in the default directory However various other tasks undertaken by other AMOS jobs can cause AM8000 EXE to change paths If you are not careful about the directory and disk account you may accidentally copy the files to the wrong location If this happens it will cause you extra work to get the files to the proper location The worst problem would be to copy over existing files erasing needed data AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 10 2 Chapter Ten Command Formats Both AMOS and XPE command syntax work with both TODOS and FMDOS Use whichever you re more comfortable with The general syntax for AMOS commands is Command Destination Source option XPE command syntax has the general format Command Source Destination option The source and destination file specifications are in opposite order in AMOS and XPE When 7 separating the file specifications with a space AMOS interprets the command according to XPE DOS syntax when using an equal sign AMOS 8 x uses the AMOS syntax Whichever syntax used be sure to put the file specifications in the right order or you could copy the wrong file and possibly erase data you wanted Most AMOS commands ignore spa
257. s AM 8000 Server Front Panel Controls and Indicator s Figure 2 1 on the next page shows the front panel on the AM 8000 deskside chassis The panel has the following controls and indicators o The Power Indicator light is always lit when power is supplied to the Server o The Disk Indicator light is lit whenever there is hard disk activity o The Reset button allows the operator to reset the Server from the front panel Once the Reset button is pressed the hardware will be reset and the Server will reboot To avoid losing any data make sure there are no applications running before you press the Reset button o The front panel Power On switch allows you to turn the Server on AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 2 4 Chapter Two P itch MP System Rowen mse Power On indicator System Reset button Disk Active indicator Figure 2 1 Front Panel Controls and Indicators deskside chassis AM 8000 Server Rear I O Panel The types and number of connectors on the rear panel of the AM 8000 Server will vary depending on the equipment included with the order Figure 2 2 shows the standard AM 8000 rear panel configuration Figure 2 2 AM 8000 Rear Panel Configuration Deskside Chassis Master ON OFF switch AC Input receptacle External SCSI bus connector PS 2 keyboard amp mouse ports Parallel port connector USB connectors Serial port DB 9M Video Monitor connector UPS interface connector optional 10 100 MB Et
258. s only needs to be done once after inspecting all Configuration Tabs To write the changes to the system registry you are required to Select gt File gt Exit from the main diagnostic screen Then Select gt Quit AMOS Disks Tab Now click on the AMOS Disks tab When AMOS 8 x is installed the standard system disk DSK is AM8000 AMD which has six logicals initially 32 MB each in size Additional disk subsystems may be defined as shown below The alternate boot disk file provided is AM8kSub AMD Up to nine additional disk subsystems can be defined Use the Create button to define your own disk files or select the Browse button to use other existing disk files AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 AM8000 Configuration Program Page 3 5 Using the Create button you will define the number of logicals the size of each logical drive in MB and the filename of the AMD disk The location of the file is typed into the PC Data File input box These files are stored on any XPE formatted hard drive connected to the system Even a disk file on a DVD RAM media can be accessed through this method Please do not place the boot disk the DSK device on the DVD RAM media this is extremely slow compared to regular hard disk drives DVD RAM media is used for backups of system data AM8000 Configuration EE xj General Amos Disks Virtual Terminals Serial Ports Printers Network Scsi Devices Amos Disk PC DataFile Amos System Di
259. s not the AMOS IP address The default password to the AMOS 8 x Servers is am8k This 4 character password is case sensitive To install the UltraVNC viewer on the Remote PC browse to the C AM8000 WINXP folder Find the program named Ultra VNC 100 RC18 setup exe Transfer this file to your remote PC that is running Window 2003 Windows 2000 or Windows XP Execute the setup program on the remote system This will install the help files PDF files and the Server and viewer programs Follow the instructions this program displays To gain access to the AMOS 8 x Server each system has a unique access name in the following formats S2AM8Ksn0100 for Series II AM8000 serial number 0100 AMS000 Sn0075 for Series I AM8000 serial number 0075 S3AM8KSn0100 for Series III AM8000 serial number 0100 S3Eagle800Sn0101 for Series III Eagle 800 serial number 0101 Eagle800 Sn0035 for Series I Eagle 800 serial number 0035 S2Eagle800sn100 for Series II Eagle 800 serial number 100 AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 6 40 Chapter Six o To change the default password follow the UltraV NC Server documentation or reinstall the UltraVNC software on the AMOS 8 x Server Input the new password when the installation program asks for it o To terminate a VNC session Select gt X in the VNC program window o To disallow VNC access remove the TCP port 5900 from the network firewall properties Defining a Local Workgroup The AMOS 8 x
260. s Guide Remember that assigning the total memory to AMOS is controlled by the RAM size in MB input box of the lt AM8000 Configure gt program See chapter 3 for this information AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 System Administration Page 6 11 To see a display of the current memory allocations on the Server use the SYSTAT command SYSTAT N In addition to many other pieces of information about the status of the Server SYSTAT shows how much memory is assigned to each job The SYSTAT command is explained in detail in the System Commands Reference Manual To permanently change the amount of memory allocated to a job modify the system initialization file per the instructions below 1 Make a copy of the initialization file and edit it as discussed previously 2 Scan through the file until you find the SETJOB statement that attaches the terminal to the specific job whose memory you want to change The amount of memory allocated to that job is one of the parameters in the SETJOB statement immediately following the terminal name The number normally in Kbytes is reflected in the SETJOB statement following the terminal name and is the amount of memory currently allocated to the job This number can be increased or decreased as long as you keep in mind how much total memory the Server has and how much memory the other jobs need 3 The last statement in the system initialization file is MEMORY 0 This statement allocates to th
261. s an example g TIMZON Adjust the parameters for your local time zone 5 Logto SYS and VUE the ETH101 ERZ file Add any ersatz names for your installation 6 If your INI file currently does not enable the network we recommend you use the AM8000 INI or a modified version of AM8000 INI as the TEST INI 7 Use MONTST AM8000 TEST INI to shut down the system and then reboot to test the network enabling INI file AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 System Administration Page 6 13 AMOS DISK MAINTENANCE Analyzing the Disk A disk diagnostic program reads data from a disk If the Server cannot read an area of the disk it reports the problem Checking the disks frequently with disk diagnostic programs helps prevent data loss the sooner you catch a malfunction the less data is likely to be affected The type of problem found by disk diagnostics is known as a hard error because it means data is lost A soft error means the Server had trouble reading the data but data was not lost Disk diagnostics do not report soft errors If a diagnostic program indicates problems you may need to restore data from a backup copy or reconstruct the data on a damaged disk If you have this type of problem consult the section Recovering From Disk Errors in the System Operator s Guide Before running any of the disk diagnostic tests especially if you suspect a problem it is a good idea to use the SET DSKERR command SET DSKERR SET D
262. shown in Figure 6 2 and 6 3 Eds Wee Fovortes Toe Help OwO Bena re ob 3 Se wn j Ile s Evert aver Loca secant Fee 3 24 2005 1 24 2005 aos aos a3 2ajznu5 3 34 2005 Aj24 2005 3 24 2005 3 24 2005 3 24 2005 Figure 6 2 Computer Management Event Viewer Clear Application Logs AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 6 30 Chapter Six 1 Date Sources C bh desktop ini Event wewer Local Security Pr Bippsrosoft MET F Figure 6 3 Computer Management Event Viewer Select No save of the Application logs To execute this function Select No button Select Event Viewer Select System and right click Select Clear all Events This is shown in Figure 6 4 and 6 5 Pile Bde wee Fueowike Took uncos Compo Ma Hor 44120 Seite Cento Wa Nor 49120 Sore Conroe Ma b s 40120 Gens Contra Ma Mor 3 21 20 Service Conbeol Ha Mor 4 31 2 0 ace Conia Ma Mor 4 31 X Save Cento Ms Mor 4 31 20 See Cone Me Mew 410120 Seno Conia Ma Mor 4 29 43 Trpg Mor 3 20 32 bemedobxos Hor 4 20 37 application Popup Nor 4 29 37 Applicata Pagug Mes dr Sewer Nor 1259 40 Sacer Mor gami Hor mahi re Figure 6 4 Computer Management Event Viewer Select System logs to be cleared AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 System Administration Page 6 31 Li Computer Management Comput
263. sing the software For example when using AlphaWRITE on an AM 65 terminal pressing at your document display takes you to the Editing Menu Each software package has a separate translation table file for each Alpha Micro terminal driver AM62 TDV AM65 TDV and so on When using AIphaWRITE using the function keys may insert spaces To avoid this be sure to set ACKW AIT TRUE in your AlphaWRITE initialization file Unless you are using the AM 70 or WYCOL emulation the correct translation table for the Console s function keys is the same as the translation table for an AM 62A terminal USING FUNCTION KEYS Both the AM 62A and AM 65 terminals have sixteen function keys However most PCs keyboard has twelve To make up for the missing function keys the PC keyboard uses the and keys AMOS 8 x uses the same function key translation as other popular Alpha Micro communications products such as inSight and AlphaLAN except that function keys and are also used The following keys or combinations of keys on the PC keyboard correspond to the sixteen function keys and some other keys many PC keyboards lack on an Alpha Micro keyboard AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page C 2 Appendix C AMOS FUNCTION KEY TRANSLATION AMOS Function Key PC Key For example for FUNCTJ1 press ALT 1 to to and and Or and to to DEE to SHIFTI Fi0 to DECHE and SHIET FI2 and or and sHiFT F13 to F16 to HELP and XEC EWwLINEa
264. sk osk CMAMBO00SRAIDLVT AMD Browse Create Disk Subsystem 1 sub CX amp M8000NAMBkSubAMD Browse Create Disk Subsystem 2 NEW CMAMB000 am8000 amd Browse Create Disk Subsystem 3 Ip Browse Create Disk Subsystem 4 Browse Create Disk Subsystem 5 Ir O O Browse Create Disk Subsystem 5 DL i p mmm Qi Browse Create Disk Subsystem 7 I 1 Browse Create Disk Subsystem 8 Browse Create Disk Subsystem 9 urb JD AMB000 4PR20044MD Create OK Cancel Apply Figure 3 5 AMOS Disks The 3 letter disk definition for the device must be the same in the DEVTBL BITMAP SYSTEM and MOUNT statements in the AM8000 INI file The disk driver to use for all definitions in this screen is PCDSK DVR Log to DVR and COPY NEW DVR PCDSK DVR in our example Repeat this process for any other added disk device In the above example Drive C is a RAID Level 1 drive with an RAIDLV1 AMD file created with 12 logicals and 2 56GB per logical The released operating system was then copied into the new RAIDLV 1 disk file to make it bootable Later in this chapter we will detail the process for building new AMD disks Virtual Terminals Tab Next click on the Virtual Terminals tab Eight virtual terminal windows can be defined depending upon the AMOS user license Two terminal emulators come with AMOS 8 x With the mouse
265. specify the file extension Refer to the appendix for sample INI files The initialization file must exist in the C AM8000 folder under XPE if the L switch is used AMSAFE Boot shortcut will execute the AMSAFE BOOT MON and AMSAFE BOOT INI file This is a minimal system configuration for trouble shooting the system if the current AM8000 INI has problems For Eagle 800 or AM 8000 Servers we provide E18SIO Boot will initialize 18 PC serial ports You can create your own by copying and renaming one of the provided shortcuts Select the shortcut and right click and select properties Then change the boot INI in the target line GENERAL HINTS amp RESTRICTIONS The following list contains miscellaneous items to watch out for which may not be AM 8000 specific o When working in the BIOS configuration the flat panel screen may complain about the resolution and ask that you press buttons 1 amp 2 to cancel the message Buttons 1 and 2 are the first and fourth buttons from the left on the lower front of the flat panel o Serially connected PCs should always have the terminal emulator ZTERM AIphaLAN etc running It should be in the PC s Start folder If the PC is powered on but the terminal emulator is not running it will signal the AMOS system to hold terminal output In some cases this can on any AMOS system cause the boot or other processes to hang o The PARITY program is no longer supported because it was a hardware specific
266. splays the appropriate error message on your screen The DSKANA Command The DSKANA command is an important part of your disk maintenance routine DSKANA analyzes the data on a specified logical disk and reports lost and mis linked disk blocks inconsistent block counts and other file errors Each file on the disk is stored in one or more disk blocks AMOS keeps track of which disk blocks are currently used in files and which are not by means of a special structure called a bitmap Each disk has its own bitmap DSKANA compares the information in the bitmap with the actual data on the disk to make sure the bitmap is accurate For example if DSKANA finds a disk block that is part of a file but the bitmap shows the block not in use DSKANA reports an error When DSKANA finishes analyzing the disk it rewrites the bitmap unless you tell it not to Use DSKANA frequently on all of the Server s disks It is a good practice to use DSKANA on every disk just before performing a disk back up to tape For more information on DSKANA see the System Commands Reference Manual NEVER use DSKANA unless using the C option described below while other users is accessing the specified disk doing so may damage the bitmap and the files on the disk To use DSKANA follow these steps 1 Log into OPR by typing LOG OPR ENTER 2 Type DSKANA followed by the device name of the disk you want to analyze For example to analyze DSK1 type DS
267. ss to execute the Restore 14 Allow the Ghost Software to restore the data This takes about 10 minutes for the first logical After the drive is loaded from CD Ghost will ask to lt Reset Computer gt Press and allow system to restart 15 Eject the CD and remove it Place it back in the storage jewel case 16 When the system restarts press the ESC key on the keyboard during the 5 second count down Execute the windows lt Explorer gt application and inspect the C and D volumes If the drive was empty the operator must initialize the D DataVolume drive as described earlier in this document New drives After a Ghost Partition Restore Initialize Second Logical Partition Procedure 1 From the lt AM8000 Diagnostic gt window a Select Tools Control Panel b Select Folders AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 System Administration Page 6 49 Nel 11 12 13 14 15 16 In the right panel double click on Administrative Tools In the right panel double click on Computer Management A new screen Computer Management a Find Under Storage double click on Disk Management Disk Management application For the Disk 0 drive you should have a C SystemVolume in Blue To the right of C you may have an unallocated black box 12 94GB for STAM 8000 or SlEagle 8002 34GB Bas SystemVoll IC Date Viol D 34 1B GB 4 15 GB NTFS 30 03 GB NTFS Crke Healthy TGegrerh SP p
268. ss you choose an Image Integrity Check Optional Image Integrity Check For an extra check of the quality of the backup the system administrator can do an Image Integrity Check This process like the backup requires all users be logged off since the Server will reboot into PC DOS The integrity check almost takes as long as the original backup Use the numbered procedure below l Press to select lt AM8000 System Diagnostics a Press T to open Tools b Press to select Ghost Press 2 Press to select lt AM8000 System Diagnostics a Select File Exit b Select Quit to close down AM8000 AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 6 46 Chapter Six 3 The Norton Ghost application will still be on the screen Ghost Basic is displayed a Press to Ghost Advanced Press 4 Ghost Advanced menu display a Press I for Image Integrity Check A Image Integrity Check Wizard application screen a Next is highlighted Press b The input box for the Image filename will display Image file name gt c Press d Press to Browse button and Press ENTER e Open application box will display f Browse with the mouse to the correct device the E CD DVD drive Then browse to find the GHO image file and select it g When the file is highlighted Select Open button h The image description box should appear with the description of backup 1 Press j lt Next gt is highl
269. ssembly language instruction set used by the Alpha Micro computers AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 AMOS Software Applications Page 5 5 O O O AMOS Assembly Language Programmer s Manual which contains information on the assembler linkage editor object file librarian and global cross reference program used by the assembly language programmer AMOS Monitor Calls which contains information on the interfaces to the AMOS operating system available to the assembly language programmer AlphaFIX User s Manual which contains information on the screen oriented debugger program AlphaFIX What Third Party programs are known to work on AMOS 8 x The following Alpha Micro third party programs have been reported as working not working or with special limitations under AMOS 8 0 For more details contact the software developer 0000000 0000900000000 0 0 AlphaFAX Version 2 0 Multi Version 2 1 192 6 with the latest patches for AM8000 AlphaMAIL Version 1 2B with EMAIL LIT updated AlphaWRITE Version 2 2 AlphaCALC Version 2 0 VersiCOMM 3 1 399 ZCMP 2 1 105 Folders 3 0 109 AutoLog Ver 3 5 305 works with this known restriction SLAVE LIT works on the PCCOM ports does not work on the SIO ports MSP SSD Protector 2 8 both PIC LIT and CODE LIT SFORCE both Versions 1 0 112 and 2 2 135 Metropolis Version 7 5 VICS Models amp Macros Version 7 2 SuperVUE Version 3 1h IMS Version 5 0 18 Madics software
270. state of the art high performance hardware that when combined with our multi user AMOS operating system software provide a new level of performance and added versatility There are a number of physical components that go into the construction of your AMOS 8 x Server that provide the ability to process input display and store data Some of these components are interchangeable between systems These include internal serial ports disk drives RAID subsystems tape drives CD RW and DVD RAM devices The following sections highlight the major hardware components of the AMOS 8 x Server family For technical information on these devices refer to the specification sheet supplied with your Server AM 8000 Series III Multi Processor System Board The Multi Processor system board provides the AM 8000 with o One Dual core Opteron high speed processor 2 processor optional o SAS controller with up to 8 SAS drives o Optional SCSI controller with support for two Ultra 320 SCSI busses o Six SATA connectors for up to six SATA disk drives o Two Gigabit 1000 100 10 Mbps and Fast Ethernet 100 10 Mbps communication ports o Sixteen DDR DIMM sockets for support of up to 64GB of PC5300 Registered DDRII RAM o Support for ATA 100 66 33 IDE and ATAPI devices o BluRay multi media DVD RAM drive o Two 9 pin serial I O ports with modem control o Integrated video graphics controller for system display console o PS 2 keyboard and mouse ports o CPU temperature an
271. stem encounters an unsupported instruction or monitor call or any other s function that should be supported that is causing a problem please give Alpha Micro the specific details and why it is important Since the instructions are emulated changes could be made The AMOS 8 x Servers are not limited by the CPU chip instruction set AMOS 8 x currently does not support the following AMOS monitor calls subject to change without notice o plock punlok prespn posspn spawn kill AMOS 8 x implements the Motorola 68000 microprocessor architecture with some additional capabilities subject to change without notice o 68020 addressing modes are implemented o 68020 integer multiply and divide instructions are implemented o Allother 68020 and 68040 instructions are not implemented including o cmp2 cas cas2 o pack unpack not to be confused with the monitor calls of the same name o callm rtm chkxx bkpt trapec o Allbit field instructions AMOS 8 x denies 68020 capabilities but will attempt to run programs that have the required 68020 processor flag set Of course routines that directly access I O Ports will generally not work as this is different hardware Some system and job information in AMOS memory is either not valid or has different meanings Most of this is directly related to the internal operation of AMOS 8 x such as the job run queue Generally this is only an issue if you are using custom assembler code and not using
272. stem must also have the Voltage selector set correctly INSTALLING THE OPERATOR CONSOLE MOUSE AND KEYBOARD The video display that is used when installing software and running diagnostic programs is called the Operator Console There are two basic things you must do to install the Operator Console o Verify that the AC voltage for the location is compatible with the console specifications and plug the console AC power cord into the AC voltage source o Connect the console video cable to the 15 pin VGA output connector on the back panel of the Server Install the mouse and keyboard connectors to their respective connectors on the back panel of the Server See Figure 2 2 amp 2 4 for details AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 Installation Page 2 9 TURNING THE SERVER ON Once the Server is turned on be very careful never to move the Server while power is on doing so could damage the disk drives inside the unit Turning the Server Off at the end of this chapter will describe how to power down the Server correctly before moving it For the AM 8000 Series I Server verify that a SCSI Terminator is installed on the back panel next to the power supply If the Server was shipped with a RAID subsystem make sure it is connected to the SCSI expansion connector and the SCSI Terminator is attached to the second connector on the RAID subsystem Also if your AM 8000 Server also includes one or more AM 905 or AM 3501 Serial I O subsystems ma
273. t number typed on it This number is unique for each motherboard of any type If an SSD failure message occurs in the Diagnostic Window during Boot a special file is created during this process The file created is C AM8000 amefg cfg This file needs to be EMAILED to Alpha Micro Technical Support for analysis Technical Support can tell what has gone wrong and provide the correct assistance to re enable the SSD Do not change the XPE hardware manager settings for any network interface adapter This will change the CPUPIC code There is specific information in the AM 8000 Service manual and Eagle 800 Service manual to set up the CPU board CMOS correctly before this procedure should be attempted After CPUPIC is Accepted Clean UP and Hide VTM8 1 Type to select the Alpha Micro icon to display lt AM8000 Diagnostic Window a Select Tools Control Panel b Select Folders c Select C AM8000 Eamos and double click 2 Inthe right panel locate and Select EAMOS INI double click on it 3 Inthe Notepad editor a Edit this file and UN Comment the AMSIO VTMS Pseudo null line by removing a in column 1 b The next line down Insert the so that the AMSIO VTM8 PCVTM 10 AM62C line is commented out 1 Below is how the EAMOS INI file should look when this procedure is complete Virtual Terminals AMSIO LIT VTM8 PSEUDO NULL 100 100 100 shipping mode AMSIO LIT VIM8 PCVIM 10 AM62c 200 200 200 CPUP
274. t to the left box and drop it When installing a new PC serial port you must do this through the XPE lt Device Manager gt To access the Device Manager program from the lt AM8000 Diagnostic gt window Select gt Tools gt Control Panel then Select gt System and double click The lt System Properties gt window will display Select gt Hardware tab In the next screen Select gt Device Manager button AMB8OO0OO Configuration General Amos Disks Virtual Terminals Serial Ports Printers Network Sosi Devices Serial dts detected on PC PL seral port CON T PC serial port COM2 PC serial ports assigned to Amos Amos serial port COM1 Assigned to PC serial port COM1 Amos serial port COM2 Assigned to PC serial port COM2 3X PC serial port COM3 3X PC serial port COM4 gt lt PC serial port COMS X PC serial port COME X PC serial port COM PC serial port COMS gt lt PC serial port COMS X Amos serial port COM3 gt lt Amos serial port COM4 9 Amos serial port COMS 3X Amos serial port COMB 3 Amos serial port COM 3 Amos serial port COMB D Amos serial port COMS Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned X PC serial port COM10 3X PC serial port COM11 X PC serial port COM12 gt lt PC serial port COM 13 X PC serial port COM14 3X PC serial port COM15 PC serial port COM16 gt lt PC serial port COM17 X PC serial port COM18 x Amos
275. table chassis instead of the standard pedestal style shown in the previous figures The rack mountable chassis is a 4U chassis configuration with slides optional dual redundant hot swappable 400 watt power supplies cooling fans and two removable drive bays Figure 1 3 AM 8000 Rack Mount Server The AM 8000 Series II Full Tower chassis is taller than the previous deskside model The AM 8000 Series II main board CPU heat sink clearance for peripheral device mounting needed a different internal design This chassis can mount 5 full size devices and up to two 3 2 drives Special peripheral drive mounting brackets are required to use the two lower drive mounting positions at the bottom of the peripheral mounting bay Figure 1 4 AM 8000 Series II Full Tower Chassis For configurations requiring more serial peripheral devices either the AM 3501 or AM 905 31 Serial I O subsystem is available as an expansion option for the AM 8000 providing expansion capability beyond that contained in the AM 8000 enclosure You also may run the Eagle 450TX terminal Server or older Alpha Micro computer models as terminal Servers which can Telnet into the AMOS 8 x Server Series III AM8000 systems come in a new Tower Rack mount chassis as described in the marketing announcement AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 Introducing AMOS 8 x Servers Page 1 3 HARDWARE DETAILS The AM 8000 Series I II III and Eagle 800 Series I II III systems use
276. tal conditions To access this filter move the front panel of the computer over the edge of a table Underneath the front bezel as shown in Figure 8 1 locate two plastic fingers Simply push the two latching tabs one on each side of the access slot underneath the bezel towards one another and slide the air filter down and out of the bezel Carefully observe the orientation of the bezel so that you can re insert it oriented the same way you removed it Wash the air filter with soap and water dry it thoroughly and re insert it into the bottom of the bezel until the latching tabs click into place Figure 8 1 Air Filter Removal The inside of the cabinet should be cleaned twice a year at a minimum Do so with the system shut down and powered off Only qualified Alpha Micro service technicians should do this Service inside the cabinet if done incorrectly may damage the system and void the system warranty Use a clean soft 1 paintbrush to remove dirt from heat sinks fans vents cables and circuit boards Use canned air to blow out dirt from the chassis and power supply Use a soft cloth to remove any residue from the tape drive and the CD drive tray AM 8000 RACK MOUNT SERVER The 4U Rack Mount chassis has multiple air filters which should be cleaned every six months These filters are in the front door and on both left and right sides of the chassis Removing the filters requires a Phillips screwdriver to remove the screws holding the fil
277. tallation will be missing time there is a configuration change to the Server This up to date backup will then have all the information about the specific installation Then this backup should be copied to alternate media and labeled for future use RI The system administrator should perform a Ghost backup to a file of the C SystemVolume any AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 System Administration Page 6 47 If the boot AMD disk file was on the first disk partition then the installation s AMD disk files will have to be regenerated and the application software MTURES ed back onto the drive If the system administrator places the AM8000 AMD boot disk on the D drive it will also have to be restored from the D GhostBackups After a Ghost restore to a new disk drive if you have additional backups of just the AMD disk files then you are safe These AMD files will need to be copied to the correct locations and then Configured in the AM8000 program as described in Chapter 3 System Software Load from Ghost CD or Disk Image The numbered procedure below is used to load any hard drive with the AMOS 8 1 Bootable Recovery CD At the Console follow the procedure by executing the commands Read the screen titles and responses and take the appropriate action Please be very careful with this procedure while entering the C System Volume disk size when performing a Partition restore If the disk size is larger than what the hard drive was partition
278. tape drives perform very well and have capacities up to 100GB Most installations use tape for daily backups for the Server data and programs There are 20 40GB 60GB and 100GB drives available mainly for the AM 8000 Server The older 4 8GB drives are popular on the Eagle 800 Servers DAT tape drives are quickly disappearing These older DAT drives from your old system will work on the new Servers but are slower and have a single ended interface limiting the data transfer rate These devices do work if you follow the SCSI configuration rules and map the tape drive to an AMOS SCSI ID The typical tape holds about 2 to 4 GB of data Again these tapes are used for daily incremental backups or contain archived data CD R media is new to AMOS systems Normally this media is used during a Ghost Image backup of the Server The Server must shut down AMOS and restart into PC DOS for Ghost to make the image backup of the selected logical disk The Ghost CD R media holds about 900MB of compressed disk data The initial install of the AMOS software is about 380MB to 500MB of data depending on the system model When performing the backup the operator must feed the CDs to the CD or DVD drive It will therefore take some time to perform this type of backup This media is write once read many CD RW media is new to AMOS systems Normally this media can only be used with the packet writing software from the XPE environment This media cannot be used directly with Norto
279. te administration You may add port 53 if DNS is needed but most sites do not need this port iv If not under that column Select gt Add button and fill in the missing numbers v Verify that the Permit Only for UDP Ports is Checked vi Verify that the lt UDP Ports gt box displays Port Numbers 137 138 for peer to peer network access You may add port 53 if DNS is needed but most sites do not need this port vii If not under that column Select Add button and fill in the missing numbers vii Verify that the Permit Only for IP Protocols is Checked ix Verify that the IP Protocols box displays NO Port Numbers d For the lt TCP IP Filtering window gt Select OK button to apply these settings To exit out of lt Advanced TCP IP Setting gt Select OK button To exit out of Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties Select OK button To exit out of Local Area Connection Select Close button This completes the Firewall Enabled section If you made changes to the system settings the system will reboot If no changes were made you re done Allow the system to re start If these settings do not work for you try adding TCP port 53 Remember that the system is now open but restricted to the above ports When you are done with remote administration it is a good idea to remove the ports defined above to re enable the complete firewall protection If you are having problems with DNS you may enable IP
280. tem can also display a status Table 9 1 Diagnostic Display Status Codes AM8000 AND RELATED PROGRAM STATUS CODES 01 Start AM8000 MON 04 AMS8000 Mon Ran out of queue blocks 09 AMS000 Mon Memory parity error 10 The IDV was not found in account 1 6 on the boot device 11 The TDV was not found in account 1 6 on the boot device 12 AMOS INI file not found in account 1 4 on the first logical of the boot device 22 AM8000 MON DIRREE CHKUPD SMEM block added 88 Unimplemented SVCA call 90 TRMICP Input buffer 1023 Overflow BB Diagnostic TEST C1 Parity error C2 Parity error EE PCNDV NDV Invalid socket in Ethernet port EF Supervisor Stack is 83 396 used B0 ACE DVR No channel control block index BO ACESIO DVR Unassigned channel packet received EE Invalid socket in Ethernet port from PCNDV NDV AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 9 2 Chapter Nine AM 113 XX BOOT ROM CODES 33 Controller boot ROM started after being reset B1 Reading the EAMOS MON from disk and loading into the AM 113 board An error at this point indicates the file may not exist Data that was backed up is not guaranteed B2 Reading the EAMOS INI from disk and loading into the AM 113 board An error at this point indicates the INI file is missing B4 Started booting EAMOS C5 Do you want to enter CMOS setup You have three seconds to press the key on the terminal attached to
281. ter 3 EAMOS must boot and display in this window for the controller to accept the CPUPIC CPUPIC Entry 1 4 Power up the Server and allow it to boot AMOS 8 x Verify that the lt AmpcTERM gt window appears From the AM8000 Diagnostic window Select Configure Menu In the Configure Menu General display a In the Magic Code Input box place the Mouse cursor over the White box and left click b The operator must type in the 12 digit number on the white tag on the Main CPU board and hit Enter Each mother board has a unique CPUPIC number no two systems are the same c For example is 373077313033 Enter twelve numbers no spaces or periods d Make sure that the VERIFICATION PASSED message appears in the green bottom status line You re done If no verification message appears you typed the code in wrong This must be done correctly or the AMOS PIC code and SSD will not Function The system will be in single user mode only AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 AM 113 xx Information amp CPUPIC Procedure Page F 5 If the system hangs you did not enable the VTMS port The AMPCTerm terminal emulator must be on the console monitor for this procedure to succeed If both status lights on the AM 113 xx controller are on all is well If only one light is on a problem exists Restart the Server with a Power Up RESET and try again Each CPU board shipped from Alpha Micro has a white label with the 12 digi
282. ter brackets in place Remove the assembly and clean the filters with canned air or wash them and dry the assemblies Reinstall the filter assemblies with the original mounting screws These chassis have 3 large fans and they move a lot of air so the filters could get clogged quickly AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 8 4 Chapter Eight The side filters are mounted here Figure 8 2 AM8000 Rack Mount Server To remove the power supply module slide the latch above the power switch and toward the fans and use the metal handle to pull out the supply Figure 8 3 Optional Dual Redundant 400 Watt Power Supply Subsystem AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 Chapter 9 Status Display Codes When the Server boots a series of codes appears in succession in the System Diagnostics display window This information is presented here for the System Administrator s use The diagnostic window has more information than the 2 digit display on previous Alpha Micro systems If an error occurs during booting it will display in Red and a text description may follow Normal AM 113 50 status codes are displayed in Magenta AMOS Status Display XX Any program that writes to the FEOO status display has this message This is displayed in Oranse The older status codes that are active in AMOS 8 x are documented here The status code is indexed on the left with xx double braces and a description follows Different programs in the sys
283. terminal to get the spooler started followed later by the actual start up command Add in the following statements into the TEST INI file in the appropriate area of the INI Refer to the Simple Initialization above JOBALC spool2 TRMDEF LPT2 PCLPT 2 TELTYP 100 100 100 TRMDEF DUMMY PSEUDO NULL 80 80 80 SETJOB spool2 DUMMY 20K LPTINI LETTER PIN WAIT spool2 Change the DEVICE statement in the LETTER PIN Printer INitialization file to reference TRM LPT2 For example DEVICE DRM LPT2 Other Windows network printers may be added just use another number in the Printers tab of the lt AM8000 Configure menu For more information on printer initialization files and printer spoolers AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 6 8 Chapter Six refer to the AMOS Users Guide For information on constructing cables to connect a printer see Appendix A In addition to Windows network printing AlphaTCP LPR network printers can be defined AlphaTCP LPR network printers are the same as on any other AMOS system and are not covered in this section A large number of processes must work together for this printing to work correctly These are tied together by logical names link by link Many installations use the same logical name for all of the links thus reducing installation issues An example of this is using the name LPT2 for all of the links Others use names that seem appropriat
284. the E DataVolume with the current AMD disk files is also important The AMD files must be backed up The AMD files contain the programs and customer data running on the Server This data backup can be a Ghost backup or Network or Disk backup of just AMD files Another option is a Streamer tape backup of the AMOS programs and data files inside of AMD files The System Administrator needs to make the decision as to the media and backup data type that will be used for this important portion of the Server s data Backup Considerations MTUSAV style backups are fully supported on AMOS 8 x Servers Older tapes written on previous AMOS systems are readable with AMOS 8 x The newer tape drives are faster than on earlier systems To significantly reduce the backup time consider the following which may influence the disk configuration you select o An AMOS AMD disk over about 6GB may not be compressible with Ghost onto a 4GB DVD so for larger AMOS AMD disks the 20 40GB or larger AM 65X streamer is recommended The AM 65x drives are considerably faster than the 4 8GB AM 629 streamer All SCSI 2 streamers work on the AM 8000 installed on Channel B o Another choice is splitting the E drive s 13GB of space into three 4GB AMOS disks One could be used for quick backups of one of the others Then any of the 4GB AMD disks could be transferred to AGB DVDs Any of the these backup DVDs can later be mounted and accessed directly from AMOS 8 0 o Or split t
285. the controller will boot using whatever parameters are then in the CMOS setup AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 AM 113 xx Information amp CPUPIC Procedure Page F 3 AMOS 8 X AND EMBEDDED AMOS This section describes the setup of Embedded AMOS The AM8000 EXE program controls what is loaded into the AM 113 xx board AM8000 Exe downloads the EAMOS MON into the AM 113 xx memory Then it downloads the EAMOS INI file This file is very specific to this embedded controller It looks like a normal AMOS32 INI but is different The AM 113 xx board uses AMSIO LIT to reserve a terminal slot for each serial port that could be connected The Eagle 800 uses an AM 113 45 board which has no SIO bus expansion The EAMOS INI file only reserves 4 SIO slots for the on board serial ports The on board ports are controlled by the SIOO IDV These ports are re assigned to AMOS 8 x when the normal AM8000 INI file executes the TRMDEF line for ports PCSIO 1 to 4 DO NOT CHANGE the Baud Rate or Terminal Driver in the EAMOS INI file The EAMOS INI a file uses 9600 baud and the Null terminal driver for all ports This allows the AM8000 INI file to set the correct baud rate from either baud rate table and does not perform any keyboard translation or output any boot messages to these ports The AM 8000 uses the AM 113 50 board which supports SIO bus expansion The SIO bus is connected to the AM 349 50 adapter board using a 68 pin cable The AM 349 50 cable adapte
286. the operating system loaded on the new drive prior to installing in the upper tray o H moving to a larger drive first mount the new larger drive on the secondary IDE channel of the system Use the Ghost Clone Tool to load the existing disk drive data to a new drive and partition the drive to the size desired Then power down and mount the new larger drive into the primary drive tray Mount the second new same size drive in the lower tray O When replacing drives with different models the number of heads of the new drive must be the same as that of the original drive If you select HDD TYPE to AUTO in the BIOS and place the new larger drive in the upper tray the RAID system will be unable to start and data on the disk will be lost AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 Document History Revision Date Description A00 March 2004 Initial release rewrite of prototype Aug 2003 Document A01 May 2004 General update and reformatting for on line usage Included on AMOS 8 0 Update CD A02 Sept 2004 Added information on Network Firewall details and I O subsystem A03 March 2005 Added information on AM 8000 Series II and Eagle800 Series II Systems A04 January 2006 Updates for Jan2006 software update Osinst 8 changed in chapter 4 B00 January 2008 Updates for Jan2008 software update for Series 3 Systems AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO 1 100BaseT connections A 9 10BaseT connections A 9 A ABTCP INI 6 13 Accounts
287. the terminal keyboard Take a moment to look at your keyboard so you can easily locate these keys later KEY CAPS LOCK DESCRIPTION Sometimes labeled or with an arrow that curves to the left is the carriage return key Just as you press the carriage return on a typewriter to begin a new line on the page a tells the computer you are ending a line of input and are beginning a new line The computer does not normally process an instruction from you until you press to let it know you are finished with that line Is the deletion key it backspaces AND deletes It may be labeled Or DEL If you make a mistake while typing an instruction to AMOS you can erase it using the key The key on most keyboards acts much like the shift key on a typewriter By holding down SHIFT you can type upper case letters and the symbols on the upper half of the keys with two symbols While the CAPS LOCK key is enabled letters you type appear in upper case The CAPS LOCK key on most keyboards does not affect keys other than letters This key may be labeled ESCAPE or ALT MODE It is used with several application programs such as AlphaVUE to signal the end of input or to switch between command modes however you do not use at AMOS command level Use the or CONTROL key with other keys to enter a different kind of character a control character AMOS and much of the software on the computer interpret control characters as special instructions
288. thernet 10 100 1000 Mbps port is next to the AGP slot This port is enabled and mapped for use with AMOS in the standard configuration The second 10 100Mbps port is closest to the Video connector AM8000 Series II has 3 network ports two GigaBit ports in the same positions as Series I and one 10 100 bps ports This latter port is turned off in the BIOS setup Series 3 Am8000 has two GigaBit Ethernet ports The Eagle 800 system has one 10 100 Mbps Ethernet port which is mapped for use by AMOS Series III Eagle800 system has on 1000 100 10 Mbps Port Alpha Micro s latest networking software AlphaTCP and AIphaNET software are included within the AMOS 8 x Release The driver for the Ethernet port allows both AlphaNET and AlphaTCP to function All models of the AMOS 8 x Servers have the DHCP client enabled as shipped from Alpha Microsystems If the user does not have a DHCP Server on site then the XPE side of the Server must have a unique IP assigned Refer to Chapter 6 for the procedure to assign an IP to XPE System Console amp Diagnostic Status Display A 15 17 or 19 LCD flat panel system console is included with all AM 8000 systems and is optionally available for Eagle 800 Servers The console monitor is required for the system operator to interface with AMOS 8 x The AMOS 8 x system displays diagnostic information in the System Diagnostic window of the AM8000 program The boot process shows the normal functions of the system in the
289. tings are accessed in this program Do not go below 800x600 o Network Connections The network interface TCP IP and firewall settings are accessed through this menu To set a fixed IP for the XPE side of the Server use this program o Regional and Language Option is used to setup the XPE system s language and other format info As of the Series II AM8000 and Series II Eagle 800 the Languages installed are English French German Italian and Spanish Regional setting for anywhere in the world is also selectable Earlier systems only have English installed o The System selection will allow the administrator to access the Computer name menu which allows you to change the Workgroup name of the Server The System Restore menu the Advance menu the Remote access menu may also be accessed but are seldom used The hardware Device manager also has a menu o Administrative Tools allows the operator to clear the event logs start or stop services and get to the Computer Management program o The Computer Management application allows the administrator to Defragment disk drives add and format and allocate disk partitions on new hard drives RAID subsystems or DVD RAM media You may also access the hardware Device manager The Event viewer is accessed from here The System and Application event logs should be cleared about once every other month o The Device Manager is used to update device drivers and set up serial ports and other hard
290. tive functions RAID Level 5 has redundancy built in to provide data security There are hot spares available to RAID level 5 subsystems These subsystems are normally quite large depending on the disk drives used The newer RAID systems can use up to 200GB disk drives The whole disk subsystem would then be partitioned into logical drives under XPE and formatted in NTFS file system Then whole logicals could be used for online backups of the Server data Even with this redundancy you should still backup the RAID to Streamer tape The RAID unit which Alpha Microsystems provides has a SCSI 160 interface and is normally installed on AM 8000 Servers This unit is available in 3 4 5 6 8 drive configurations A USB Disk is also new to AMOS systems These drives can be plugged into the spare USB 2 0 port on the system and are recognized by XPE as a removable volume Data files can be moved from the active internal drives to the USB drives Using USB disk is slower than internal drive because the data is converted into a serial stream This option is faster than using DVD RAM media with a copy The USB drive can be used from AMOS as a backup AMD device The AMD disk file is even bootable The slowest alternative to data backup is moving files via peer to peer networking to a network file Server The process also requires AMOS to be shutdown to allow the AMD disk files to be copied to the file Server Formatting and Initializing DVD RAM Media There ar
291. troller will then mirror the primary to the secondary drive When ordering an Eagle 800 system the user should keep in mind one thing The AM 452 RAID controller takes up two full size drive slots The Server is normally equipped with a CD RW or DVD RAM drive This consumes all full sized drive bays in the standard Eagle deskside chassis If the user wants to mount a full sized Streamer tape drive the standard chassis cannot accommodate this configuration To handle this configuration you can optionally configure the Eagle 800 into the taller 4 drive bay chassis the AM8000 uses The taller chassis can provide the mounting space required by the AM 452 CD RW DVD drive and Streamer tape The Eagle 800 may also be ordered with the Rack Mount Chassis with the dual hot swappable power supplies RAID EXPANSION The AM 452 RAID system may have the disk capacity expanded by installing larger capacity IDE drives Here are a few guidelines to follows o For best performance Place two identical same manufacturer model hard drives in the RAID trays o Set the jumpers for both hard drives to MASTER Single drive mode The normal BIOS setting for the primary IDE channel HDD TYPE is AUTO o If the same model is not available use a larger capacity and higher speed from the same manufacturer Make sure the BIOS HDD TYPE is set to MANUAL and enter the data of the original disk Always place the source disk in the upper tray before starting the system o Have
292. ts The text of your letter or report is displayed on the terminal screen as you enter it with a keyboard With AlphaVUE you can move quickly through the document correcting and adding words inserting or deleting lines moving paragraphs and so on AlphaXED is a programmers screen editor that has a few different features but still does the same thing as AlphaVUE See the section on Office Information Products below for information on the AlphaWRITE word processing package Utility Programs The standard AMOS release contains over 200 utility programs and device drivers In addition because of the unique way AMOS handles commands you can easily create your own utility programs Some of the standard utility programs allow you to do such functions as copy rename and erase files sort the data inside files use a task management system to schedule and perform background tasks that run without operator control print files while you perform other tasks at the same time use the ISAM system to organize and retrieve information quickly and back up data automatically at a convenient time when nobody is using the computer in the middle of the night for example Application Programs Your local Alpha Micro VAR has a variety of programs available for these Servers many of which are aimed at specific business needs such as general accounting dental office legal office real estate management manufacturing inventory control educational lear
293. ts radio lectriques pour les appareils numeriques tels que prescrites par le R glement sur le brouillage radio lectrique tabli par le minist re des Communications du Canada L exploitation faite en milleu r sidential peut entrainer le brouillage des r ceptions radio et tele ce qui obligerait le propri taire ou l op ratour pendre les dispositions n cessaires pour en liminer les causes Battery Warning CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions ATTENTION Il y a danger d explosion s il y a replacement incorrect de la batterie Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du m me type ou d un type recommand par le constructeur Mettre au r but les batteries usag es conform ment aux instructions du fabricant This computer contains a 3 volt lithium battery When necessary replace the battery with Panasonic or Ray O Vac CR2032 only Use of other batteries may present a risk of fire or explosion Replacement batteries may be ordered from your authorized Alpha Micro reseller Safety Warning This computer contains no user configurable components that require opening the computer case Because the power supply in this computer is capable of outputting high current levels hazardous to your safety the computer case should only be opened by an authorized service technician
294. u will need a cable with two female DB 9 connectors The following table shows the pin out connections required to make this cable You will need an 8 wire cable and both grounds are necessary UPS Cable Signal FDB 9 Name FAULT GND GND ON BYPASS LOW BATTERY INVERTER ON AC PWR FAIL NO CONNECTION NO CONNECTION Table A 9 AM 8000 UPS Status Port Signal Pinouts FAULT GND GND ON BYPASS LOW BATTERY INVERTER ON AC PWR FAIL REMOTE RESET LOCAL RESET 2 3 6 8 4 9 5 1 7 Currently there is no software available to run this interface We suggest you use the Serial UPS monitor software to obtain this information INDUSTRY STANDARD DEVICES The industry standard devices on every AMOS 8 X Server are o VGA Video Connector 15 pin The Eagle 800 has two VGA ports which are controlled from the XPE Control panel Display menu o PS2style Mouse PS2 style PC keyboard o USB ports Oo AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 Appendix B The Control Characters The terminal keyboard allows you to type control characters which perform special functions A control character is the signal transmitted to the computer when you hold down the key and press another key at the same time The following list contains the most important control characters The AMOS User s Guide contains a complete list of control characters and their functions Control C Control C is the system interrupt command You use it to interrupt
295. unted to provide large data storage Once the drive is un mounted XMOUNT Dev U it can then be removed from the system This technique does not allow the AMD disk files to be stored on a CD R DVD R media Only internal hard drives USB drives and DVD RAM media that are re writeable are allowed to store AMD disk files that can be accessed Good news for Eagle 800 users with CD RW drives If you format CD RW media with the packet writing software in UDF format then write an AMD disk file onto this media it can be accessed from AMOS with the XMOUNT utility The administrator can backup system data onto the mounted AMD file written on the CD RW media In AMOS copying files to the new UPDx disk device is faster than copying files to an already created DVDx disk Creating a backup with the MAKDVD program is still the fastest full disk backup The time it takes to create the initial AMD file on the backup hard disk is still the same The reason why the UPDx disks can be updated quicker is that XPE write caching is helping to write to the AMD disk device Updating the DVDx disks are slower because there is no write caching to help out DVD Software Revisions The DVD software and device drives have been updated to function under AMOS 8 0 Find the Command Reference sheets for the DVD programs and follow their directions on how to use the DVD programs The minimum working versions are listed below Proqram PPN Version or Hash Comments DVD L
296. ware functions You may add new serial ports tape disks or DVD RAM drives with this utility program o Fonts to add fonts for printers Many are already installed o Folder options Leave the standard setting alone o Internet options The Internet browser is not recommended for use on AMOS 8 x for virus protection AII Internet files and temporary directories have been deleted from the AMOS 8 x Servers o Keyboard The option for key repeat is settable Mouse options are accessible but the standard setting should be used o Power options The standard setting should be used Never allow the disk to spin down Never allow the system to hibernate Never allow the system into a standby mode The AMOS Server must always be available UPS support as of AM8000 Series II has been added o Printers and Faxes Use this program to add Printers to the system so they can be mapped for AMOS use in the Printers option of the AM8000 program o Scheduled Tasks Normally not used o User Accounts As of AM8000 Series II User accounts for the Administrator and System operators has been added o As of AMS8000 Series II Windows XPE SP2 Service pack 2 patches has been added for greater security O AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev B00 System Administration Page 6 29 The functions that are not used for AMOS 8 x Servers or have little use may be disabled in XPE are Control Panel applications o Accessibility Options not need
297. y are on different devices they are different accounts and contain different files As a security measure a password can be assigned to each account on each disk Anyone who doesn t know the password cannot log into the account See Chapter 5 for how to assign passwords AMOS 8 x Server Owner s Manual Rev BOO Page 4 4 Chapter Four To display a list of all the accounts on any device on the Server use the PPN command Type PPN and the name of the device you want the list for and press ENTER To see all the accounts on DSKO type PPN DSKO To show a list of all the files in any account use the DIR short for directory command To see a list of the files in the account you are currently logged into type DIR W While the DIR command will list the files from any account to access the files in an account the user must log into it as described in the next section Now that you have a general idea of what disk accounts are and how to use them you can decide how to organize your own files into accounts If you want to create more accounts on a hard disk see Chapter 5 You can find more information on the PPN and DIR commands in the System Commands Reference Manual LOGGING ON The LOG command serves two purposes it identifies the user to the Server and lets the user choose what disk account to access The user must log onto the Server after logging off or after booting the system Enter the disk account desired For example type
298. y you will need to inspect the system for a disconnected power connector disconnected SCSI cable or no SCSI Terminator installed Do these checks before attempting to install any software If a DVD R media is in the DVD drive tray it may take a little longer to go through the boot process since it tries to read the DVD media first to boot from it For AM8000 Series II system if a USB drive is plugged in during power up the Main board BIOS will change the boot device to the USB drive Un plug the USB drive and power back up and it should revert back to booting from the SCSI drive 0 If the USB drive will always be plugged in and turned on please go and change the boot order in the BIOS setup screen and then restart the system INSTALLING AMOS 8 X SOFTWARE If the AMOS software is not already installed on the hard disk the system software is provided on an AMOS 8 x Bootable Recovery CD The Server should have been delivered with the software CD If no CD was included contact your VAR for help To install the system software press the eject button on the CD DVD drive and place the AMOS 8 x Bootable Recovery CD into the drive tray with the printed side UP and close the tray Hold the reset button in for 7 seconds and release it The system will then perform a Power On Self Test POST and then will display a message asking to boot from CD Press the space bar and allow the system to boot from CD The Norton Ghost menu will be displayed If you

AMOS 8.X Server Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents